Home

Lucent Technologies Release 6 Security Camera User Manual

1. Icda6fop RPY 021698 Figure 5 35 Fiber Optic Cable and Adapter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add the Fiber Optic Cable Page 5 80 Icda7fop RPY 021698 Figure Notes 1 Fiber cable 3 SC SC adapter or ST SC adapter 2 1 O connector adapter bracket Figure 5 36 Bracket Attachments 10 Wrap the cable disconnect label around the fiber optic cable See Figure 5 37 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add the Fiber Optic Cable Page 5 81 prda0001 RPY 021898 Figure Notes 1 To outside plant fiber Figure 5 37 Cable Disconnect Label 11 Close the rear door A CAUTION Avoid bending fiber optic cables to a radius smaller than 1 5 inches 3 8 cm to prevent mechanical stress on the cables Plan the use of cable ties to avoid crimping the cable or creating a fixed stress point where at a later time movement of the cable causes it to exceed the minimum bend radius A CAUTION Be careful not to crimp the fiber cable when you are pe
2. Issue 5 May 1998 Page 2 47 Figure Notes 1 N O oOo A W PP Equipment Room 8 Satellite Location Work Location White Row on 110 Terminal Block Purple Row on 110 Terminal Block Blue Row on 110 Terminal Block Central Location for Terminals 1 through 6 crdfSpr CJL 103096 D Inside Wire Cut Down to Connecting Block 258A Adapter 10 Voice Terminal 12 Information Outlet To Port Connector on Cabinet Cabinet 1 Carrier A Slot 03 Figure 2 26 Example 3 Pair Labeling to Information Outlet The satellite symbol must be installed at all connection points between the blue field and the information outlet It must also be installed at the information outlet itself DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Page 2 48 Figure 2 27 shows an example labeling scheme for 4 pair circuits from the equipment room to the information outlets The labeling scheme for 3 pair circuits from the MDF to a satellite location oZ ZILLA LLL LLL LLL L LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL r o LA F
3. LUU NWW LUU NNS MMMUWKWKN W p UUU NNN J Now LUMA LUU NNW LUU NNSS iii UUU NN 7 7 O ane 120086 0 Figure Notes 1 Cabinet 1 PPN with 1 Switch Node 3 H600 278 Metallic Cable 2 Cabinet 2 through 16 EPN 4 To other EPNs Figure 1 11 Standard Reliability CSS Connected Release 6r with 1 Switch Node DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Fiber Optic Interconnect Cabling Page 1 32 High Reliability Figure 1 12 shows typical fiber optic cabling between cabinets The cable between the El and SNI on the PPN cabinet is a pre installed metallic cable H600 278 1 Connect the cables between the PPN cabinet and each EPN cabinet in an alternating port slot order 3 19 4 18 5 17 and so forth Cabinet 1 is a Release 6r PPN with 1 Switch Node Q MMMIWN LUU NAW NMM LUU NW _ fF NW LU SSS LURU NN ih i WS LUU NW or t O amna Kic 120296 gt Figure Notes 1 Cabinet 1 PPN with 1 Switch Node 3 H600 278 Metallic Cable 2 Cabin
4. ON OaOKR WD i e ON OaOKR WD Figure Notes 1 8 Wide Plug 3 Plastic Housing 2 Cord 4 8 Wide Jack Figure 5 23 8 Wide Terminating Resistor Adapter 440A4 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment BRI Terminating Resistor Closet Mounted 110RA1 12 Page 5 59 The 110RA1 12 terminating resistor block is designed to mount in the telecommunications wire closet It consists of twelve 2 pair circuits and provides the 100 Ohm termination used for ISDN BRI circuits Figure 5 24 shows the wiring of the 110RA1 12 Three rows of 110D 4 connector blocks are mounted on a printed wire board along with circuit resistors and capacitors The bottom row is designated as the input row and the top and middle rows are designated as the output rows The circuit assembly is mounted on a standard 110A 100 pair mounting base The 110RA1 12 is shipped with preprinted designation strips to simplify circuit identification and installation 45 46 47 48 T Figure Notes 1 Circuit 1 2 Circuit 12 3 Output Row A 4 Output Row B 5 Input Row C 6 Only First Circuit Shown to All 12 Circuits 2APR Per Block 7 110D 4 Connector Block 8 Printed Circuit Board Mounted on Standard 110A or 100APR Block
5. 09 BPWRLST 29 REF2RTN 04 REF2LST 33 SPWRRTN 08 SPWRLST 28 REFIRTN 03 REF1LST 10 CCA01T 35 CCA01R 11 CCBO1T 36 CCBO1R hn aaa Ss as 14 CCA03T 39 CCA03R 16 CCA04T 41 CCA04R 17 CCB04T r975bb7 MMR 051396 Issue 5 May 1998 Page D 9 A carrier TN780 25 pair pin conn ALRM5B 48 ALRM5A 23 ALRM4B 36 ALRM3A 09 ALRM2B 31 ALRM2A 06 ALRMOA 04 B carrier TN780 25 pair pin conn ALRM5B ALRM5A ALRM4B 36 ALRM4A 11 ALRM3B 34 ALRM3A_ 09 ALRM1B 41 EXTSYNOR 21 Figure D 8 STRATUM 3 Clock Connector DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 D Connector and Cable Diagrams Page D 10 FS 22 H600 274 15 pin D sub 50 pin system to CSU connector Pin Pin number number 1 1 2 4 2 2 4 5 o sa ooo o i o eS 5 50 pin clock connector Pin r975bb8 MMR 051396 Figure D 9 Sample H600 274 Cable DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 E References Basic DEFINITY ECS Documents Page E 1 References This section contains a list of user documents for the DEFINITY
6. Complies UL 1459 Certified CSA 22 2 Approved EN6950 Approved CE Important Safety Instructions Please read the following helpful tips Retain these tips for later use When using this power supply the following safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons Read and understand all instructions Follow all warnings and instructions marked on this power supply This product can be hazardous if immersed in water To avoid the possibility of electrical shock do not use it near water To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble this product except to replace battery This product should be operated only from the type of AC power source indicated on the label If you are not sure of the type of AC power being provided contact a qualified service person Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of line or electric shock Disconnect the cords on this product and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed If liquid has been spilled into the product If the product has been exposed to rain or water If the product was dropped or the housing has been damaged If
7. Code Number Description Comcode 1110A2 Apparatus Mounting Frame 104032495 1110C1 Cable Support Assembly 104175120 1110A1 End Dress Panel 104176268 2110A1 Top Dress Panel 104176276 2110B1 Bottom Dress Panel 104176284 Issue 5 May 1998 Page 2 11 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Install Cable Slack Managers Page 2 12 Install Cable Slack Managers 1 Place the Z113A Cable Slack Manager against the wall under the MDF See Figure 2 6 Align the left side of the cable slack manager with the first terminal block of the trunk auxiliary field 2 Place the next cable slack manager beside the previously installed unit Align the tabs and interlocks and snap the units together 3 Repeat Step 2 until all cable slack managers are installed gt NOTE Nine 1 4 inch holes 0 63 cm are provided in a cable slack manager base if earthquake mounting is required If a base is mounted on an uneven floor shims may be required for leveling and to assure proper fit of the covers Holes are provided in the sides of the base for bolting cable slack manager together Bolts and shims must be obtained locally 4 The system cables will route through the cable slack manager as shown Complete is covered later in this chapter cbdfflr CJL 102396 Figure Notes 1 System Cabinet 4 Spa
8. 3 Type set expansion link xxxx where xxxx is the either 1 of the cabinet carrier and port locations of the standby expansion link 4 Verify the screen displays Command successfully completed Command 5 Enter status cabinet lt 1 44 gt and press Enter See Screen 4 10 ee system all cabinets N SYSTEM STATUS CABINET 1 EMERGENCY SELECT SERVICE CABINET TRANSFER SWITCH EXP LINK STATE MODE TYPE 1A auto on 01A01 02A01 in active MCC 1B auto on 01B01 02B02 in standby Ns J Screen 4 10 Example of System Status after Expansion Link is Set DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 4 Test the System Check Circuit Pack Configuration Again Page 4 12 6 Verify the MODEs of the expansion links have changed 7 If any problems are indicated check the TDM cables and the inter cabinet cables in the associated EPN Check Circuit Pack Configuration Again 1 Verify the screen displays Command 2 Type list configuration all and press Enter 3 Verify all circuit packs installed in the system are listed in the reports Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6r to resolve any discrepancies System Test Completion Save Translations If any administration changes have been made save and make a back up copy of the translations Next Steps After the basic hardware is installed a
9. Table B 8 Option Switch Settings on TN464E F 120 Ohms Twisted pair 75 Ohms Coaxial requiring 888A adapter 32 Channel 2 048 megabits per second 24 Channel 1 544 megabits per second lOLOLOLOLOLeLeLeLeLeresere 3 Figure Notes 1 Backplane Connectors 6 120 Ohm shown selected 2 24 32 Channel Selector 7 24 Channel shown selected 3 75 120 Ohm Selector 8 75 Ohm 4 Faceplate 9 Connector 5 32 Channel 10 TN464E F DS1 E1 Interface Circuit Pack Figure B 3 TN464E F Option Settings DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork Page C 1 Cable Ductwork The cable ductwork is assembled from various group numbers from ED 1E465 facia paneling to cover the I O ducts is assembled from ED 1E464 The assembly installed after the cabinets have been installed provides ducts for three types of cables intercabinet cables I O cables tip and ring and AC power cables DC power cables are installed in ductwork per local codes Typical assembled ductwork is shown in Figure C 1 The 3 primary types of ductwork are detailed below a Shielded intercabinet cable duct Provides the path for cables connected between cabinets This duct is the first installed Covers for this duct should be stored until the intercabinet cablin
10. 1146 Power Distribution Unit 0003_1 PDH 062596 Figure Notes 1 Wall Mounting Plate 5 Power Cable 2 Battery 1149B Shown 6 Unswitched Outlet 120 VAC 20 Amp or 230 VAC 15 Amp 7 Battery Backup Switch Setting 3 1146B Power Distribution Unit 4 1145B Power Unit Figure 5 20 1145B 1146B Mounting Arrangement DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment 1145B Power Supply Page 5 48 Mount the 1146B Power Distribution Unit 1 Insert and securely tighten the 2 supplied 8 32 x 1 2 inch shoulder screws into the top holes designated for 1146B Power Distribution Unit on the bottom plate Mount the unit on these 2 shoulder screws using the key holes on the back of the unit Secure the unit by inserting the 8 32 x 1 inch screw through the bottom of the unit just above the wire clips into the plate and tighten Set the battery back up switch option to the 1 32 down position to provide battery back up to all outputs Connect the power distribution unit to the power supply with the power cable Refer to the power supply s right hand label to locate the output power connection Battery Mounting Wiring Three types of back up batteries are used the 1148B the 1
11. Buljeubis W33 BORSA ASAEEAEA RD em wan PERRET UETIEY ICY o mr PORE PELE PERE DE E gS EL ZL LE OL 6 8 Z 9 S v A L Figure 2 1 Example MDF Connections DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Equipment Room Hardware Page 2 3 Cross Connect Fields Each MDF contains a trunk auxiliary field and a distribution field The trunk auxiliary field contains 3 cross connect areas 1 The green field terminates the network interface leads from the Central Office CO and provides the terminals to cross connect the leads to the purple or yellow fields as required A single row of the 110 type terminal block can terminate twenty four 1 pair eight 3 pair or twelve 2 pair trunks The purple field terminates the trunk circuits from the system with WP 90929 List 1 or 3 concentrator cables Also 25 pair cables can be used to terminate trunk circuits from the system with each trunk circuit pack connecting to one 25 pair row of the 110 type terminal block Each terminal block row can terminate twenty four 1 pair eight 3 pair or twelve 2 pair trunks The yellow field provides cross connect terminals for all miscellaneous leads from the system such as alarm monitors emergency transfer relay power and attendant console power This field is used for emergency transfer wiring paging equ
12. 1149 Battery 1145 Power Unit On Battery Reserve Charging Battery Q Output Power On Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 50 0000000000000000 1146 Power Distribution Unit iii l l sl sl i ARRADA 1146 Power Distribution Unit o0o000000000000 Figure Notes 1 Wall Mounting Plate 7 il 0004_1 PDH 062596 4 First 1146B Power Distribution 2 Second 1146B Power Distribution Unit 3 T Cable H600 347 G7 Unit 5 1145B Power Unit Figure 5 21 Expanded Power Distribution Unit DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment 1145B Power Supply Page 5 51 Power Up and Test 1 Connect the AC power cord to the power supply and route the cord to an appropriate AC outlet using the clips provided on the unit gt NOTE A maximum of 4 power supplies can be powered from 1 dedicated 110 VAC 20 Amp feeder Use only unswitched receptacles Plug the cord into the outlet This powers up the power supply Check AC operation of the 1145B Power Supply by monitoring the LEDs PASS Green and yellow LEDs at the front
13. 150 feet 45 72 m 200 feet 61 m gt NOTE If more than 200 feet 61 m of 4 pair station cable is required a 451A in line adapter double ended modular female connector is attached to the cable and a second 4 pair cable of the required length is plugged into the adapter See Figure 2 16 Double modular plug ended 4 pair station cable Use this cable to provide nonstandard length runs between adapters and information outlets with push on connections It can also be used between adapters and modularly connected information outlets It is available in the same lengths as the single modular plug ended cable Bulk Cable Same as the 25 pair cable or multiple 25 pair cable however the bulk cable is not equipped with connectors Use this cable between the equipment room and satellite closets when both are equipped with punch down type terminal connecting blocks 4 pair station cable Use this cable when 4 pair station cables are to be field terminated on the 110 type terminal blocks in the equipment room or satellite closet and the information outlets require push on connections 451A Adapter Ordering Information Color Comcode Gray 103942272 Ivory 103786240 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Station Wiring Design Page 2 30 erdfad1 CJL 101596 Figure Notes 1
14. After the password is changed the new password must be safeguarded so no unauthorized administration changes can be made This password MUST NOT BE REVEALED to the customer or to any unauthorized person 1 Login as craft and enter change password craft Press Enter change password craft Page 1 of 1 SPE A PASSWORD ADMINISTRATION Password of Login Making Change LOGIN BEING CHANGED Login Name craft LOGIN S PASSWORD INFORMATION Login s Password Reenter Login s Password Screen 3 3 Typical Change Password Screen 2 Verify the Password Administration screen displays See Screen 3 3 The cursor is positioned on Password for Login Making Change 3 Type the password for the craft login assigned as crftpow when the system is shipped and press Enter The cursor is positioned on Login s Password 4 Enter the new password Valid passwords consist of a combination of 4 to 11 alpha or numeric characters At least 1 letter and 1 number must be used in each password Press Enter 5 The cursor is positioned on Reenter Login s Password Type the new password again and press Enter 6 Verify the screen displays command successfully completed DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Set Country Options Page 3 15 Set Date and Time 1 Enter set time and press Enter 2 Verify t
15. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Main Distribution Frame Page 2 4 Main Distribution Frame The MDF is located directly behind the system cabinet Figure 2 2 shows a typical installation using 900 pair 110P type terminal blocks l l M mecmdf KLC 060596 Figure Notes 1 Multi Carrier Cabinet 5 Station Distribution Field 2 Z113A Cable Slack Manager 6 Port Distribution Field 3 25 Pair Cable to System Cabinet 7 Trunk Auxiliary Field 4 Station Cables Figure 2 2 Typical 110A Type Terminal Blocks DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Installation Requirements Page 2 5 Installation Requirements Sneak Fuse Panels and Emergency Transfer Units Approximately 8 inches 20 cm of horizontal wall space is required for each column of sneak fuse panels Up to 25 connector pairs can be protected by each panel Horizontal wall space must also be provided for emergency transfer units 110 Type Hardware The trunk auxiliary field and the distribution field are mounted on the same wall Each 110P type terminal block is 8 5 inches 21 6 cm wide Vertical patch cord troughs are 5 31 inches 13 4 cm
16. Figure 3 4 Management Terminal Connections for Release 6r 5 For a DC powered system install an EIA 116A Isolator comcode 106005242 in series between the DTE cable and the TERM or Terminal Active connector DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Install Management Terminal Page 3 6 Remotely Connect Terminal A management terminal can be installed at some distance from the system Typical remote connections are shown in Figure 3 5 ec Q 6 8 ahomet 4 cydf050 PDH 041897 Figure Notes 1 Compact Modular Cabinet Slot 1 7 Line Cord 2 DCE Connector RS 232 8 Remote Modem 3 M25B 25 Pin to RS 232 Cable 9 DB9 to DB25 Converter ED3 1 70 ee eee G115 optional to connect to PC 4 Main Distribution Frame MDF 5 Public Switched Telephone Network 0 Remote Management Terminal or PC 11 Remote Location PSTN 6 103A or Modular Wall Jack Figure 3 5 Typical Connections to Remote Devices 1 Use Z3A2 Asynchronous Data Units ADUs and M25A cables on CDRU CAS PMS SAT PC BCMS terminal and Remote SAT 2 Use Z3A1 ADUs and M25B cables on System Journal printers 3 A TN556 ISDN BRI circuit pack is used with the 7500 Data Module DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carri
17. If the system contains a TN750 B Announcement circuit pack enter display announcements and press Enter If administered recorded announcements are listed enter list configuration software version press Enter Check Page 2 of this form to see when the announcements were last saved To save the announcements enter save announcements and press Enter Power Down System 1 At the PPN set the main circuit breaker to OFF 2 Atan EPN set the main circuit breaker to OFF Add Circuit Packs 1 Determine port assignment of circuit packs to be added 2 Install the TN767C DS1 or TN464C DS1 E1 Interface circuit pack in assigned carrier slot 3 Remove an existing TN756 Tone Detector Generator circuit pack and install the TN768 TN780 TN2182 or TN419B Tone Clock circuit pack in assigned carrier slots if required 4 Install a TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack if required and a TN748B or the non United States TN420B Tone Detector circuit pack if required Install Cables Install cables from cabinet to cross connect field as required Power Up System 1 2 3 At an EPN set the main circuit breaker to ON At the PPN set the main circuit breaker to ON The system performs a level 4 reboot loading the system translations from the translation card or the tape Rebooting takes 8 to 20 minutes After all trouble is cleared verify the EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO This restores the system to the
18. a Application Specific Documents a Documents on CD ROM GL Glossary and Abbreviations IN Index Issue 5 May 1998 Page vii DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 About This Book Page viii About This Book This book provides procedures and information for installing and initially testing the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Multi Carrier Cabinets This document covers information related to DEFINITY ECS Release 6 For details about changes for Release 6 refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 1 Change Description The following conventions describe the systems referred to in this book The word system is a general term and includes references to the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server DEFINITY Systems are called Release 5 Release 5r Release 6 and Release 6r All occurrences of Release 5r and Release 6r are called Release 6r unless a specific configuration is required to differentiate between product offerings Information in this book is applicable for Release 5 through Release 6 unless otherwise specified DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server is abbreviated DEFINITY ECS This book describes installation and wiring including 1 2 Placing and interconnecting the various cabinets and adjuncts Wiring from the telephone network interface to and including
19. multirate The new N x DSO service see N x DSO MWL Message waiting lamp DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 35 N N 1 Method of determining redundant backup requirements Example if four rectifier modules are required for a DC powered single carrier cabinet a fifth rectifier module is installed for backup N x DSO N x DSO equivalently referred to as N x 64 kbps is an emerging standard for wideband calls separate from HO H11 and H12 ISDN channels The emerging N x DSO ISDN multirate circuit mode bearer service will provide circuit switched calls with data rate multiples of 64 kbps up to 1536 kbps on a T1 facility or up to 1920 kbps on an E1 facility In the switch N x DSO channels will range up to 1984 kbps using NFAS E1 interfaces NANP North American Numbering Plan narrowband A circuit switched call at a data rate up to and including 64 kbps All nonwideband switch calls are considered narrowband native terminal support A predefined terminal type exists in switch software eliminating the need to alias the terminal that is manually map call appearances and feature buttons onto some other natively supported terminal type NAU Network access unit NCA TSC Noncall associated temporary signaling connection NCOSS Network Control Operations Support Center NCSO National Custome
20. on os oo o 1 6 Test Telephones and Other Equipment m Make Test Calls m Test 302C Attendant Console a Test External Ringing y N TA N P p a Test Queue Warning Indicator D eo a Test Integrated Announcement P A a Test Music on Hold ri A a Test Emergency Transfer KA A m Test Remote Access Interface Fa oa a Test Basic Rate Interface a Test Duplication Option Processing Element Interchange p a T D a Test Terminating Trunk Transmission a Test Stratum 3 Clock 7 a cH co m Perform Complete System Test ned a Activate and Test Alarm Origination Feature DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Contents A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables a LASER Product a Fiber Optic Requirements a Optical Cross Connect Hardware a Cleaning Fiber Optic Cables a Labels for Fiber Optic Cables a Making Changes at an LIU or Shelf a Routing Fiber Optic Cables Option Switch Settings C a External Modem Option Settings a Printer Option Settings a Call Detail Recording Option Settings a TN760D Tie Trunk Option Settings a TN464E F Option Settings Cable Ductwork D Connector and Cable Diagrams E References a Basic DEFINITY ECS Documents a Call Center Documents
21. Execute the change integrated announcements command This modifies the translations for the TN750B circuit pack to reference the TN750C circuit pack Verify proper playback of the announcements from the TN750C circuit pack by calling them Execute the release board 01c11 command for the TN750 B circuit pack where 01c11 is an example circuit pack location DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add Multiple Announcement Page 5 109 Add Additional TN750C Circuit Packs 1 Install the TN750C into a vacant slot in a carrier gt NOTE Any carrier is acceptable since power holdover is not a concern Administer a new data module on the TN750C circuit pack as described in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description Administer new announcements to that TN750C slot by executing the change announcements command and filling in the designated board location field for the circuit pack s location Record the announcements as described in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description Wait until the announcements copy from voice RAM to the on board flash memory the yellow LED on the TN750C starts and then stops flashing This may take about 10 minutes Move
22. Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Earthquake Protection Installation Page 1 36 8 A 3 8 16 threaded rod part number 845557073 is used to secure the 11 12 13 cabinet to each concrete floor anchor See Figure 1 14 Measure the distance from 1 of the anchors to the bottom of the cabinet Add 1 2 inch 1 3 cm to this measurement to allow the rod to be threaded into the floor anchor Add an additional 1 2 inch 1 3 cm to allow the rod to protrude up through the bottom of the cabinet For example if the distance from the floor anchor to the bottom of the cabinet is 10 inches 25 cm cut the threaded rod 11 inches 27 9 cm long When all 4 threaded rods are cut replace the raised floor panels removed injStep 5 Position the cabinet over the holes and adjust the leveling legs until the cabinet is level gt NOTE If the system is supplied with cable ductwork the cabinets must be level from front to rear and from side to side They must be square with respect to each other to within 1 8 inch 0 3 cm Insert the threaded rods through the cabinet bottom and thread into the concrete floor anchors Place a 3 8 inch flat washer onto each rod Thread a 3 8 16 hex nut onto each rod and tighten securely Repeat this procedure for each cabinet to be installed including the Auxiliary Cabinet and the Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Com
23. K Abbreviated Dialing Enhanced List n CAS Main A D Grp Sys List Dialing Start at 01 n Cvg Of Calls Redirected Off net Answer Supervision by Call Classifier n DCS Basic Y ARS Y DCS Call Coverage n ARS AAR Partitioning n Emergency Access to Attendant Y ASAI Interface n Extended Cvg Fwd Admin n ASAI Proprietary Adjuncts Links n External Device Alarm Admin n ATMS n Flexible Billing n Audible Message Waiting n Forced Entry of Account Codes n Authorization Codes n Hospitality Basic n CAS Branch n Hopitality G3V3 Enhancements n Hopitality Parameter Reduction n NOTE You must logoff amp login to effect the permission changes ao Screen 3 6 Typical Customer Options Form 2 Enable the optional features purchased by the customer as shown by PEC codes on the Customer Order In Release 6 systems a separate screen offers ASAI capability groups for selection in cases where the ASAI interface has been enabled Change this screen in the same manner as Page 1 of the customer options form Change and Logoff Critical Reliability System If a critical reliability system is installed 1 with both processor and PNC duplicated follow these steps Otherwise proceed to Change Site Data on page 3 21 gt NOTE Be sure PNC Duplication was set to y in the customer options form 1 Log off and log back in as craft DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issu
24. Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code 01A TONE BD 46 PASS 01A TONE BD 52 PASS 01A TONE PT 40 PASS 01A TONE PT 4 PASS 01A TDM CLK 148 PASS 01A TDM CLK 149 PASS 01A TDM CLK 150 ABORT 255 01A TDM CLK 151 PASS 01A TDM CLK 574 PASS Command successfully completed Command Screen 4 4 Example Test Results for Tone Clock 1A DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 4 Test the System Test SPE Duplication Memory Shadowing Link Page 4 6 Test SPE Duplication Memory Shadowing Link For high and critical reliability systems only 1 Verify the screen displays Command 2 Type test shadow link and press Enter 3 Verify the screen displays test results similar to Screen 4 5 g N TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code SHDW LNK 318 PASS Command successfully completed J Screen 4 5 Example Test Results for SPE Duplication Memory Shadowing Link 4 If result is FAIL for any test check the inter cabinet cables in the PPN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 4 Test the System Test Duplicated Switch Processing Element Interchange Page 4 7 Test Duplicated Switch Processing Element Interchange For high and critical reliability systems only 1 Verify the screen disp
25. cabinet Housing for racks shelves or carriers that hold electronic equipment cable Physical connection between two pieces of equipment for example data terminal and modem or between a piece of equipment and a termination field cable connector A jack female or plug male on the end of a cable A cable connector connects wires on a cable to specific leads on telephone or data equipment CAG Coverage answer group call appearance 1 For the attendant console six buttons labeled a f used to originate receive and hold calls Two lights next to the button show the status of the call appearance 2 For the voice terminal a button labeled with an extension and used to place outgoing calls receive incoming calls or hold calls Two lights next to the button show the status of the call appearance DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 10 call control capabilities Capabilities Third Party Selective Hold Third Party Reconnect Third Party Merge that can be used in either of the Third Party Call Control ASE cluster subsets Call Control and Domain Control Call Detail Recording CDR A feature that uses software and hardware to record call data same as CDRU Call Detail Recording utility CDRU Software that collects stores optionally filters and outputs call detail records Call Managem
26. l Set the tongue on the bottom of a cross aisle trough G in into the platform of the cross aisle riser C From above the trough run a self tapping screw through the slot in the trough and into the hole in the riser DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork Page C 10 xductcip KLC 071796 Figure Notes 1 A 5 E 2 B 3 C 4 G Figure C 5 Assembly of Cross Aisle Shielded Ducts 2 Install cross aisle troughs on any other cabinets requiring such connections 3 If there is no trough G to install in one end of the cross aisle riser C press a cross aisle shielded end cap F on the unused end of the riser Unlike earlier ductwork the endcap fits either end of the cross aisle riser The side walls of the end cap go outside the walls of the riser The ears on the bottom of the end cap go outside of the riser s bottom plate and the bottom plate of the end cap goes inside of the riser s bottom plate 4 Route the appropriate cables between the cabinets just connected DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork Page C 11 5 Set the shielded cross aisle trough cover H on top of the trough with its side walls outside of the walls of the trough and press it down until it completely cov
27. 1 An open circuit is preferred instead of battery voltage DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 B Option Switch Settings TN760D Tie Trunk Option Settings UNPROT 4321 s a PROT PORT 4 o 9 E amp M Issue 5 May 1998 Page B 11 1758183 RBP 050896 Figure B 2 TN760D Tie Trunk Circuit Pack Component Side Table B 7 TN760D Option Switch Settings and Administration E amp M SMPLX Prot Unprot Administered Installation Situation Preferred Signaling Format Switch Switch Port Circumstance To System Far End Co Located DEFINITY E amp M Type 1 E amp M Type 1 E amp M Unprotected Type 1 Compatible Standard Compatible Inter Building DEFINITY Protected Protected E amp M Protected Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Compatible Standard Compatible Plus Protection Unit Co Located Net E amp M Type 1 Any PBX E amp M Unprotected Type 1 Integrated Standard DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 B Option Switch Settings TN464E F Option Settings Page B 12 TN464E F Option Settings The TN464E F DS1 E1 Interface T1 E1 circuit pack interfaces between a 24 or 32 channel Central Office ISDN or tie trunk and the TDM bus Set the switches on the circuit pack to select bit rate and impedance match See Table B 8 and Figure B 3
28. External Modem Option Settings Page B 3 Table B 1 Modem Connection Modem Fields Continued Description Enable Error Control Turns on the V 42 LAPM and MNP error control protocols if available The field has a blank field of 6 characters as default The Paradyne products use the command N5 to enable V 42 MNP Buffer error control while the Intel product uses N3 to provide similar functionality This V 42 MNP Buffer mode attempts to negotiate V 42 error control with the remote modem If this fails the modem changes to MNP if this fails no error control is used This field is not case sensitive Default is upper case Misc Init Param This field has a blank as a default and a field length of 20 characters This field supports any initialization parameters not already specified The AT commands specified in this free form field is always the last initialization parameters to be sent to the external modem This field is not case sensitive Default is upper case Auto Answer Ring Number This field controls the number of rings required before the modem answers an incoming call This field has a blank default value in a field 6 characters long Typically the maximum permissible value for this register is 255 The values 1 255 denote the number of incoming ring cycles This field is not case sensitive Default is upper case Dial Type This field controls the type of interregister signaling to be used be
29. Install Circuit Packs 1 Power down the PPN then EPN1 and then EPN2 as required 2 At the PPN install the appropriate circuit packs See Table 5 20 Table 5 20 Circuit Pack Locations for Packet Bus in R5sitm PPN Circuit Pack Carrier Quantity Slot TN778 Control Carrier A 1 PACKET CONT TN570 Control Carrier A 1 or 2 EXPN INTFC 1 and 2 TN771C Control Carrier A 1 Any Available Port Slot 1 Quantity of this pack should equal the number of EPNs 2 Optional for digital trunk testing DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add Packet Bus to R6si Table 5 21 Circuit Pack Locations for Packet Bus in Each EPN Perform tests Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 114 3 At each EPN install the appropriate circuit packs See Table 5 21 4 Power up EPN2 then EPN1 then the PPN as required Enter change system parameters maintenance and press Enter Use this form to enable the packet bus Circuit Pack Carrier Quantity Slot TN570 Expansion Control Carrier A 1 or 2 EXPN INTFC 1 and 2 TN771C Expansion Control Carrier A 1 Any Available Port Slot 1 Quantity of this pack should equal the number of EPNs 2 Optional for digital trunk testing Resolve Alarms Examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Re
30. a Administer Attendant Console m Save Translations a Add Translations a Installation Completion m DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures 4 Test the System a Check System Status for Each Cabinet a Check Circuit Pack Configuration a Test TDM Bus in PPN m Test Tone Clock Circuit Packs a Test SPE Duplication Memory Shadowing Link DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Contents Page v a Test Duplicated Switch Processing Element Interchange LF a Test Expansion Interface Circuit Packs a Test TDM for each EPN a Test Tone Clock for each EPN a Test Tone Clock Interchange for each EPN alps a Test Expansion Interface Exchange for Each EPN a Check Circuit Pack Configuration Again a System Test Completion a LED Indicators 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment a Analog Station or 2 Wire Digital Station Example aio O jo a Analog Tie Trunk Example oa j a Digital Tie Trunk Example a DS1 Tie Trunk Example a Auxiliary Connector Outputs oa a Three Pair and Four Pair Modularity a Adjunct Power Connections m Attendant Console m 26B1 Selector Console a Connect External Alarm Indicators a Connect Power Distribution Unit External Alarm Wires 5 oa _ N O cd N a Remote N
31. lt lt lt bar 48 V Approved ground 48 V RTN EPN cabinet System single point ground 1 AWG To next cabinet Frame ground Ground terminal gt To CBC terminal on top of cabinet bar at the MDF 48 VDC and return Ground connection o oo terminal Ground block Main AC supply AC mains DC battery cabinet cydf_de KLC 010797 Figure 1 7 Typical Power and Ground for a DC Powered Cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect DC Power and Ground Page 1 19 Connect DC Power and Ground The grounding methods for the DC powered system are more complex than that of an AC powered system The following installation procedures refer to Figure 1 7 The numbers 1 8 in Figure 1 7 match the following subsections 1 8 Other figures may be referenced as required A CAUTION Grounding of the system shall comply with the general rules for grounding contained in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code NFPA 70 For more information refer to Approved Grounds jon page 1 23 1 Install Coupled Bonding Conductor Wires This is a conductor that connects to the single point ground block and run adjacent to pairs in an associated cable The mutual coupling between the CBC and the pairs reduces pote
32. 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Reboot High Reliability System Page 3 29 Reboot High Reliability System 1 Enter reset system 4 2 When the login prompt appears login as craft 3 About eight minutes after booting and at the Command prompt enter the status spe command Verify that handshake shadowing and refreshed are all shown to be either yes or on Enable Duplication and Boot Critical Reliability System Release 6r 1 2 O oa A O Enter change system parameters duplication Make sure duplication of both SPE and PNC are enabled on the screen that follows the command Confirm that a y is contained in both fields Enter save translation Enter reset system 4 to reboot the system When login appears on the screen login as craft About eight minutes after booting the system and at the Command prompt enter the status spe command Verify that handshake shadowing and refreshed are all shown to be either yes or on Administer Attendant Console Enter display system parameters country options and press Enter to verify the system s companding mode for its local stations is set to the desired value usually A Law for Europe and mu Law for North America and Japan If necessary enter change terminal parameters 603 302B1 and press Enter to change the default system level parameters and audio levels for these terminals gt NOTE For information about ch
33. 6 mm wire to the ground terminal block on the rear of the cabinet See 2 Route the wire to the Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC or to an approved ground and connect 3 Connect 1 end of a 6 AWG 40 16 mm CABINET GROUND wire to the ground terminal block at the rear of the cabinet 4 Route the CABINET GROUND wire to the AC load center single point ground block and connect Connect EPN Cabinet Ground s 1 Connect 1 end of a6 AWG 40 16 mm CABINET GROUND wire to the ground terminal block at the bottom rear of the EPN cabinet See Figure 1 2 2 Route the CABINET GROUND wire to the AC load center single point ground and connect 3 Connect each remaining EPN cabinet to the AC load center single point ground DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect DC Power and Ground Page 1 18 DC Power and Ground J58890CF Only Figure 1 7 shows a typical power and ground layout for a DC powered cabinet The size of the wire required for the 48 volt DC and 48 volt return must ensure the 48 volt DC supplied by the battery plant is maintained between 42 5 and 54 2 volts DC at all times for proper operation and to prevent hardware damage This procedure applies to both PPN and EPN cabinets 1 AWG ground wire DC power a cabinet pe 48 V RIN e Ground e PPN cabinet discharge
34. Aconsole s maximum distance from the system is limited See Table 5 4 Table 5 4 Attendant Console Cabling Distances Enhanced Attendant 24 AWG Wire 0 26 mm 26 AWG Wire 0 14 mm Console 302C1 Feet Meters Feet Meters With Selector Console Phantom powered 800 244 500 152 Locally powered 5000 1524 3400 1037 Without Selector Console Phantom powered 1400 427 900 274 Locally powered 5000 1524 3400 1037 Auxiliary Power A caution Do not use the 329A power unit for the attendant console The non essential functions of an attendant console and its optional selector console derive their power from an auxiliary power source Up to 3 consoles can use system power from through the auxiliary cable located in the trunk auxiliary field Provide auxiliary power for a primary attendant console through this cable so the console remains fully operational during short power outages gt NOTE For a console to realize the longest nominal battery holdover the console s TN754B or TN413 Digital Line circuit pack should reside in an EPN s expansion control carrier An attendant console can also derive auxiliary power from either a Individual 1151A or 1151A2 power supply MSP 1 power supply 258A type adapters Bulk power supplies such as the 1145A1 A console s maximum distance from its auxiliary power source is 800 feet 244 m for a 302A1 a 350 feet 107 m for a 301B1 and 302C1 DEFINITY Enterp
35. LSB 8 field The default value is 11101000 It is recommended that the default value be used unless it becomes absolutely necessary to change it The MSB means Most Significant Bit the LSB means Least Significant Bit Inthe Line Coding field enter the line coding information This information should match the line coding of the facility For T1 example line coding is b8zs For E1 example line coding is hdb3 Scroll to Page 3 and modify the fields as needed for the B PNC gt NOTE If this data is not correct wideband errors such as multimedia call handling may occur For T1 sites refer to T1 Installations Only For E1 sites refer to E1 Installations Only DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Administer Fiber Links Release 6r Only Page 3 28 T1 Installations Only a b The Framing Mode field is display only and shows the hardware setting The DS1CONV 1 Line Compensation and the DS1CONV 2 Line Compensation fields are display only and show the hardware setting Inthe Facility A Circuit ID field enter an optional facility name that is unique to each facility up to 40 alphanumeric characters Press Enter Adisplay similar to the following appears after the fiber link administration is completed RESET PORT NETWORK
36. Printer Option Settings Issue 5 May 1998 Page B 6 Table B 2 572 Printer Used with Management Terminal Function Function Name Menu Menu Status 01 FORM LENGTH 09 11 02 LPI 01 6 03 CPI 01 10 04 LQ or NLQ 01 LQ 05 BUZZER 01 ON 06 FONT 02 FONTCART 07 RESOLUTION 01 144 11 BUFFER 02 N LINE 13 PW ON MODE 01 ON LINE 14 DIRECTION 01 B1 DIR 1 15 BUFF FULL 02 LF CR 16 P E 01 ACTIVE 17 AUTO CARRIAGE RETURN CR 01 CR LF 18 ZERO 01 0 22 AUTO LINE FEED 01 CR ONLY 31 1 SKIP 01 OFF 32 CHAR SET GO GL 02 USA 33 CHAR SET G1 GR 01 UK 34 CHAR SET G2 03 GE 35 CHAR SET G3 07 LINE DRAWING 81 OFF LINE STATE 01 ALL RECEIVE 82 DSR 02 OFF 83 REQUEST TO SEND RTS TIMING 01 RTS 84 CD 02 OFF 85 CLEAR TO SEND CTS 02 OFF 91 OVER RUN 02 256 92 DATA BIT 02 8 93 PROTOCOL 03 XON XOFF 94 STOP BIT 01 1 95 PARITY 01 NONE 96 PBS matches connected device 01 9600 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 B Option Switch Settings Printer Option Settings Page B 7 Table B 3 572 Printer used as System Printer 572 Printer Option Settings Function Function Name Menu Menu Status 01 FORM LENGTH 09 11 02 LPI 01 6 03 CPI 01 10 04 LQ or
37. The Release 5 version of this document applies to Release 6 as well DEFINITY ECS Telephone Guide Builder Issue 4 555 230 755 Provides capability to produce laser printed documentation for specific telephones The software is supported by a comprehensive user s guide and on line help This product requires a 386 PC minimum of 6MB disk space minimum of 4MB RAM a printer supported by Microsoft GDI printer drive and Microsoft Windows 3 1 or higher A mouse is recommended This document applies to Release 6 as well as earlier DEFINITY systems DEFINITY ECS International Telephone Guide Builder Issue 1 555 230 742 Same as 555 230 755 but customized for international locations Installation and Maintenance DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Installation and Test for Single Carrier Cabinets Issue 3 555 230 894 Provides procedures and information for hardware installation and initial testing of single carrier cabinets The Release 5 version of this document applies to Release 6 as well This document is available in the following languages English German DE Dutch NL Brazilian Portuguese PTB European French FR Castillian Spanish SP Italian IT Russian RU and Japanese JA To order append the language suffix to the document number for example 555 230 894DE for German No suffix is needed for the English version DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Installation and Upgrades for CSCC Issue 1 555 230 124 Provide
38. a concrete encased ground or a ground ring If these grounds are not available the water pipe ground can be supplemented by 1 of the following types of grounds a Other local metal underground systems or structures Local underground structures such as tanks and piping systems Rod and pipe electrodes A 5 8 inch 1 6 cm solid rod or 3 4 inch 2 cm conduit or pipe electrode driven to a minimum depth of 8 feet 2 4 m a Plate electrodes Must have a minimum of 2 square feet 0 185 square m of metallic surface exposed to the exterior soil Concrete Encased Ground An electrode encased by at least 2 inches 5 1 cm of concrete and located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing in direct contact with the earth The electrode must be at least 20 feet 6 1 m of 1 or more steel reinforcing bars or rods 1 2 inch 1 3 cm in diameter or at least 20 feet 6 1 m of bare solid copper 4 AWG 26 mm wire Ground Ring A buried ground that encircles a building or structure at a depth of at least 2 5 feet 0 76 m below the earth s surface The ground ring must be at least 20 feet 6 1 m of 2 AWG 35 mm bare copper wire DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Approved Grounds Page 1 24 Approved Floor Grounds Approved floor grounds are those grounds on each floor of a high r
39. and slot for an expansion interface circuit pack in the system and press Enter Labels on the port network and carrier containing the board and the label on the strip under the board contain this information gt NOTE Circuit pack positions are usually given by cabinet carrier within cabinet and slot within carrier They may also be given by port within slot The term cabinet refers to one Multi Carrier Cabinet making up one port network A port network is defined as a group of cabinets connected together with one TDM bus 3 Verify the screen displays test results similar to Screen 4 7 This example is for circuit pack 1C03 test board 01c03 Port 01003 0100301 60100301 01C0304 01C0304 01C0307 01C0307 01C0308 01C0308 TEST RESULTS Maintenance Name Alt DT LN BD DAT LINE DAT LINE DAT LINE DAT LINE DAT LINE DAT LINE DAT LINE DAT LINE Command successfull Command 3188 3188 3134 3134 3671 3671 3138 3138 completed Name Test No 52 171 36 171 36 171 36 171 36 Screen 4 7 Example Test Board 1C03 SPE A Result Error Code PASS ABORT 1000 PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS 4 If any result is FAIL check the connections for the associated fiber optic link 5 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each circuit pack in the system DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 4 Test
40. and bolt the parts together as shown newduct KLC 071696 Figure C 7 Shielded Duct Connected to Old Style Riser Install Cross Aisle I O Ductwork 1 If required attach I O endplate group 6 to the cross aisle brackets group 10 See Figure C 8 2 Install a cross aisle bracket on both sides of the I O trough where cross aisle or wall trough is to be used Place the bracket inside the I O trough with its angle end outside Secure the bracket using three thread forming screws in each trough use the holes in the bracket closest to the angle 3 If cross aisle install brackets on I O trough of cross aisle cabinet 4 Place I O cross aisle trough group 10 or I O wall trough group 26 on brackets and secure with thread forming screws DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork Page C 13 duct3 KLC 071796 Figure Notes 1 1 0 Trough 4 I O Endplate 2 Use Only When Required 5 Cross Aisle I O Trough or I O Wall Trough 3 Cross Aisle Brackets 6 Front of Cabinet Figure C 8 Install Cross Aisle I O Ductwork or I O Cross Aisle to Wall Trough gt NOTE If wall trough is being installed locally provided hardware is required at wall end of duct DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork Page C 14 Ins
41. commercial light industry EN50082 1 CENELEC 1991 a Issue 1 1984 and Issue 2 1992 Electrostatic discharge immunity requirements EN55024 Part 2 IEC 1000 4 2 a Radiated radio frequency field immunity requirements IEC 1000 4 3 a Electrical fast transient ourst immunity requirements IEC 1000 4 4 European Union Standards Lucent Technologies Business Communications Systems declares that the DEFINITY equipment specified in this book bearing the Conformit Europe nne CE mark conforms to the European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives The CE mark indicates conformance to the European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89 336 EEC Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment TTE Directive 91 263 EEC and with i CTR3 Basic Rate Interface BRI and i CTR4 Primary Rate Interface PRI as applicable The CE mark is applied to the following Release 6 products a Global AC powered Multi Carrier Cabinet MCC DC powered Multi Carrier Cabinet MCC with 25 Hz ring generator a AC powered Single Carrier Cabinet SCC with 25 Hz ring generator AC powered Compact Single Carrier Cabinet CSCC with 25 Hz ring generator a Enhanced DC Power System Compact Modular Cabinet CMC with 25 Hz ring generator DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 About This Book Where to Call for Technical
42. port network PN A cabinet containing a TDM bus and packet bus to which the following components are connected port circuit packs one or two tone clock circuit packs a maintenance circuit pack service circuit packs and optionally up to four expansion interface El circuit packs in DEFINITY ECS Each PN is controlled either locally or remotely by a switch processing element SPE See alsojexpansion port network EPN jand processor port network PPN port network connectivity The interconnection of port networks PNs regardless of whether the configuration uses direct or switched connectivity DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 40 PPM 1 Parts per million 2 Periodic pulse metering PPN See processor port network PPN PRI See Primary Rate Interface PRI primary extension The main extension associated with the physical voice or data terminal Primary Rate Interface PRI A standard ISDN frame format that specifies the protocol used between two or more communications systems PRI runs at 1 544 Mbps and as used in North America provides 23 64 kbps B channels voice or data and one 64 kbps D channel signaling The D channel is the 24th channel of the interface and contains multiplexed signaling information for the other 23 channels PRI endpoint PE The wideband switching
43. 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Connector and Cable Diagrams Pinout Charts Page 5 148 Table 5 28 Port Circuit Pack Lead Designations Continued TN742 B TN747B TN753 TN760 B TN746 B Cross TN769 TN760C TN763 TN2183 Connect TN2147 TN754 TN760D TN763B TN767B TN793 Pin TN465 TN726 TN2209 TN762 B TN763C TN735 TN464E TN2793 TN2224 40 TXR 7 R1 7 TXR 7 SZ1 7 BR 7 R 20 41 PXT 7 E 7 PXT 7 S 7 LT 7 GRD T 13 T 21 42 PXR 7 M 7 PXR 7 1 7 LR 7 R 13 R 21 43 T 8 T 8 T 8 T 8 T 8 C_PRES T 14 T 22 44 R 8 R 8 R 8 R 8 R 8 R 14 R 22 45 TXT 8 T1 8 TXT 8 SZ 8 BT 8 T 15 T 23 46 TXR 8 R1 8 TXR 8 SZ1 8 BR 8 DC2_DATA R 15 R 23 47 PXT 8 E 8 PXT 8 8 LT 8 LI RX T 16 T 24 48 PXR 8 M 8 PXR 8 1 8 LR 8 LO TX R 16 R 24 49 GRD GRD GRD GRD GRD GRD LBACK2 GRD GRD 50 GRD GRD GRD GRD GRD GRD GRD GRD GRD Denotes high side of line Table 5 29 DS1 Interface Cable H600 307 and C6C 50 Pin 15 Pin Pin Color Designation Pin Color Designation 02 W BL 03 BL W 47 W G LI High 11 W G LI High 22 G W LI 03 G W LI 48 W BR LO 09 W BR LO 23 BR W LO High 01 BR LO High 49 W SL LOOP2 06 W SL LOOP2 24 SL W LOOP1 05 SL W LOOP1 All other pins empty DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Connector and Cable Diagrams Pinout Char
44. 2 Be sure the main power to the power distribution unit is OFF 3 At the power distribution unit set all carrier circuit breakers OFF Small Battery Holdover 1 Connect the small battery holdover cable to J20 See Figure 1 4 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect AC Power and Ground Page 1 14 Large Battery Holdover When using large battery holdover 1 battery cabinet is required for every system cabinet requiring holdover The 24 cell battery cabinet must have a float voltage of 54 2 VDC 1 Connect the 48 VDC cable to the large battery connector See 2 Connect the 48 VDC RETURN cable to the ground terminal block 3 Connect the temperature sensor cable from the battery cabinet to J20 gt NOTE An adapter cable may be required when connecting the temperature sensor cable to the J58890CH unit See Table 1 4 Table 1 4 Temperature Sensor Cable Adapter Cables H600 476 Adapter Cable Usage Group 1 G1 24 cell customer provided battery Group 3 G3 included 24 cell Lucent Technologies battery with battery cabinet Connect Shorting Cable to J58890CE 2 A CAUTION For a cabinet with a battery charger read the caution label on the 397C battery charger before disconnecting batteries Some cabinets contain a J58890CE 2 AC Power Distribution Unit without an optional battery c
45. 2 LEVEL 2 COLD PERFORMED E1 Installations Only a Enter y or nin the CRC field The CRC means Cyclic Redundancy Check This is an error detection algorithm The Line Termination field is display only A 75 75 Ohms or 120 120 Ohms typically displays Inthe Facility A Circuit ID field enter an optional facility name that is unique to each facility up to 40 alphanumeric characters Press Enter Adisplay similar to the following appears after the fiber link administration is completed RESET PORT NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 COLD PERFORMED All Installations 1 2 3 When the system reset is finished enter the status port network 2 command The Port Network Status screen appears Verify that PNC Active is up and that the Service State is in A Span LED on the front of the DS1 Converter circuit pack must be on for each active facility administered For example if Facility A and Facility B are administered then the top 2 Span LEDs on the circuit pack must be on yellow The yellow LEDs are on only if no problems were encountered during the administration of hardware Span LEDs associated with non administered facilities C and D in this example should be off Perform a test call if desired DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998
46. 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Glossary and Abbreviations MCT Malicious Call Trace MCU Multipoint control unit MDF Main distribution frame MDM Modular data module MDR Message detail record MEM Memory memory Issue 5 May 1998 Page GL 32 A device into which information can be copied and held and from which information can later be obtained memory shadowing link An operating system condition that provides a method for memory resident programs to be more quickly accessed allowing a system to reboot faster message center An answering service that supplies agents to and stores messages for later retrieval message center agent A member of a message center hunt group who takes and retrieves messages for voice terminal users MET Multibutton electronic telephone MF Multifrequency MFB Multifunction board MFC Multifrequency code MHz Megahertz MIM Management information message minor alarm An indication of a failure that could affect customer service Minor alarms are automatically displayed on LEDs on the attendant console and maintenance or alarming circuit pack sent to the alarm log and reported to a remote maintenance facility if applicable MIPS Million instructions per second MIS Management information system DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Ma
47. 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 9 BTU British Thermal Unit buffer 1 In hardware a circuit or component that isolates one electrical circuit from another Typically a buffer holds data from one circuit or process until another circuit or process is ready to accept the data 2 In software an area of memory that is used for temporary storage bus A multiconductor electrical path used to transfer information over a common connection from any of several sources to any of several destinations business communications terminal BCT A digital data terminal used for business applications A BCT can function via a data module as a special purpose terminal for services provided by a processor or as a terminal for data entry and retrieval BX 25 A version of the CCITT X 25 protocol for data communications BX 25 adds a fourth level to the standard X 25 interface This uppermost level combines levels 4 5 and 6 of the ISO reference model bypass tie trunks A 1 way outgoing tie trunk from a tandem switch to a main switch in an ETN Bypass tie trunks provided in limited quantities are used as a last choice route when all trunks to another tandem switch are busy Bypass tie trunks are used only if all applicable intertandem trunks are busy byte A sequence of usually eight bits processed together C CACR Cancellation of Authorization Code Request
48. AC power to the equipment room it cannot disconnect the battery power from the J58890CH An auxiliary set of contacts inside the EPO are used for this function 1 Plug the RPO cable into the connector shown in Figure 1 9 2 Route the opposite end of the wires to the EPO switch The opposite end of the RPO cable connects to the internal relay gt NOTE The EPO switch and the auxiliary contacts inside the EPO switch assembly are customer provided DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect Remote Power Off Cable and External Alarm Cable Page 1 26 A caution The auxiliary contacts inside the EPO switch assembly must close when the switch is pressed This contact closure energizes the relay inside the power distribution unit causing the connection to the battery holdover assembly to open Figure 1 10 shows the cabling from the auxiliary contacts inside the EPO switch assembly and how they connect to the internal relay To Carriers AtoE Battery Cabinet Q Terminal TB1 4 RPO Cable Bar 7116 i Auxiliary Contacts in EPO Switch 0026_3 RBP 080196 Figure 1 10 Remote Power Off Cable Connections Part 2 1 Connect the RPO wires to the auxiliary contacts on the EPO switch See Figure 1 10 gt NOTE The EPO switch and the auxiliary contacts for the RPO con
49. Abbreviations Page GL 49 trunk allocation The manner in which trunks are selected to form wideband channels trunk data module A device that connects off premises private line trunk facilities and DEFINITY ECS The trunk data module converts between the RS 232C and the DCP and can connect to DDD modems as the DCP member of a modem pool trunk group Telecommunications channels assigned as a group for certain functions that can be used interchangeably between two communications systems or COs TSC Technical Service Center TTI Terminal translation initialization TTR Touch tone receiver TTT Terminating trunk transmission TTTN Seejtandem tie trunk network TTTN TTY Teletypewriter U UAP Usage allocation plan UART Universal asynchronous transmitter UCD Uniform call distribution UCL Unrestricted call list UDP See Uniform Dial Plan UDP UL Underwriter Laboratories UM User manager Uniform Dial Plan UDP A feature that allows a unique 4 or 5 digit number assignment for each terminal in a multiswitch configuration such as a DCS or main satellite tributary system DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Glossary and Abbreviations UNMA Unified Network Management Architecture UNP Uniform numbering plan UPS Uninterruptible power supply USOP User service order profile UUCP UNIX to UNIX Communications Prot
50. B 10 DC powered system 3 8 DEFINITY documentation list of E 1 Depressed Clad and Matched Clad single mode fiber A 3 designations m port board and telephone 5 12 DID trunk wiring example 5 5 digital station 2 wire 5 5 digital station wiring example 2 wire 5 5 digital tie trunk wiring example 5 7 direct connect systems 1 29 direct department calling testing queue warning indicator 6 3 distances fiber optic cabling A 2 documentation related E 1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Index DS1 facility LEDs 4 16 interface B 12 DS1 Converter Y cable 5 28 cabling 5 25 circuit pack LEDs 4 15 coaxial adapter cable 5 29 E1 5 24 5 28 option switches 5 23 quad cable 5 27 T1 5 24 DS1 tie trunk adding 5 89 duplicated SPEs 4 15 Issue 5 May 1998 Page IN 6 E E1 interface B 12 EIA port B 8 Electronic Industries Association see EIA B 8 emergency transfer test procedure 6 4 English day names table of 3 15 English month names table of 3 16 Equador country code 3 13 examples 2 wire digital station wiring 5 5 302C Attendant Console 5 3 analog station wiring 5 5 analog tie trunk wiring 5 6 CO trunk wiring 5 5 DID trunk wiring 5 5 digital tie trunk wiring 5 7 telephone connection wiring 5 3 expanded power distribution unit 5 49 expanded power distribution
51. Cabling Voice and Data Terminals Table 2 4 Voice and Data Terminals Continued Issue 5 May 1998 Page 2 42 Station Type Type Digital set 7401D 7401 Digital voice Digital set 7403D Digital set 7404D Digital set 7404D w display Digital set 7405D Digital set 7405D w display Digital set 7405D w cov Digital set 7406D Digital set 7406D w display Digital set 7406 Digital set 7406 w display Digital set 7407D Digital set 7407 Digital set 7410D Digital set 7410 Digital set 7434D Digital set 7434D w display Digital set 7434D w call coverage module Digital set 7444D Digital set 8403B Digital voice Digital set 8405B B Digital set 8405D D Digital set 8410B Digital set 8410D Digital set 8411B Digital set 8411D Digital set 8434 D Digital set 8434 with XM24B Expansion Module Digital set 9403B Digital set 9410D Digital set 9434D Basic attendant console 302A 302B Enhanced attendant console 302C Attendant selector console 26B1 Data and voice ISDN BRI 7505D 7506D 7507D 8503D 8510T w display 8520T w display BRI voice Wireless 9601A Voice Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunicatio
52. Calls Access Code Flash Access Code k J Screen 5 4 Feature Access Code FAC form page 1 11 The Feature Access Code FAC screen page 1 appears 12 Inthe Auto Route Selection ARS Access Code 1 field administer the ARS access code in the example above type 9 and press Enter must match dial plan 13 At the prompt enter change ars analysis lt 9 gt and press Enter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment CAMA E911 Installation Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 138 r ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE Partitioned Group Number Percent Full Dialed Total Rte Call Nd ANI Dialed Total Rte Call Nd ANI String Mn Mx Pat Type Num Rq String Mn Mx Pat Type Num Rq 9 7_7 2 hnpa n 976 7_ 7 den hnpa n 11 2 2 11_ emer n ITI 33 12_ emer n m _ J Screen 5 5 ARS Digit Analysis Table 14 An ARS Digit Analysis Table screen appears Inthe Dialed String field 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 in the f irst empty row enter 11 Inthe Total Mn field enter 2 Inthe Total Mx field enter 2 Inthe Rte Pat field enter the desired Route Pattern in the example above the route pattern is 11 gt NOTE For the following step if you are using the Attendant Crisis Alerting feature type alrt inst
53. Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Index telephone calls making test calls 6 2 making test calls for single cabinet system 6 2 telephone connection example 5 3 terminal connections 2 40 type 3 11 Terminal Alarm Notification alarms 4 13 description 4 13 terminating resistor 5 57 terminating resistor adapter 5 58 terminating resistor block 5 59 test system overview 4 1 test board command 4 8 test inads link command 6 4 test shadow link command 4 6 test tdm port network 1 command 4 4 test tdm port network 2 command 4 9 test tone clock 1a command 4 5 test tone clock command 4 10 Thailand country code 3 13 three phase VAC power 1 6 tie trunk adding 5 87 analog wiring example 5 6 circuit pack option settings B 10 digital wiring example 5 7 time division multiplexing test procedure 4 4 4 9 time set procedure 3 15 TN1648B 5 96 TN1654 circuit pack 5 23 TN2181 circuit pack pin designations 5 12 TN2183 Analog Line circuit pack 5 44 TN2198 circuit pack wiring 5 12 TN2224 circuit pack 5 12 TN2224 Digital Line 5 147 5 152 TN464 circuit pack option settings B 12 TN760 circuit pack option settings B 10 TN777B circuit pack 3 7 3 30 TN778 circuit pack administration required 3 18 tone clock interchange test procedure 4 10 test procedure 4 10 tone clock boards test procedure 4 5 tone clock circuit packs LEDs 4 16 transfer emergency test procedure 6 4 translations backup procedure 3 30 s
54. Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for maximum cabling distances 0012_1 RBP 062696 Figure Notes 1 To TN722B DS1 Tie Trunk Circuit 5 R Ring Pack 6 T1 Tip 1 2 C6C Cable For Distances Over 50 7 R1 Ring 1 Feet 15 24 m Use C6E Cables 3 CSU or ICSU 3150 Shown 4 T Tip 8 1 544 Mbps Digital Service Interface 9 To T1 Carrier Figure 5 7 Typical Connections to Channel Service Unit DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Auxiliary Connector Outputs Page 5 10 Auxiliary Connector Outputs The control carrier output cable pinouts are shown in Table 5 2 The control carrier AUX connector outputs include the following Alarm monitoring for the auxiliary cabinet Seven 48 VDC power sources for emergency transfer units Three 48 VDC power sources for remotely powering 3 attendant consoles or telephone adjuncts The remote management terminal interface trunk connection location Access to a relay contact is available to actuate a customer provided light bell or similar alarm device Administer the system to make contact when a major minor or warning alarm condition occurs in the system The circuitry required for this feature is customer provided The device connected to the alarm leads must no
55. DE Dutch NL Brazilian Portuguese PTB European French FR Colombian Spanish SPL and Japanese JA To order append the language suffix to the document number for example 555 230 894DE for German No suffix is needed for the English version DEFINITY ECS Release 6 CallVisor PC ASAI Installation and Reference Issue 3 555 230 227 Provides procedural and reference information for installers Tier 3 support personnel and application designers DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Automatic Call Distribution ACD Agent Instructions Issue 5 555 230 722 Provides information for use by agents after they have completed ACD training Includes descriptions of ACD features and the procedures for using them DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Automatic Call Distribution ACD Supervisor Instructions Issue 4 555 230 724 Provides information for use by supervisors after they have completed ACD training Includes descriptions of ACD features and the procedures for using them DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 E References Application Specific Documents Page E 8 Call Detail Recording Call Detail Acquisition amp Processing Reference Issue 2 555 006 202 Provides a general technical description of the ECS call detail recording feature and of the products that collect store poll and process call records Console Operations DEFINITY ECS Co
56. DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect DC Power and Ground to Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet Page 1 28 Connect DC Power and Ground to Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet 1 Provide power for the clock cabinet from the same DC power plant as the DEFINITY System 2 Ground the clock cabinet to the DC power plant Connect Clock Cabinet Grounding 1 Measure and cut a 6 AWG 40 16 mm wire long enough to reach from the clock cabinet to the ground discharge bar in the DC power plant Insert 1 end of the wire into the ground lug on the clock cabinet and tighten the screw Attach the lug to the receptacle cover Be sure the lug and cabinet ground wires are connected to separate screws on the receptacle cover Route the ground wire to the DC power plant and connect to DISCH GRD inside the cabinet Connect Stratum 3 Clock DC Power Set the clock cabinet circuit breaker at the DC power plant OFF At the clock cabinet connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm ground wire to the 48V terminal on the terminal strip At the clock cabinet connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm wire to the 48VRTN terminal on the terminal strip Route the wires out of the cabinet and to the DC power plant At the DC power plant connect the 48V wire to the DC OUTPUT circuit breaker Atthe DC power plant connect the 48VRT
57. Data Terminals Station Type Type Analog sets Analog voice 500 2500 7101A 7103A 7104A 8110 DS1SA and DS1FD Other Analog Ports Wired Spare Ports and Non wired Analog voice Spare Ports Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Voice and Data Terminals Table 2 4 Voice and Data Terminals Continued Issue 5 May 1998 Page 2 41 Station Type Type 10MET set 10 buttons Voice 20MET set 20 buttons 30MET set 30 buttons Terminal 510 BCT Data Terminal 515 BCT 602A1 Callmaster 603A1 Callmaster II 603D1 Callmaster III 603E1 Callmaster Ill 606A1 Callmaster IV Data and voice Digital set 6402 Digital set 6408 Digital set 6408D Digital set 6408D Digital set 6416D Digital set 6416D w XM24B expansion module Digital set 6424D Digital set 6424D w XM24B expansion module Digital voice Voice data 6538 Data and voice Hybrid set 7303S Hybrid set 7305S Hybrid set 7309H Hybrid set 7313H Hybrid set 7314H Hybrid set 7315H Hybrid set 7316H Hybrid set 7317H Hybrid voice Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 2 Install Telecommunications
58. EPN cabinet if provided connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm CABINET GROUND wire to the cabinet ground terminal block 5 Route the CABINET GROUND wire to the single point ground block and connect gt NOTE If the EPN cabinet is located remote from the PPN cabinet in a separate room or building route the EPN CABINET GROUND wire to an approved ground 6 Repeat connecting each EPN cabinet to the single point ground block 7 Connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm ground wire to an unused terminal on the single point ground block 8 Route the ground wire to the AC load center ground and connect DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect AC Power and Ground Page 1 11 000 widfspgb KLC 100297 Figure Notes 1 PPN Cabinet 5 6 AWG 40 16 mm Ground Wire 2 EPN Cabinet if Installed 6 AC Load Center Single Point Ground 3 6 AWG 40 16 mm CABINET 7 Over 50 Feet 15 2 m GROUND Wire 8 Cabinet Ground Terminal Block 4 Single Point Ground Block Figure 1 2 Typical Cabinet Grounding Wiring Diagram DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect AC Power and Ground Page 1 12 Connect Battery Leads J58890C
59. Figure 5 24 Terminating Resistor Block 110RA1 12 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment BRI Terminating Resistor Page 5 60 Figure 5 25 shows the wiring connections for the 110RA1 12 terminal block The TN556 Basic Rate Interface BRI switch port is terminated to bottom row C T RTR gt Figure Notes 1 Part of Terminating Resistor Block 7 Basic Multi point Option 2 White or Purple Field 8 2 Pair Cross Connect 3 Part of 4 Pair Blue Field 9 4 Pair Horizontal Cables 4 From ISDN T interface Circuit 2 Pair 10 Row A 5 To ISDN S T interface terminals 11 Row B 6 2 Pair Cross Connect 12 Row C Figure 5 25 Typical Installation of Terminating Resistor Block 110RA1 12 For point to point wiring the top row connects to the blue station field The pair connects from the 110RA1 12 to the standard 4 pair circuit Pair 1 from the 110RA1 12 connects to Pair 1 of the station field and Pair 2 connects to Pair 3 of the station field Two terminal basic multipoint applications are accommodated by connecting row B output to the second terminal common to the multipoint circuit DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1
60. Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Multi point Adapters Page 5 62 367A Adapter The 367A adapter provides fanout See Figure 5 27 It can provide inputs to up to 7 terminals The 367A is an 8 conductor adapter and can be is used at the work location for bridging 3 to 7 terminals hd eeeee0 06 __ _1_ __ gt 000000 C eeeee00 weoceeee e ee0000 ee0e000 4321 1 87654321 87654 8765 iS N J v Y Figure Notes 1 Jack 1 3 Jack 8 2 Jack 2 4 367A Adapter Figure 5 27 Wiring Diagram of 367A DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Multi point Adapters Page 5 63 Basic Multipoint Installation Distances Figure 5 28 provides cabling information for fan out of ISDN BRI multi point installations The terminating resistor is generally located in the satellite closet All distances assume 24 AWG 5 0 26 mm D Inside Wire DIW inst_dis CJL 030796 Figure Notes 1 S Interface Source TN556 6 System Cabinet 2 Terminating Resistor 7 Terminating Endpoint 1 3 Satellite Closet 8 Terminating Endpoint 2 4 Maximum Distance from S Interface 9 Work Location Source to Work Location 1600 Feet 488 m 10 Maximum
61. Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room Page 2 37 3 Pair to 4 Pair Station Circuit Distribution Figure 2 22 shows the 3 pair circuit distribution from an equipment room MDF to a satellite location using 110 type hardware Four pair circuits are distributed from the satellite location to the information outlets mm o Q gt Figure Notes 1 Part of MDF 9 Connectorized staggered finger 3 Pair Connecting Blocks Multiple2 gt PalrGable 10 4 Pair Connecting Blocks lt White Field 11 Blue Field Patch Cord or Cross Connect Teese or BRZoe Or Adapter Jumpers 13 Information Outlet To System Cabinet 3 Pair Modularity 14 4 Pair Circuit DIW Station Cable 7 A25D Cable 3 Pair Circuits D lnside wire 8 B25A Cable 15 Part of Satellite Location 16 4 Pair Circuits B25A Cable 2 3 Purple Field 4 5 O Figure 2 22 3 Pair to 4 Pair Satellite Location Connectivity DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room Page 2 38 Three pair circuits can also be run directly from the equipment room MDF to a 356A adapter as shown in Figure 2 23 Four pair station cables connect the adapter to the information o
62. NLQ 01 LQ 05 BUZZER 01 ON 06 FONT 02 FONTCART 07 RESOLUTION 01 144 11 BUFFER 02 N LINE 13 PW ON MODE 01 ON LINE 14 DIRECTION 01 B1 DIR 1 15 BUFF FULL 02 LF CR 16 P E 01 ACTIVE 17 AUTO CARRIAGE RETURN CR 01 CR LF 18 ZERO 01 0 22 AUTO LINE FEED 01 CR ONLY 31 1 SKIP 01 OFF 32 CHAR SET GO GL 02 USA 33 CHAR SET G1 GR 01 UK 34 CHAR SET G2 03 GE 35 CHAR SET G3 07 LINE DRAWING 81 OFF LINE STATE 01 ALL RECEIVE 82 DSR 02 OFF 83 REQUEST TO SEND RTS TIMING 01 RTS 84 CD 02 OFF 85 CLEAR TO SEND CTS 02 OFF 91 OVER RUN 02 256 92 DATA BIT 02 8 93 PROTOCOL 03 XON XOFF 94 STOP BIT 01 1 95 PARITY 01 NONE 96 PBS 04 1200 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 B Option Switch Settings Call Detail Recording Option Settings Page B 8 Call Detail Recording Option Settings The interface between the system and CDR equipment may be 1 of the following Data Module recommended option settings are shown in Table B 3 Modem recommended option settings are in modem vendor document TN726 Data Line circuit pack and an Asynchronous Data Unit data modules or modems are not required Connected directly to the DCE connector EIA Port located on the rear of the Control Carrier data modules or modems are not required A 572 Printer can be used as an output receiving device for CDR The recommended option settings for this printer i
63. Operations Issue 1 555 230 706 Provides detailed instructions on how to generate reports and manage the system It is intended for telecommunications managers who wish to use BCMS Basic Call Management System reports and for system managers responsible for maintaining the system This documentation applies to Release 6 as well as earlier DEFINITY systems Centre Vu CMS CentreVu Call Management System Release 3 Version 5 Administration Issue 1 585 215 820 CentreVu Call Management System Release 3 Version 5 Reports Issue 1 585 215 821 CentreVu Call Management System Release 3 Version 5 Custom Reports Issue 1 585 215 822 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 E References Application Specific Documents Page E 6 CentreVu Call Management System Release 3 Version 5 Upgrades and Migrations Issue 3 585 215 826 CentreVu Call Management System Release 3 Version 5 External Call History Reference Issue 1 585 215 824 CentreVu Call Management System Release 3 Version 5 Forecast Issue 1 585 215 825 Application Specific Documents ASAI These documents support specific DEFINITY applications DEFINITY ECS Generic 2 to Release 5 Transition Reference Issue 1 555 230 523 Provides information on the differences in features and administration between the old and new systems when upgrading from a Generic 2 sy
64. Page GL 19 domain controlled split A split for which Third Party Domain Control request has been accepted A domain controlled split provides an event report for logout domain controlled station A station for which a Third_Party_Domain_Control request has been accepted A domain controlled station provides event reports for calls that are alerting connected or held at the station domain controlled station on a call A station that is active on a call and which provides event reports over one or two domain control associations DOSS Delivery Operations Support System DOT Duplication Option Terminal DPM Dial Plan Manager DPR Dual port RAM DS1 Digital Signal Level 1 DS1C Digital Signal Level 1 protocol C DS1 CONV Digital Signal Level 1 converter DSI Digital signal interface DSU Data service unit DTDM Digital terminal data module DTE Data terminal equipment DTGS Direct Trunk Group Select DTMF Dual tone multifrequency DTS Disk tape system duplicated common control Two processors ensuring continuous operation of a communications system While one processor is online the other functions as a backup The backup processor goes online periodically or when a problem occurs DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 20 duplication The use of redundant components to improve
65. Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Remote Network Interface Page 5 22 Remote Network Interface The Remote Network Interface formerly Initialization and Administration System INADS provides a 9600 bps modem connection for the remote management terminal The network interface trunk should appear on the twenty fifth pair of a RJ21X network interface jack The trunk is a 2 way rotary dial loop start trunk that connects to a TN731 Maintenance circuit pack the processor circuit pack or the TN1648 System Access Maintenance circuit pack through the network interface terminals at the trunk auxiliary Main Distribution Frame MDF Figure 5 10 shows a typical network interface trunk installation 1 Determine the network interface trunk appearance at the green trunk auxiliary field of the MDF 2 Label the terminals for the trunk appearance 3 Install jumpers between the trunk appearance on the green field and the Remote Network Interface terminals on the purple field 1758482b RBP 062696 Figure Notes 1 To Network Interface Facility 3 One Pair of Wires 2 To Control Carrier Auxiliary Connector 4 Twenty fifth Pair of RJ21X Network Interface Jack Figure 5 10 Connections at Trunk Auxiliary Field DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cab
66. Security violation notification switch Any kind of telephone switching system See alsocommunications system switchhook The buttons located under the receiver on a voice terminal switch node SN carrier A carrier containing a single switch node power units and optionally one or two DS1 converter circuit packs An SN carrier is located in a center stage switch switch node SN clock The circuit pack in an SN carrier that provides clock and maintenance alarm functions and environmental monitors switch node interface SNI The basic building block of a switch node An SNI circuit pack controls the routing of circuit packet and control messages switch node link SNL The hardware that provides a bridge between two or more switch nodes The SNL consists of the two SNI circuit packs residing on the switch nodes and the hardware connecting the SNls This hardware can include lightwave transceivers that convert the SNPs electrical signals to light signals the copper wire that connects the SNls to the lightwave transceivers a full duplex fiber optic cable DS1 converter circuit cards and DS1 facilities if a company does not have rights to lay cable and appropriate connectors switch processing element SPE A complex of circuit packs processor memory disk controller and bus interface cards mounted in a PPN control carrier The SPE serves as the control element for that PPN and optionally for one or more EPNs SxS Step
67. Station Cable 4 258A Adapter 2 Information Outlet 5 4 Pair Station Cable 3 451A In Line Adapter Figure 2 16 Example of Extending 4 Pair Station Cables Closets Site Locations Site locations are closets that provide a point in the station wiring for the administration of remote powering Adapters are used at site locations to terminate the 25 pair station cables and provide connection points modular jacks for power adapters and 4 pair station cables The 258A and BR2580A adapters plug into a 25 pair female cable connector These adapters divide the 25 pair cable into six 4 pair modular jack circuits See Figure 2 17 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Station Wiring Design Page 2 31 crdfadp CJL 101596 Figure Notes 1 BR2580A Adapter 3 25 Pair Male Ribbon Connector 2 258A Adapter 4 4 Pair Modular Jacks 8 Pins Figure 2 17 258A and BR2580A Adapters The 356A adapter plugs into a 25 pair female cable connector See Figure 2 18 The 356A adapter divides the 25 pair cable into eight 3 pair circuits Although the circuits are 3 pair the adapters modular jacks will accept the 8 wide modular plug used on the 4 pair station cable A CAUTION Adapters wired similarly to the 356A should not be used Their jacks do not accept 4 pair plugs DEFINITY
68. Support Page xv Where to Call for Technical Support Use the following telephone numbers for the region in which the system is being installed Telephone Number Streamlined Implementation for missing equipment 1 800 772 5409 USA Canada Technical Service Center 1 800 248 1234 Technical Service Center INADS Database 1 800 248 1111 Administration Asia Pacific Regional Support Center 65 872 8686 Western Europe South Africa Middle East 441 252 774 800 Business Communications Europe 441 252 391 789 Eastern Central Europe 361 345 4334 ITAC 1 303 804 3777 Latin Central America amp Caribbean 1 303 804 3778 DEFINITY Helpline 1 800 225 7585 Lucent Technologies Toll Fraud Intervention 1 800 643 2353 Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center 1 800 242 2121 Lucent Technologies Corporate Security 1 800 822 9009 Anti Static Protection A caution When handling circuit packs or any components of a DEFINITY System always wear an authorized wrist ground strap Connect the strap to an approved ground such as an unpainted metal surface on the DEFINITY System Security Issues To ensure the greatest security possible for customers Lucent Technologies offers services that can reduce toll fraud liabilities Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for more security information Login security is an attribute of the DEFINITY ECS software Existing passwords expire 24 hours after installati
69. Switch Settings 2 Install cross connect jumpers to connect the named pins from the tie trunk circuit pack to the appropriate leads on the external tie trunk Names of the tie trunk leads must be determined from the manufacturer or supplier of the external trunk circuit The example in Figure 5 5 shows a DEFINITY System tie trunk connected to a DEFINITY System tie trunk 3 Administer on the Trunk Group screen of the management terminal See DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description for more details DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Digital Tie Trunk Example Page 5 7 Digital Tie Trunk Example This example shows how to connect digital tie trunk wiring from one DEFINITY System to another DEFINITY System See Figure 5 6 O lt gt 48 amp o lt gt 3 Q lt gt 2 amp lt 47 Q dig_tie RBP 040596 Figure Notes 1 External Trunk 4 LO Balanced Output Pair 2 TN464F Digital Trunk Circuit Pack 5 LI Position 1206 6 LI Balanced Input Pair 3 LO Figure 5 6 Digital Tie Trunk Wiring 1 Install cross connect jumpers to connect the named pins from the digital trunk circuit pack to appropriate pins on the manufacturer s or supplier s external digital trunk 2 Set option switches on the port circuit pack
70. TN464F Digital Trunk according to Appendix B Option Switch Settings 3 Administer on the DS1 and Trunk Group screens of the management terminal See DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description for more details DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment DS1 Tie Trunk Example Page 5 8 DS1 Tie Trunk Example DS1 tie trunks provide a 1 544 Mbps digital data service between 2 collocated systems or between the system and a data network using T1 carrier facilities DS1 tie trunk circuit packs provide connection capability to the DS1 facility The following cables can be used to connect DS1 tie trunk circuit packs to DS1 digital facilities C6C connector cable comcode 104307327 50 foot 15 24 m shielded cable equipped with a 50 pin male connector on 1 end and a 15 pin male connector on the other end Use this cable to connect a DS1 tie trunk circuit pack to a Channel Service Unit CSU C6D connector cable comcode 104307376 50 foot 15 24 m shielded cable equipped with a 50 pin male connector on each end Use this cable to connect a DS1 tie trunks in collocated Single Carrier Cabinets C6E connector cable comcode 104307434 100 foot 30 48 m shielded cable equipped with a 50 pin male connector on 1 end and a 50 pin female conne
71. TO cabinet by way of the LIU Install a lightwave transceiver on the cabinet connector at the position in the TO column in the running list Route the cables from the FROM cabinet down into the cable trays of each EPN cabinet Connect the cables to the lightwave transceiver just installed on the TO cabinet Connect the fiber that comes from the TX connector of the FROM transceiver to the RX connector of the TO transceiver and vice versa Route the cables through the cabinet and through cable organizers as provided Secure the cables to the cable tie rack DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Fiber Optic Interconnect Cabling Page 1 31 CSS Connected System with 1 Switch Node Standard Reliability Figure 1 11 shows typical fiber optic cabling between cabinets The cable between the El and SNI on the PPN is a pre installed metallic cable H600 278 1 If no running list is available use the outer slots first in alternating order Connect the first 2 SNI slots to 3 and 20 the leftmost and rightmost of the unused slots Next use 4 and 19 and so forth 2 Add links to the EPNs in alternating order 20 3 19 4 18 5 and so forth
72. all else fails to clear the LED then replace the circuit pack PAI STA Replace the ST3 card PAI STB Replace the ST3 card Cl FAIL Check wiring for its associated DS1 reference and replace the circuit pack if necessary ST3 FAIL Replace the circuit pack ST3 LOCK Ignore this LED ST3 HOLDOVER Ignore this LED ST3 FREE RUN Ignore this LED TOCA FAIL Replace the circuit pack TOCA PORT ALM Replace the circuit pack if necessary DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 6 Test Telephones and Other Equipment Perform Complete System Test Page 6 8 Verify Timing to the System 1 Administer the Stratum 3 clock by issuing the change synchronization command at the management terminal 2 Enter a 3in the stratum field 3 Type the port network number where the TN780 Tone Clock circuit packs reside in the port network field gt NOTE Wait 1 minute for the software to reconfigure the system synchronization 4 Verify the results of test 649 If test 649 fails with a code of 2101 then check the wiring for EXTSYNO and EXTSYN1 Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6r 5 If test 649 is successful then the system is getting correct timing from the Stratum 3 clock Perform Complete System Test Run the complete system test with the Allports option in the SPE Interchange and Long
73. and health services organizations for services such as reservations housekeeping and billing DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 41 protocol A set of conventions or rules governing the format and timing of message exchanges to control data movement and correction of errors PSC Premises service consultant PSDN Packet switch public data network PT Personal terminal PTC Positive temperature coefficient PIT Postal Telephone and Telegraph public network The network that can be openly accessed by all customers for local and long distance calling pulse code modulation PCM An extension of pulse amplitude modulation PAM in which carrier signal pulses modulated by an analog signal such as speech are quantized and encoded to a digital usually binary format Q OPPCN Quality Protection Plan Change Notice QSIG A set of open standards for Enterprise Networking QSIG is a protocol defining message exchanges signalling at the Q reference point between two PBXs quadrant A group of six contiguous DSOs in fixed locations on an ISDN PRI facility Note that this term comes from T1 terminology one fourth of a T1 but there are five quadrants on an E1 ISDN PRI facility 30B D queue An ordered sequence of calls waiting to be processed queuing The process of holding calls in
74. and the number of ST connections The mean loss due to the total number of splices a Higher order mode loss DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Fiber Optic Requirements Page A 3 Fiber Optic Cable Connections The Customer Service Document CSD provides an Inter Carrier Cable Running List Each row on the list represents a cable connection Use the running list to determine where to connect each fiber optic cable Multi Mode Fiber Optic Connections Multi mode fiber cables are generally colored gray or orange The following components are used in multi mode fiber optic connections Expansion Interface El circuit packs in port slots in cabinet carriers Switch Node Interface SNI circuit packs in the Switch Node Carrier a The 9823A lightwave transceiver transmits up to 4 900 feet 1500 m The 9823B lightwave transceiver transmits up to 25 000 feet 7600 m a Multi mode fiber optic cable consisting of 2 separate 62 5 micron or 50 micron core fiber optic cables Single Mode Fiber Optic Connections A CAUTION Do not use Dispersion Shifted or Wave Diversion Multiplexing fiber Use only dispersion unshifted fiber such as Depressed Clad and Matched Clad fiber EIA TIA Class IVa Single mode fiber cables are generally colored yellow The following components are used in single mode fiber optic
75. baud rate to 9600 gt NOTE The modem connects at 9600 baud but throughput is at 1200 baud 5 Enter AT amp WO to save the setting into non volatile RAM 6 Set Switch 5 to the OFF up position to disable auto answer 7 Disconnect the RS 232 cable from the terminal and connect it to the TERMINAL connector on the rear of the system cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add External Modem to PPN Page 5 95 Add External Modem to PPN U S Robotics Model 839 External Modem MME TIM ED cydfepnm KLC 100397 Figure Notes 1 U S Robotics External Modem 3 Processor Port Network 2 RS 232 Cable Figure 5 43 Connect External Modem to PPN 1 Connect an RS 232 cable to the modem See Figure 5 43 gt NOTE In the following steps a PC with Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 may be substituted for the dumb terminal Use the Hyperterminal terminal emulation application 2 Connect the opposite end of the RS 232 cable to a dumb terminal 3 Set the dumb terminal to full duplex mode 4 Enter AT amp N6 to set the baud rate to 9600 gt NOTE The modem connects at 9600 baud but throughput is at 1200 baud 5 Enter AT amp WO to save the setting into non volatile RAM 6 Set Switch 5 to the OFF up position t
76. by the 4 carriage bolts Position the EPN Cabinets Each EPN cabinet is normally positioned adjacent to the PPN cabinet but may be located remotely in a different room or a different building 1 2 3 The procedure for installing an EPN cabinet is the same as for the PPN cabinet If earthquake protection is required skip to Earthquake Protection Installation on page 1 34 If earthquake protection is not required level the cabinets and adjust and lock the cabinet stabilizing bolts to keep the cabinets from moving gt NOTE To install a new EPN cabinet to an existing system refer to DEFINTY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Upgrades and Additions for R6r DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Install System Cabinets Page 1 4 Position the Auxiliary Cabinet Optional 1 Position the Auxiliary cabinet next to the PPN cabinet or EPN cabinet if installed The location of equipment inside the Auxiliary cabinet is specified in the Customer Service Document CSD If earthquake protection is required skip to Earthquake Protection Installation on page 1 34 Return to this section when finished If earthquake protection is not required level the cabinets and adjust and lock the cabinet stabilizing bolts to keep the cabinet from moving Install Auxiliary Cabinet Eq
77. cable lengths and associated comcode numbers Multi mode fiber cables are gray or orange in color Table A 3 Multi mode Fiber Cable Ordering Information Description Length Comcode Fiber Interconnection Cable 20 Feet 6 1 m 407439975 Fiber Interconnection Cable 25 Feet 7 62 m 407441427 Fiber Interconnection Cable 30 Feet 9 14 m 407441435 Fiber Interconnection Cable 35 Feet 10 67 m 407441443 Fiber Interconnection Cable 40 Feet 12 2 m 407441450 Fiber Interconnection Cable 50 Feet 15 2 m 407441468 Fiber Interconnection Cable 75 Feet 22 8 m 407441476 Fiber Interconnection Cable 100 Feet 30 48 m 407441484 Fiber Interconnection Cable 125 Feet 38 1 m 407441492 Fiber Interconnection Cable 150 Feet 45 7 m 407441500 Fiber Interconnection Cable 175 Feet 53 3 m 407441518 Fiber Interconnection Cable 200 Feet 61 m 407441666 Table A 4 provides single mode cable lengths and associated comcode numbers Single mode fiber cables are yellow Table A 4 Single mode Fiber Cable Ordering Information Description Length Comcode Fiber Optic Patch Cord 2 Feet 0 6 m 105357727 Fiber Interconnection Cable 20 Feet 6 1 m 407598325 Fiber Interconnection Cable 30 Feet 9 14 m 407598333 Fiber Interconnection Cable 40 Feet 12 2 m 407598341 Fiber Interconnection Cable 50 Feet 15 2 m 407598358 Fiber Interconnection Cable 75 Feet 22 8 m 407598366 F
78. capability introduces PRI endpoints on switch line side interfaces A PRI endpoint consists of one or more contiguous B channels on a line side T1 or E1 ISDN PRI facility and has an extension Endpoint applications have call control capabilities over PRI endpoints principal A terminal that has its primary extension bridged on one or more other terminals principal user A person to whom a telephone is assigned and who has message center coverage private network A network used exclusively for the telecommunications needs of a particular customer private network office code RNX The first three digits of a 7 digit private network number PROCR Processor processor carrier See control carrier processor data module PDM A device that provides an RS 232C DCE interface for connecting to data terminals applications processors APs and host computers and provides a DCP interface for connection to a communications system See also modular processor data module MPDM processor port network PPN A port network controlled by a switch processing element that is directly connected to that PN s TDM bus and LAN bus See also port network PN processor port network PPN control carrier A carrier containing the maintenance circuit pack tone clock circuit pack and SPE circuit packs for a processor port network PPN and optionally port circuit packs Property Management System PMS A stand alone computer used by lodging
79. directly beneath each hole Roll the cabinet out of the way and drill 4 holes 5 8 inch 1 6 cm in diameter through the raised floor panels marked in Step 2 A caution Take care while drilling the holes through the raised floor that the drill bit does not penetrate any cables below the floor that could cause damage to the cable or injury to the installer Insert along punch through the holes drilled in Step 3 and mark the concrete floor beneath the raised floor panels DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Earthquake Protection Installation Page 1 35 5 Remove the raised floor panels in which the holes were drilled 6 Using 1 2 inch 1 3 cm anchor bits drill a hole at each of the locations marked in Stop drilling when the mark on the side of the bit reaches the floor level 7 Insert a concrete floor anchor STARR part number 3425 into the hole until the mark on the bit reaches floor level again Snap the top of the anchor bit off Repeat for the remaining holes 3 8 inch flat washer Nut welded to frame E 3 8 16 threaded rod raised variable floor height 3 8 16 lt Concrete floor anchor concrete subfloor cab_base CJL 052096 Figure 1 14 Earthquake Mounting Raised Computer Floor DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5
80. endpoint of the fiber link Repeat for the remaining endpoints The Board Type field is display only and shows the type of circuit pack in Endpoint 1 Inthe DS1CONV Board Location field enter the cabinet carrier and slot that identifies the physical location of DS1 Converter circuit pack in the first endpoint of the duplicate fiber link Endpoint 1 s duplicate along with Endpoint 2 s duplicate make up the duplicate fiber link called the B PNC link The DSICONV Board Type field is display only and shows the type of DS1 Converter circuit pack in Endpoint 1 The circuit pack type in Endpoint 1 A PNC and Endpoint 1 B PNC must be the same Inthe Is one endpoint remoted via a DS1 Converter Complex field enter y to specify that a DS1 Converter complex is used to remote 1 endpoint If a y is entered administer the A PNC DS1 Converter Board Location on Page 1 The A PNC DS1 Converter Board Type displays Administer the A PNC DS1 Converter DS1 CONV Attributes on Page 2 of this form On Page 2 of the form enter the DS1 Converter Facilities information In the Facility Installed field enter y for all installed facilities A B C and D Inthe Bit Rate field enter 1 544 for T1 operation or 2 048 for E1 operation gt NOTE One bit rate applies for all facilities within the same DS1 Converter complex The Bit Rate field displays only under Facility A Enter the idle code inthe Idle Code MSB 1
81. following installation instructions are provided as examples only 1 Be sure to label all of the cables as they are installed 9 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 Mth 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 0017_0 RBP 061896 Figure Notes 1 Port Cabinet 4 50 Pin Male 50 Pin Female 2 50 Pair Female Connector to Double Headed Connector Cable Expansion Interface Connector 5 Quad Cable With 50 Pin Male 3 14 Inch 35 56 cm Y Cable Connector Connects to Channel Service Unit 6 DS1 Converter Connector Figure 5 12 DS1 Converter Connections Part 1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment TN1654 DS1 Converter Release 6r Only Page 5 26 Port Carrier 1 Install the TN1654 in any slot in a Port Carrier next to a TN570C Expansion Interface circuit pack 2 On the backplane connect a 14 inch 35 56 cm Y cable from the TN1654 to the Expansion Interface circuit pack See Figure 5 12 A CAUTION The Y cable used with the TN1654 is different than the Y cable used with the TN574 These cables are NOT interchangeable 3 Connect an H600 348 Quad cable to the remaining end of the Y cable 4 Skip to Channel Service Unit Cabling Switch Node Carrier Up to 2 TN1654 circuit packs can be installed in a Switch Node Carrier 1 Install the TN1654
82. handle a certain type of incoming call Automatic calling unit ACU A device that places a telephone call Automatic Circuit Assurance ACA A feature that tracks calls of unusual duration to facilitate troubleshooting A high number of very short calls or a low number of very long calls may signify a faulty trunk Automatic Number Identification ANI Representation of the calling number for display or for further use to access information about the caller Available with Signaling System 7 automatic restoration A service that restores disrupted connections between access endpoints nonsignaling trunks and data endpoints devices that connect the switch to data terminal and or communications DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 7 equipment Restoration is done within seconds of a service disruption so that critical data applications can remain operational Automatic Route Selection ARS A feature that allows the system to automatically choose the least cost way to send a toll call automatic trunk A trunk that does not require addressing information because the destination is predetermined A request for service on the trunk called a seizure is sufficient to route the call The normal destination of an automatic trunk is the communications system attendant group Also called automatic incoming trunk
83. hardware setting The DSICONV 1 Line Compensation and the DS1CONV 2 Line Compensation fields are display only and show the hardware setting Inthe Facility A Circuit ID field enter an optional facility name that is unique to each facility up to 40 alphanumeric characters Press Enter Adisplay similar to the following appears after the fiber link administration is completed RESET PORT NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 COLD PERFORMED E1 Installations Only a Enter y or nin the CRC field The CRC means Cyclic Redundancy Check This is an error detection algorithm The Line Termination field is display only A 75 75 Ohms or 120 120 Ohms typically displays Inthe Facility A Circuit ID field enter an optional facility name that is unique to each facility up to 40 alphanumeric characters Press Enter Adisplay similar to the following appears after the fiber link administration is completed RESET PORT NETWORK 2 LEVEL 2 COLD PERFORMED DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Administer Fiber Links Release 6r Only Page 3 26 All Installations 1 2 3 When the system reset is finished enter the status port network 2 command The Port Network Status screen appears Ve
84. is 110 type terminal blocks Satellite Locations Using 110 Type Hardware Each terminal block has a 3 pair white field and a 4 pair blue field located on the same terminal block The 110A type terminal block that can be used is the 110AE1 75FT It must be field terminated to both the white and blue fields The 300 pair 110P type terminal blocks that can be used are a 110PE1 300CT FT 25 pair connector on the white field and field terminated on the blue field a 110PE1 300FT Field terminated on both the white and blue fields The 900 pair 110P type terminal blocks that can be used are a 110PE1 900CT FT 25 pair connector on the white field and field terminated on the blue field a 110PE1 900FT Field terminated on both the white and blue fields Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room This section explains the station circuit distribution from the equipment room to the information outlets for new wiring installations Example connection diagrams are provided to show the options for running and connecting the station cables If most of the telephones voice terminals that require remote powering are within 250 feet 76 2 m of the equipment room 4 pair station circuits are run from the equipment room to the information outlets If this is not the case or if the customer requires 2 point administration 3 pair station circuits are run from the equipment room to satellite locations Then the 4 pair station c
85. is based on the caller s characteristics for non ISDN endpoints and on the Bearer Capability and Low Layer Compatibility Information Elements of an ISDN endpoint Current BCCs are 0 voice grade data and voice 1 DMI mode 1 56 kbps data transmission 2 DMI mode 2 synchronous asynchronous data transmission up to 19 2 kbps 3 DMI mode 3 64 kbps circuit packet data transmission 4 DMI mode 0 64 kbps synchronous data 5 temporary signaling connection and 6 wideband call 128 1984 kbps synchronous data BER Bit error rate BHCC Busy hour call completions bit binary digit One unit of information in binary notation having two possible values 0 or 1 bits per second bps The number of binary units of information that are transmitted or received per second See also baudjand bit rate bit rate The speed at which bits are transmitted usually expressed in bits per second Also called data rate See also baud and bits per second bps BLF Busy Lamp Field BN Billing number BOS Bit oriented signaling BPN Billed party number bps See bits per second bps bridge bridging The appearance of a voice terminal s extension at one or more other voice terminals BRI The ISDN Basic Rate Interface specification bridged appearance A call appearance on a voice terminal that matches a call appearance on another voice terminal for the duration of a call DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release
86. is high or critical reliability power up the EPN cabinet first then the PPN cabinet Always power up the PPN cabinet ast 2 Set the cabinet circuit breakers to ON This starts the system initialization and test All red LEDs on the circuit packs go on and then off 3 Skip to Verify Messages on Terminal DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Activate the System Page 3 8 DC Powered System 1 Atthe DC Battery Cabinet if installed set the circuit breaker to ON 2 At the DC Power Cabinet set the circuit breaker s on the rectifiers ON This starts the system initialization and test Some red LEDs may be on but are turned off by other procedures in this chapter 3 If the system is high or critical reliability power up the EPN cabinet first then the PPN cabinet Always power up the PPN cabinet ast Verify Messages on Terminal 1 After several minutes verify all tests pass Screen 3 1 displays the screen contents of a typical Release 6r system with 3 memory circuit packs The Release 6si system screen is similar gt NOTE If any of the terminal messages indicate a test has failed or if the message spe down mode is displayed refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6r or DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenanc
87. mail system Can be used with a variety of communications systems to provide call history data such as subscriber identification and reason for redirection AUDIX See Audio Information Exchange AUDIX auto in trunk group Trunk group for which the CO processes all of the digits for an incoming call When a CO seizes a trunk from an auto in trunk group the switch automatically connects the trunk to the destination typically an ACD split where if no agents are available the call goes into a queue in which callers are answered in the order in which they arrive Auto In Work mode One of four agent work modes the mode in which an agent is ready to process another call as soon as the current call is completed Automatic Alternate Routing AAR A feature that routes calls to other than the first choice route when facilities are unavailable Automatic Callback ACB A feature that enables internal callers upon reaching a busy extension to have the system automatically connect and ring both parties when the called party becomes available Automatic Call Distribution ACD A feature that answers calls and then depending on administered instructions delivers messages appropriate for the caller and routes the call to an agent when one becomes available Automatic Call Distribution ACD split A method of routing calls of a similar type among agents in a call center Also a group of extensions that are staffed by agents trained to
88. needing change on this screen to turn the red LEDs off 4 Press Enter when the information is correct DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Administer System Configurations Release 6r Page 3 19 Administer System Configurations Release 6r If a Release 6si is installed skip to Administer Attendant Console on page 3 29 Change Customer Options The following features are part of the basic software package and do not need to be activated They default to y yes on the Optional Features Form Automatic Route Selection Automatic Alternate Routing Partitioning a Emergency Access to the Attendant Hospitality a Service Observing An init password is required to modify customer options Contact your regional CSA for the password Use the following procedure to change the customer s optional features 1 At the Command prompt enter the change system parameters customer options command A display similar to Screen 3 6 appears DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Administer System Configurations Release 6r Page 3 20 a SN change system parameters customer options Page 1 of 4 OPTIONAL FEATURES G3 Version V5 Maximum Ports 14000
89. negative acknowledgement NAK done by sending an FIE with a return error component and a cause value It should not be confused with the denial event report that applies to calls designated voice terminal The specific voice terminal to which calls originally directed to a certain extension are redirected Commonly used to mean the forwarded to terminal when Call Forwarding All Calls is active dial repeating trunks A PBX tie trunk that is capable of handling PBX station signaling information without attendant assistance dial repeating tie trunk A tie trunk that transmits called party addressing information between two communications systems DID Direct Inward Dialing DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 17 digit conversion A process used to convert specific dialed numbers into other dialed numbers digital The representation of information by discrete steps See alsofanalog digital communications protocol DCP m A proprietary protocol used to transmit both digitized voice and digitized data over the same communications link A DCP link is made up of two 64 kbps information l channels and one 8 kbps signaling S channel Digital Communications Protocol The DCP protocol supports 2 information bearing channels and thus two telephones data modules The l1 channel is the DCP channel assigne
90. normal mode DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add ISDN PRI Page 5 112 Enter Added Translations 1 Administer the forms listed under Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description Resolve Alarms 1 Examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance R6vs si Contact INADS to Enable Customer Options and Verify Alarm Origination Be sure the system is part of the existing INADS database by calling the INADS Database Administrator at the Technical Service Center TSC Verify that INADS can dial into the system and that the system can dial out to INADS As part of the system registration process the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination and enables customer options A CAUTION If you do not enable Alarm Origination when the customer has purchased a services contract the system cannot report any alarm to the TSC automatically causing the TSC to be unable to fulfill the services contract Save Translations 1 If the system is high or critical reliability enter status system 1 and press Enter to verify that the system is in the active standby mode 2 Enter save trans
91. of the unit should be lit together Green means the power supply is providing power Yellow means the battery is being charged After the battery reaches full charge maximum of twenty hours the yellow LED should go out FAIL If either green or yellow LED is not lit after powering up check the connections Test the AC outlet If power is available and the AC power cord and connections are good replace the power unit Disconnect the AC plug on the power supply this activates the DC supply Check DC battery back up operation of the 1145B Power Supply by monitoring the LEDs PASS The red and green LEDs should be lit together Red means the power supply is on battery back up FAIL If either green or red LED is not lit after disconnecting AC power check the connections If the connections are good replace the power unit or batteries Reconnect AC power to the power supply DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment 1145B Power Supply Page 5 52 Wire the 1146B Power Distribution Unit Wire endpoints to the 1146B while power from the 1145B is on A red LED lights if its associated circuit is connected to shorted wiring or to a shorted terminal 1 Install cross connect jumpers to wire from the unit the label shows polarity to pins 7 and 8 of the appropriate information outlet Rou
92. operation is that the TN750C circuit pack automatically restores and reports the availability of announcements from its own internal flash memory in 5 minutes rather than the approximately 40 minutes for the TN750 or TN750B circuit pack reporting from the mass storage system If a circuit pack already has announcements in its flash memory the yellow LED flashes as the announcements copy to the Voice RAM Save and Restore Recorded Announcements A CAUTION If the yellow LED is on do not remove the circuit pack This will corrupt the announcement data The syntax for saving from any TN750 circuit pack is save announcements from PCSS and press Enter Where P is the port network number 1 for PPN and 2 4 for EPN C is the carrier designation A B C D or E and SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack resides 01 to 21 The syntax for restoring to a TN750C circuit pack is restore announcements disk tape to PCSS and press Enter Where P is the port network number 1 for PPN and 2 4 for EPN C is the carrier designation A B C D or E and SS is DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add Multiple Announcement Page 5 107 the number of the slot in which the circuit pack resides 01 to 21 When executing a restore command and there are existing announcements on the ci
93. pair Not all outputs can simultaneously provide 12 Watts The average power per output cannot exceed 6 25 Watts 200 32 6 25 The 1145B is designed to power one ISDN terminal or DCP adjunct per output The maximum number of terminals or adjuncts is 32 The 1145B is required for installations outside the United States Auxiliary power local or bulk is always required for the following a Attendant Console 302C a Any 8520 terminal a Any 7500 or 8500 series terminal with an asynchronous data module Any 7500 series terminal whether in passive bus or point to point 1 per BRI port a Any 8510 terminal in passive bus or with an asynchronous data module unless the 8510 will not be used to support data or video a PassageWay adapter interface a Any 8400 series terminal a Any 7400 series terminal Figure 5 20 shows how the standard power supply and wall mounting plates fit together Figure 5 21 shows the expanded power supply components power distribution unit and T cable DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment 1145B Power Supply Page 5 46 Wall Mounting Plates The top plate is used for mounting the back up battery The bottom plate is used to mount the power supply and distribution units The plates can be rack mounted using standard rack mounting brackets 1 Locate 1 plat
94. physical interface specified by the EIA EIA 232 transmits and receives asynchronous data at speeds of up to 19 2 kbps over cable distances of up to 50 feet EIA 232 replaces RS 232 protocol in some DEFINITY applications electronic tandem network ETN A tandem tie trunk network that has automatic call routing capabilities based on the number dialed and the most preferred route available Each switch in the network is assigned a unique private network office code RNX and each voice terminal is assigned a unique extension Electronics Industries Association EIA A trade association of the electronics industry that establishes electrical and functional standards emergency transfer If a major system failure occurs automatic transfer is initiated to a group of telephones capable of making outgoing calls The system operates in this mode until the failure is repaired and the system automatically returns to normal operation Also called power failure transfer EMI Electromagnetic interference end to end signaling The transmission of touch tone signals generated by dialing from a voice terminal to remote computer equipment These digits are sent over the trunk as DTMF digits whether the trunk signaling type is marked as tone or rotary and whether the originating station is tone or rotary Example a call to a voice mail machine or automated attendant service A connection is first established over an outgoing trunk Then additional digits are di
95. regarding Part 68 Canadian Department of Communications DOC Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le Pr sent Appareil Nom rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de la class A pr scrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le minist re des Communications du Canada See the preface of this document Ordering Information Call Lucent Technologies Publications Center Voice 1 800 457 1235 International Voice 317 361 5353 Fax 1 800 457 1764 International Fax 317 322 6699 Lucent Technologies BCS Publications Center 2855 N Franklin Road Indianapolis IN 46219 Document No 555 230 112 Comcode 108215526 Issue 5 May 1998 For additional documents refer to the section in About This Docu ment entitled Related Resources Write Order You can be placed on a standing order list for this and other documents you may need Standing order will enable you to automatically receive updated versions of individual documents or document sets billed to account information that you provide For more information on stand ing orders or to be put on a list to receive future issues of this docu ment contact the Lucent Technologies Publications Center European Union Dec
96. remote Expansion Port Network EPN The LASER device operates within the following parameters Power Output 5 dBm Wavelength 1310 nm Mode Field Diameter 8 8 microns CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT IEC 825 1993 A CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for more information Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards This product complies with and conforms to the following Limits and Methods of Measurements of Radio Interference Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment EN55022 CISPR22 1993 EN50082 1 European Generic Immunity Standard FCC Part 15 Australia AS3548 gt NOTE The system conforms to Class A industrial equipment Voice terminals meet Class B requirements Electrostatic Discharge ESD IEC 1000 4 2 Radiated radio frequency field IEC 1000 4 3 Electrical Fast Transient IEC 1000 4 4 Lightning effects IEC 1000 4 5 Conducted radio frequency IEC 1000 4 6 Mains frequency magnetic field IEC 1000 4 8 Low frequency mains disturbance DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 About This Book Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards Page xiv The system conforms to the following a Electromagnetic compatibility General Immunity Standard part 1 residential
97. screws and mark the upper mounting screw locations Remove the terminal block and partially install the upper mounting screws 5 Place the terminal block on the mounting screws and tighten the screws 10 11 12 If installing a vertical patch cord trough partially install the first screw for the patch cord trough on the line 7 8 inch 2 2 cm to the right of the previous screw Partially install the second mounting screw 5 31 inches 13 5 cm to the right of the screw just installed Repeat Steps 3 4 and 5 If another trunk auxiliary field terminal block is to be installed partially install the first screw for the terminal block on the line 7 8 inch 2 2 cm to the right of the previous screw Partially install the second mounting screw 7 11 16 inches 19 5 cm to the right of the screw just installed Repeat Steps 3 4 and 5 Ifa horizontal patch cord trough is to be installed install it on the line between the trunk auxiliary field and the distribution field Toinstall the first distribution field terminal block partially install 2 3 4 inch 12 wood screws 7 11 16 inches 19 5 cm apart on the line to the right of the vertical patch cord trough Repeat Steps 3 4 and 5 If installing another distribution field terminal block partially install the first screw for the terminal block on the line 7 8 inch 2 2 cm to the right of the previous screw Partially install the second mounting scr
98. securely 5 Repeat the procedure for each sneak fuse panel DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Install Sneak Fuse Panels Page 2 15 Table 2 2 is a pinout of the cable wiring and associated fuse numbers Table 2 2 Sneak Fuse Connector Pinout Connector Pin Pair Fuse Numbers Number 26 1 1 27 2 2 28 3 3 29 4 4 30 5 5 31 6 6 32 7 7 33 8 8 34 9 9 35 10 10 36 11 11 37 12 12 38 13 13 39 14 14 40 15 15 41 16 16 42 17 17 43 18 18 44 19 19 45 20 20 46 21 21 47 22 22 48 23 23 49 34 24 50 25 25 6 Secure the top of each B25A cable with the captive screw on the connector 7 Secure the bottom of each cable with a supplied cable tie wrap DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Cable Installation Cable Installation Labels Issue 5 May 1998 Page 2 16 The purple port label shown in Figure 2 8 is installed on both ends of the 25 pair cables connecting to the trunk auxiliary field and or distribution field The top blue yellow building and floor labels are for cables connecting from the equipment room to a site satellite location on another floor or in another building The yellow label is for
99. system is in the active standby mode Enter save translation and press Enter This instructs the system to take all translation information in memory and write it to the translation card or tape Ifthe system contains a TN750 Announcement circuit pack enter display announcements and press Enter If administered recorded announcements are listed enter list configuration software version and press Enter Check Page 2 of this form to see when the announcements were last saved To save the announcements enter Save announcements and press Enier Power Down System If the packet bus is being added 1 2 At the PPN set the main circuit breaker to OFF At each EPN set the main circuit breaker to OFF Add Circuit Packs 1 2 Determine port assignment of circuit packs to be added Install the appropriate circuit pack in assigned cabinet slot as required For example Port Number 3 B 02 01 Cabinet Carrier Slot Circuit Port Network The TN748C or TN744 Call Classifier circuit pack is required The TN744 is required for those customers who desire switch call classification A vacant port is required on a TN556 ISDN BRI circuit pack A Packet Bus is required with CallVisor ASAI If the system is not equipped with a Packet Bus see Add Packet Bus to R6si Jearlier in this chapter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555
100. take place Disable Alarm Origination 1 Enter change system parameters maintenance and press Enter 2 Setthe Alarm Origination Activated field to n A CAUTION If you do not disable Alarm Origination the system may generate alarms resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets 3 For some releases of system software disable Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification before submitting the form Save Translations 1 If the system is high or critical reliability enter status system 1 and press Enter to verify that the system is in the active standby mode 2 Enter save translation and press Enter This instructs the system to take all translation information in memory and write it to the translation card or tape 3 If the system contains a TN750 Announcement circuit pack enter display announcements and press Enter If administered recorded announcements are listed enter list configuration software version and press Enter Check Page 2 of this form to see when the announcements were last saved To save the announcements enter save announcements and press Enter Power Down System 1 If the packet bus is being added set the main circuit breaker to OFF DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add ISDN BRI Page 5 122 Add Circuit Packs 1 Determine port assignmen
101. the host based telemarketing application of call events ISDN trunk A trunk administered for use with ISDN PRI Also called ISDN facility ISDN PRI terminal adapter An interface between endpoint applications and an ISDN PRI facility ISDN PRI terminal adapters are currently available from other vendors and are primarily designed for video conferencing applications Accordingly currently available terminal adapters adapt the two pairs of video codec data V 35 and dialing RS 366 ports to an ISDN PRI facility IS DTT Integrated Services digital tie trunk ISN Information Systems Network ISO International Standards Organization ISV Independent software vendor ITP Installation test procedure ITU International Telecommunications Union DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Glossary and Abbreviations IXC Interexchange carrier code Issue 5 May 1998 Page GL 29 K kHz Kilohertz kbps Kilobits per second kbyte Kilobyte kg Kilogram L LAN Local area network LAP D Link Access Procedure on the D channel LAPD Link Access Procedure data LATA Local access and transport area lb Pound LBO Line buildout LDN Listed directory number LDS Long distance service LEC Local exchange carrier LED See light emitting diode LED light emitting diode LED A semiconductor device that produces light when voltag
102. the trunk from Trunk Group form For example Port Number 3 A 07 01 Cabinet Carrier Slot Circuit Port Network See Off Premises Station Wiring on page 5 30 and install a TN747 ora non United States CO trunk circuit pack in the assigned carrier slot if an additional circuit pack is required Administer the forms listed under CO FX WATS or PCOL Trunk Group in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add DID Trunks Page 5 86 Add DID Trunks Requirements Each Direct Inward Dial DID trunk connects to 1 port of an 8 port TN753 or to 1 of an assortment of non United States DID trunk circuit packs Installation 1 3 Determine the port assignment of the trunk from Trunk Group form For example Port Number 3 A 07 01 Cabinet Carrier Slot Circuit Port Network See Off Premises Station Wiring lon page 5 30 and install a TN753 ora non United States DID trunk circuit pack in assigned carrier slot if an additional circuit pack is required Administer forms listed under DID Trunk Group in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test
103. threaded midsection that allows it to be secured to the 10A or 100ST Lightguide Coupling Panel DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Optical Cross Connect Hardware Page A 13 400A Lightguide Equipment The 400A Lightguide Interconnect Unit LIU can terminate up to 48 fiber connections These fiber connections can be either single mode or multi mode not both gt NOTE If you are not viewing this book on CD ROM the fiber cable shown in Figure A 6 is yellow denoting single mode fiber cydfliu2 KLC 041797 Figure Notes 1 400A Lightguide Interconnect Unit 4 Demarcation Point between LIU network and DEFINITY 2 Circuit Label 5 Fiber Plant Network Side 3 Fiber Optic Cable Connectors 6 To 300A Fiber Optic Transceivers Figure A 6 400A LIU Equipment 1 Label each fiber cable as it is installed 2 Route the fiber cables from the fiber optic transceivers and connect as shown in Figure A 6 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Optical Cross Connect Hardware Page A 14 General Rules and Recommendations Fiber optic cable requires careful handling and routing Follow these rules and recommendations when installing fiber optic ca
104. trunk leads from the purple field to TC terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each trunk Connect CO trunk leads from the green field to TK terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each trunk Connect ST leads on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each emergency transfer telephone to the ST terminal appearance in the yellow trunk auxiliary field The ST terminal leads should be terminated on the following pairs 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 or 22 the first pair of any 3 pair group Connect the ST leads from the terminal in Step 4 to the assigned terminal in the blue or white station distribution field Trunk Auxiliary Field Telephone Used for Emergency Transfer and as Normal Extension Ti Connect a pair of wires between the 48V and GRD terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block to the EM TRANS RELAY PWR terminal See Figure 5 19 on page 5 42 Connect CO trunk leads from the purple field to TC terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each trunk Connect CO trunk leads from the green field to TK terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each trunk Connect telephone leads from the purple analog line board row connecting block to the LC terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each telephone Connect ST leads on the yellow emergen
105. unit spacer bracket 5 49 expansion interface boards test procedure 4 8 exchange test procedure 4 11 expansion port network testing systems 4 9 4 10 external alarm wiring example 5 5 external modem COMSPHERE B 2 external modem option settings B 2 external ringing 5 44 external ringing test procedure 6 3 F Fan Assembly 1 4 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Index Feature Access Code FAC form screens and implementation notes 5 137 Fiber Link Administration form PNC duplication 3 26 simplex PNC 3 26 fiber optic cable cleaning A 16 cables 1 29 to 1 33 cabling distances A 2 multi mode A 3 multi mode transceiver A 3 single mode A 3 fiber optic cable direct connect systems 1 29 installation 1 30 fiber optic cable handling and routing A 14 fiber optic cable pass thru kit 5 70 fiber optic cables 1 30 fiber optic mean loss A 2 fiber optic shelf A 6 fiber optic splices A 2 fiber pass thru kit bracket attachments 5 80 fiber pass thru tool 5 77 France country code 3 13 FX trunk adding 5 85 5 89 Issue 5 May 1998 Page IN 7 G Germany country code 3 13 graded index multi mode fiber A 1 Greece country code 3 13 ground approved floor 1 24 building steel 1 23 concrete encased 1 23 coupled bonded conductor 2 26 ring
106. 00 oo 0000000000000 oO 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 AA O 00000 fe fe 0000000000000 fe Oo 0990000000000 fe 0000 000000000000 020000000000 COM2 PARALLEL COM1 0069_0 RBP 072296 Figure Notes 1 Rear Panel of 715 BCS Terminal 5 Modular Keyboard Jack 2 6 Pin Mini DIN Connector 6 COM 1 Port 3 Rear Panel of 2900 715 BCS Terminal 7 Rear Panel of 715 BCS 2 4 P2 DTE Port Tormine Figure 3 2 Rear Panels on Management Terminals Connect to the System 1 Route the 25 pin DTE cable from the terminal to the rear of the system 2 For Release 6si connect the cable to the TERM connector See Figure For Release 6r connect the cable to the Terminal Active connector See 3 Plug the AC power cord into the AC receptacle on the terminal Plug the opposite end of the power cord to the AC receptacle located at the bottom rear of the cabinet or into the selected AC receptacle 4 Set the terminal power switch ON DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Install Management Terminal Page 3 5 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 14 cLOck AUX pioase San ono LV N N K Nd 5 INTERPRO enmi z z 7 z o o g o g o o O 9 o 0063_0 RBP 071096 Figure 3 3 Management Terminal Connections for Release 6si endfpe KLC 101596
107. 1 23 water pipe 1 23 ground plate 2 5 2 13 grounding AC power 1 8 approved 1 8 rules 1 8 H hardware fiber optic 1 30 hardware installation 110 type terminal blocks 2 6 help terminal set up commands 3 10 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Index Page IN 8 high reliability testing systems 4 6 4 7 hole plugs 1 3 Hong Kong country code 3 13 Hungary country code 3 13 I O cables 2 5 2 13 impedance setting B 12 INADS register system 5 92 5 112 5 114 5 116 5 119 5 123 5 128 5 130 6 9 test procedure 6 4 information outlets 2 28 integrated announcement test procedure 6 3 ISDN B 12 2 wire BRI line wiring 5 12 BRI fanout of multipoint installations 5 63 port board and telephone pin designations 5 12 terminating resistor 5 57 test procedure 6 5 PRI interface B 12 ISDN PRI over PACCON adding 5 124 Italy country code 3 13 J J58890CE 1 14 Japan country code 3 13 L labels 110 type terminal block 2 45 Main Distribution Frame 2 44 large battery holdover 1 14 lead designations 5 143 port board 5 12 port board and telephone 5 12 telephones 5 12 LEDs attendant consoles 4 13 circuit packs 4 14 DS1 Converter circuit packs 4 15 DS1 facility 4 16 expansion interface El circuit packs 4 15 interface ci
108. 1 4 Auxiliary cabinet power receptacle strip 1 4 auxiliary connector outputs 5 10 auxiliary equipment pin designations 5 143 5 153 to 5 155 D 1 Issue 5 May 1998 Page IN 2 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Index Page IN 3 Ey B back up battery 5 46 back up battery PEC codes 5 48 backup translations 3 30 basic rate interface see also BRI test procedure 6 5 battery 1147B 5 48 1148B 5 48 1149B 5 48 battery back up 5 48 battery back up switch 5 49 battery holdover 1 12 Battery Interface Unit BIU 1 16 battery leads 1 12 Belgium country code 3 13 bit rate setting B 12 bracket attachments for fiber pass thru kit 5 80 BRI multipoint cabling distances 5 63 terminating resistor 5 57 test procedure 6 5 BRI terminating resistor 5 57 BU3200A Battery Interface Unit 1 17 C cabinet attaching to floor 1 36 cable clamps 2 5 2 13 definition of 4 1 4 8 4 10 cabinet stabilizing bolts 1 3 1 4 cable clamps 2 5 2 13 cable disconnect label 5 80 cable ductwork 1 3 1 34 Cable Slack Manager 2 5 2 12 cables 25 pair I O 2 5 2 13 diagrams 5 143 5 153 to 5 155 D 1 fiber optic 1 30 outputs for control carrier 5 10 wall field 2 5 2 13 cabling fiber optic distances A 2 C
109. 1 sue w qia L 8v IZNL ZtLZNL 6Z2NL 8ELZNL 6ZNL a ZyZNL E8LZNL SLYNL YLYNL OSOPNL L8LZNL vEyNL 9vLZNL LvYNL a9PZNL 69ZNL Ap9yNL OO9ZNL SZNL aSerN 9PZNL ZpZNL a2zZN GO9ZNL S9EP NL L2pNL ELPNL 8vYNL GLLPNL ZOZNL 6vyNL S6SP NL ZZ NL GE9ZNL av9SNL G89r NL LE NL ZeZNL 8S NL 6ELZNL E6YNL E9ZNL azoZNi avSLNL SELZNL ZEvNL Y8IZNL SSNL 8612NL g9SSNL E8YNL 8ZYNL 62yNL 66LZNL 6ZYNL LIYNL SEZNL Z9LNL pzzzNL G9ZZNL 6viZNL ZOPNL aora aur aM anm p JUNIJ JUNI yung aaIM yung yung aur aur sod FZ anM Fz pue 9 eurT xod eead aur aur L aL aora yung ayo xXnv IAW peqsH nM 7 aur 91 Sojeuy mog Ped Tag rad sd ala YJO guo aur Tensiq aur NASI NASI Tegu ersa p wq Zopeuy eea ky resid MT suonedisisse D puowdmby Arelpixny pue yed MND EE S IALL avd jxau uo panulquo7 Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 153 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 5 9YXL LLH 91Xd vid vIZS veXL vdo bh veXxL ZY LL y8 18 91XL LLL 9YXd DIL vZS DLXL blo LLL DLXL ZU 9g 18 4 s SYXd Old SYXL vd vd vd vd vd vd DYLA Old 9d vd Ol H S YL G1Xd OLL SIXL vl vl vw vl vl vl DLIA OLL 9L vl Se SH SYXL 6H G1Xd EW 0
110. 149B and the 1147B Table 5 15 provides the rating and PEC code of each battery Table 5 15 Back Up Battery PEC Codes Battery Rating PEC Code 1148B 2 5 Amp Hour AH 24700 1149B 5 Amp Hour AH 24701 1147B 8 Amp Hour AH 24703 1 Loosely thread two 10 32 x 1 2 inch shoulder screws into the top designated battery holes on the wall mounting plate Place the keyhole slots in the battery bracket on these 2 screws The battery cord exits from the right of the bracket Make sure the label on the battery is visible Tighten the screws securely Plug the battery cord into the power supply s right rear receptacle The rear receptacle is indicated on the right label DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment 1145B Power Supply Page 5 49 Install the Expanded Power Distribution Unit A second power distribution unit can be installed to provide power to additional 8400 series and 8500 series terminals A CAUTION Total power cannot exceed 200 Watts The maximum ISDN terminal mixture is twenty four 7500 series and twenty four 8500 series terminals The maximum DCP terminal mixture is twenty four 7400 series and twenty four 8400 series or sixty four 8400 series terminals The following items are supplied with each expanded power distribution unit kit One 1146B Po
111. 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment CAMA E911 Installation Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 142 a Time of Day C Restricted Call Unrestricted Call Access to Category For MFC AN Send ANI for Hear System Music on x Page 1 of 3 b CLASS OF RESTRICTION COR Number COR Description FRL Can Be Service Observed Can Be A Service Observer hart Priority Queuing Restriction Override List List MCT Ti MFE Hold Automatic Charge Display 10 supervisor 0 APLT n Calling Party Restriction n Called Party Restriction 1 Forced Entry of Account Codes n Direct Agent Calling none Facility Access Trunk Test n Can Change Coverage y Fully Restricted Service 7 Hear VDN of Origin Annc n_ Add Remove Agent Skills y PASTE Display PBX Data on Phone n Can Be Picked Up By Directed Call Pickup Can Use Directed Call Pickup none none 555 5 op 6 5 5 Screen 5 9 Class of Restriction form page 1 36 On the Class of Restriction screen page 1 inthe Calling Party Restriction field type none and press Enter 37 Type Save Translation and press Enter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Connector and Cable Diagrams Pinout Charts Connector and Cable Diagrams Pinout Charts Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 143 Se
112. 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add CallVisor ASAI Page 5 119 Install Cables 1 Install cables from cabinet to the MDF as required Power Up System If the packet bus was added 1 At each EPN set the main circuit breaker to ON 2 At the PPN set the main circuit breaker to ON 3 The system performs a level 4 reboot loading the system translations from the translation card or tape Rebooting takes several minutes 4 After all trouble is cleared verify the EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO This restores the system to the normal mode Enter Added Translations 1 Administer the required translation data using the forms listed under Adjunct Switch Applications Interface ASAI in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description Resolve Alarms 1 Examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance R6r Contact INADS to Enable Customer Options and Verify Alarm Origination 1 Be sure the system is part of the existing INADS database by calling the INADS Database Administrator at the Technical Service Center TSC Verify that INADS can dial into the system and that the system can dial out to INADS As part of the system registration process the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination and enables customer options A caution If you do
113. 4 8 Install I O cable rack coupling to rear of cabinet or or 9 install I O cable rack riser to end of cabinet 5 12 19 Install AC power ducts 21 32 34 amp 35 6 27 Install shielded cable ducts between DEFINITY and DIMENSION cabinets 7 28 Install I O cable ducts between DEFINITY and DIMENSION cabinets 8 29 amp 31 Install shielded duct assembly from front of system cabinet to rear of a DEFINITY cabinet group 29 or front of a DEFINITY cabinet to rear of system cabinet group 31 9 30 I O transition assembly for cross aisle DEFINITY 10 33 Ladder rack supported 86 or 88 5 inches 218 4 cm or 224 8 cm from floor DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork Page C 6 SAANAANNANANNANNANINANNANINNINANSN ASSASSIN duct2 PDH 071796 Figure Notes 1 Wall 6 Shielded Intercabinet Fiber Optic Cables 2 Space for Future Cabinet 3 Plywood Wall and Cross Connect 7 I O Duct to Cross Connect Field Field 8 I O Cross Isle Trough A O Cable Rack Coupling to Rearof 9 Front of Cabinets Cabinet AC Power Cable Duct o Figure C 2 Overhead View of a Typical Ductwork Layout DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork Page C 7 Install Intercabinet Shielded Duc
114. 5 ECES Assigned Ports u unassigned t tti p psa mecec 6 ccce E column stating BOARD NOT 1 SPE B 07 08 u u u u O7 u e ce eeceece DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 4 Test the System Test TDM Bus in PPN Page 4 4 Test TDM Bus in PPN 1 Verify the screen displays Command 2 Type test tdm port network 1 and press Enter 3 Verify the screen displays the results similar to Screen 4 3 test tdm port network 1 SPE B TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code PN 01A TDM BUS 294 PASS PN 01A TDM BUS 296 ABORT 1005 PN 01A TDM BUS 297 PASS PN 01B TDM BUS 294 PASS PN 01B TDM BUS 296 PASS PN 01B TDM BUS 297 ABORT 1005 Command successfully completed Command Screen 4 3 Example Test Results for TDM Port Network 1 4 Ifthe result is FAIL for any test check the connectors of the TDM bus cables in PPN 1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 4 Test the System Test Tone Clock Circuit Packs Page 4 5 Test Tone Clock Circuit Packs This test also detects problems with the TDM bus cables 1 Verify the screen displays Command 2 Type test tone clock 1a and press Enter 3 Verify the screen displays test results similar to Screen 4 4 test tone clock la SPE Bi TEST RESULTS
115. 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add Code Calling Access Page 5 93 Add Code Calling Access The tones for the Code Calling feature are generated by the TN756 TN768 TN780 TN2182 or TN419B Tone Clock circuit packs in the port networks Install a TN763 or a non United States TN417 Auxiliary Trunk circuit pack ora TN457 Speech Synthesizer circuit pack and connect for Loudspeaker Paging The Code Calling Access feature shares the same ports as Loudspeaker Paging An Auxiliary Trunk circuit pack provides 4 ports for Loudspeaker Paging and Code Calling Access Administer the form listed under Code Calling Access in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description Add Speech Synthesis The TN725B Speech Synthesizer circuit pack is required when the Voice Message Retrieval Automatic Wakeup or Do Not Disturb features are activated The TN725B circuit pack does not require administration 1 Determine the port assignment of the Speech Synthesizer circuit pack to be added 2 Install the TN725B Speech Synthesizer circuit pack in the designated carrier slot Add Pooled Modem Modem Pooling supports 2 kinds of conversion resources integrated and combined The integrated type requires a TN758 Pooled Modem circuit pack for each 2 conversion resources provided The combined type requires a
116. 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Off Premises or Out of Building Stations Page 5 32 Figure Notes 1 Locally Engineered Cables and Equipment 25 Pair Connector Multi Pair Protector Units Primary Protectors with Heat Coils or Equivalent with Sneak Current Protection B25A Cable Concentrator Cable WP90929 List 1 6 356A Adapter Out of Building Wiring 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 0044_0 RBP 062796 Out Of Building Analog Telephones Part of Main Distribution Frame MDF Station Side System Side White Field Purple Field Cross Connect Jumpers 15 16 Tip and Ring Wires To TN742 TN769 TN746B or TN2183 Analog Line Circuit Pack Figure 5 16 Connections to 24 Out of Building Telephones DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Off Premises or Out of Building Stations Page 5 33 Carbon block or equivalent protection is required at both building entrances Also sneak current protection is required Protection can be provided by a 4 type protector or a 3 type protector plus a separate sneak current protector The 4 type protector is equipped with a heat coil The 4 type protector is the pref
117. 5 230 112 Index setting date and time procedure 3 15 shadow link a test procedure 4 6 shipping packing list 1 2 signaling leads DC power B 10 Singapore country code 3 13 single mode attenuator A 7 single mode fiber A 1 A 15 single mode fiber transceiver A 15 single mode optical power measurement A 6 single phase 240VAC 1 6 E small battery holdover 1 13 sneak current fuse panel 2 13 sneak current protection 2 13 Sneak Fuses 2 13 Spain country code 3 13 speech synthesis adding 5 93 standby components LEDs 4 16 station cable 2 28 25 pair 2 28 4 pair 2 29 bulk 2 29 double modular plug ended 4 pair 2 29 multiple 25 pair 2 28 a single modular plug ended 4 pair 2 29 status system all cabinets command 4 2 4 7 4 10 4 11 switch node interface SNI LEDs 4 15 switch processing element interchange test procedure 4 7 test procedure 4 6 switch settings 572 printer B 5 CDR B 8 external modem B 2 printer B 5 ran TN464 circuit pack B 12 TN760 tie trunk B 10 SYSAM circuit packs 4 16 system grounding 1 8 system maintenance 3 18 system printer B 5 system parameters maintenance 3 18 Issue 5 May 1998 Page IN 12 T T1 Channel Service Unit 5 9 Taiwan country code 3 13 TDM bus B 12 telephone pin designations 5 12 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi
118. 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Index Page IN 11 power up AUDIX procedure 3 32 CC powered system procedure 3 7 DC powered system procedure 3 8 PRI over PACCON adding 5 124 printer 572 option settings B 5 option settings B 5 provisioning plan 2 49 Q queue calling 5 44 queue warning indicator 5 44 queue warning indicator test procedure 6 3 R recorded announcement test procedure 6 3 rectifier module 1 16 red lights what to do about 3 13 references to other DEFINITY documentation E 1 refresh soe command 4 7 registering system with INADS 5 92 5 112 5 114 5 116 5 119 5 123 5 128 5 130 6 9 reliability Critical testing systems 4 6 4 7 4 10 4 11 high testing systems 4 6 4 7 remote access test procedure 6 4 reset system interchange command 4 7 ringing external test procedure 6 3 night test procedure 6 3 RM0750HA100 Rectifier Module 1 17 Russia country code 3 13 S Saudi Arabia country code 3 13 save translations 3 30 3 31 screens management terminal introduction 3 10 Selector Console 5 16 selector console test procedure 6 2 set expansion link command 4 11 set tone clock command 4 10 setting bit rate B 12 line impedance B 12 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 55
119. 8 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 14 coverage answer group A group of up to eight voice terminals that ring simultaneously when a call is redirected to it by Call Coverage Any one of the group can answer the call coverage call A call that is automatically redirected from the called party s extension to an alternate answering position when certain coverage criteria are met coverage path The order in which calls are redirected to alternate answering positions coverage point An extension or attendant group VDN or ACD split designated as an alternate answering position in a coverage path covering user A person at a coverage point who answers a redirected call CP Circuit pack CPE Customer premises equipment CPN Called party number CPN BN Calling party number billing number CPTR Call progress tone receiver CRC Cyclical Redundancy Checking critical reliability system A system that has the following duplicated items control carriers tone clocks El circuit packs and cabling between port networks and center stage switch in a CSS connected system See also duplicated common control jand duplication CSA Canadian Safety Association or Customer Software Administrator CSCC Compact single carrier cabinet CSCN Center stage control network CSD Customer service document CSM Centralized System Management CSS See center stage switch CSS CSSO Customer Services Support Organization DEFINI
120. 8 meters using 24 AWG 5 0 26 mm2 wire DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Off Premises or Out of Building Stations Figure Notes 1 Locally Engineered Cables and Equipment 2 3 Multi Pair Protector Units Primary Out of Building Wiring 25 Pair Connector Protectors with Heat Coils or Equivalent with Sneak Current Protection 356A Adapter B25A Cable Out Of Building Analog Telephones 11 Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 31 0043_0 RBP 062796 Part of MDF Station Side 10 White Field 12 13 14 15 System Side Purple Field Cross Connect Jumpers Tip and Ring Wires To TN2183 TN769 TN742 TN746B or Analog Line Circuit Pack Figure 5 15 Connections for Up to 8 Out of Building Analog Telephones Figure 5 16 shows the connections for up to 24 off premises analog telephones Concentrations of analog line pairs are used at both buildings to minimize the off premises wiring required At the MDF connect jumpers between 1 row connecting block in the white field and up to 3 rows connecting blocks in the purple field At the station location a WP 90929 List 1 Concentrator Cable is used There are 8 station appearances on each of the 3 fingers of the concentrator cable DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue
121. 800 T N417 Auxiliary Trunk Port TN419B Tone Clock Control TN420B C Tone Detector Service TN429 B Direct Inward Outward Dialing DIOD Trunk Port TN429C Analog Central Office Trunk Port TN429D Analog DIOD Trunk Analog Loop Start Port Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment List of Circuit Packs Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 66 Table 5 16 Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules Continued Apparatus Code Name Type TN433 Speech Synthesizer Service TN436B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN437 Tie Trunk Port TN438B Central Office Trunk Port TN439 Tie Trunk Port TN447 Central Office Trunk Port TN457 Speech Synthesizer Service TN458 Tie Trunk Port TN459B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN464C D E F_ DS1 Interface T1 24 Channel E1 32 Channel Port TN465 B C Central Office Trunk Port TN467 Analog Line Port TN468B Analog Line Port TN479 Analog Line Port TN497 Tie Trunk Port TN553 Packet Data Line Port TN556 B ISDN BRI 4 Wire S T NT Line A Law Port TN570 B C Expansion Interface Port TN572 Switch Node Clock Control TN573 B Switch Node Interface Control TN574 DS1 Converter T1 24 Channel Port TN577 Packet Gateway Port TN722B DS1 Tie Trunk Port TN725B Speech Synthesizer Service TN726 B Data Lin
122. 9 shows 3 typical connection locations for adjunct power Adjunct power for station equipment may be supplied from the equipment room satellite location or the work location 1 Typical Display Telephone 9 100P6A Patch Cord or Jumpers 2 Adjunct Power Supply Such as 1151Aor 10 System Side of MDF 2 Ei zl adjunct _1 PDH 062696 Figure Notes ate 11 25 Pair Cable to System Cabinet 3 400B2 Adapter Analog Line Circuit Pack 4 Information Outlet 12 Equipment Room 5 4 Pair D Inside Wire DIW Cable 13 Satellite Location 6 Satellite Site or Adapter Location 14 Work Location 7 25 Pair D Inside Wire DIW Cable 15 Power From Bulk Power Source Such 8 Station Side of Main Distribution Frame as 11858 Figure 5 9 Example Adjunct Power Connections For Figure 5 9 the following example is used a If 25 telephones connect to the system and all 25 telephones need adjunct power install the adjunct power supply in the equipment room b If only 10 of the telephones need adjunct power install the adjunct power supply at the satellite location c If only 1 telephone needs adjunct power install the adjunct power supply at the work location DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Adjunct Power Connections Page 5 15 Local and Phantom Power
123. 998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add External Modem to TN1648B Page 5 100 Q prda0002 RPY 021198 Figure 5 47 Attach the Panel Adapter Bracket DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add External Modem to TN1648B Page 5 101 3 Insert the cable assembly as shown in Figure 5 48 prda0003 RPY 021798 Figure 5 48 Insert the Cable Assembly through the Panel Adapter Bracket DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add External Modem to TN1648B Page 5 102 4 Connect the external modem cable to the cable assembly 5 Attach the RJ telephone plug to the pass thru tool using a tie wrap See Figure 5 49 fodacup3 RPY 021698 Figure Notes 1 Pass thru Tool 3 Tie Wrap 2 RJ45 Telephone Plug Figure 5 49 Attach the Cable to the Pass Thru Tool 6 Slide the tool to the front of the cabinet See Figure 5 50 7 Pull the tool with adapter and cable attached out through the front of the cabinet 8 Close the rear door 9 Replace the fan cover See Figure 5 51 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire
124. 998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Multi point Adapters Page 5 61 Multi point Adapters Multi point Adapters are used to provide signal fanout of the T interface Fanout can be performed at the work station by the BR851 B or the 367A These adapters support more than one ISDN terminal per horizontal 4 pair D inside wire DIW To support multiple horizontal runs perform fanout in the satellite closet by an MDF with multiple common rows The 110RA1 12 provides fanout for 2 horizontal runs and contains the 100 Ohm terminating resistor This can be used for Basic Multi point or point to point with terminating resistor in the closet Other fanout blocks include the 110AB1 025M and the 110AB1 050M BR851 B Adapter T Adapter The BR851 B supports 2 terminals on 1 multi point BRI at the work station It is a T shaped device used to fanout transmission and power The BR851 B is an 8 pin device with a single plug and 2 jacks See Figure 5 26 Q gt s7654321 Qoissiise2 RTRTRTRT girre 7 e 2 I illir Qrissiise2e gt gt Q gt s7654321 Qre7ssssas t o gt D amp npry7qnyr qe Figure Notes 1 Wire Pairs 4 Female 2 Pin Numbers 5 Two 8 pin Modular Jacks 3 Modular Plug Male 6 T Type Adapter Figure 5 26 Wiring Diagram of BR851 B DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5
125. A different value attenuator may be required depending on the amount of fiber loss back to the local system gt NOTE If the fiber link is duplicated route the fiber via a separate geographical path if possible This way if the standard fiber link is damaged the duplicated fiber remains in service DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Optical Cross Connect Hardware Page A 9 Lightguide Distribution Shelf The preterminated lightguide distribution shelf can mount to LGX fiber optic distribution frames or can mount directly to a wall The shelf can also mount in 23 inch 58 4 cm or 19 inch 48 2 cm equipment cabinets or racks The shelf accommodates single mode and or multi mode fiber connections See Figure A 3 cadfig1 LJK 041897 Figure Notes 1 To PPN or Remote EPN Cabinet 3 Circuit Labels 2 Retainer Rings 4 From Outside Cable Plant Figure A 3 Typical Preterminated Lightguide Distribution Shelf gt NOTE If you are not viewing this book on CD ROM Figure A 3 shows orange fiber connections denoting multi mode fiber DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Optical Cros
126. AN LEDs indicate the status of the 4 T1 E1 facilities A SPAN LED is in one of the following states 1 Solid on yellow Facility is operational and alarm free 2 Blinking yellow for 2 seconds off 0 1 seconds Facility is operational and alarm free AND is carrying the control channel facility A or B only 3 Solid on red Facility is alarmed 4 Solid off Facility is not administered or has been busied out DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 4 Test the System LED Indicators Page 4 16 VOB ew OOHSV99990 O O Qo WAS BB 2 a fpdfds1 LJK 101596 Figure Notes 1 Alarm LED Red 4 STATUS LEDs 2 Test LED Green 5 SPAN LEDs 3 Busy LED Yellow Figure 4 2 TN1654 DS1 Converter Circuit Pack LEDs LEDs on Standby Components In high and critical reliability systems duplicated components on standby usually have the yellow LEDs off with the following exceptions a The major minor and warning alarm LEDs on the SYSAM circuit pack on the standby SPE do not give reliable indications Note only LEDs on the active SYSAM circuit pack a The yellow LED blinks on and off when the standby processor circuit pack is up and standby maintenance is running a In high reliability systems with a Center Stage Switch duplicated SPE simplex PNC the standby Switch Node clock s yellow LED is off In critica
127. Alarm Wires The external alarm plug should already be connected to the J58890CH 1 Power Distribution Unit The pinout for the connector is shown in Table 5 8 Table 5 8 External Alarm Connector Pinout Pin Designation Definition 26 Not Used 1 Not Used 27 Not Used 2 Not Used 28 Not Used 3 Not Used 29 Not Used 4 Not Used 30 Not Used 5 Not Used 31 Not Used 6 Not Used 32 Not Used 7 Not Used 33 RFA2 Rectifier Failure positive 8 RFA2 Rectifier Failure negative 34 ACF2 AC Failure positive 9 ACF2 AC Failure negative 35 BIF2 Battery Interface Failure positive 10 BIF2 Battery Interface Failure negative 36 BOD2 Battery On Discharge positive 11 BOD2 Battery On Discharge negative 37 Not Used 12 RXD Receive Data 38 TXD Transmit Data Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Connect Power Distribution Unit External Alarm Wires Page 5 20 Table 5 8 External Alarm Connector Pinout Continued Pin Designation Definition 13 DTR Data Terminal Ready 39 RS 232 GRD RS 232 Ground 14 DSR Data Set Ready 40 RTS Request To Send 15 Not Used 41 Not Used 16 Not Used 42 N
128. Areypxny pue Ped HMD PE S QLL Issue 5 May 1998 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Page 5 155 J9 OlA MOJI A yoelg p y Aa19 S peyo aaoge y ul Ajdde s10j09 m Bulmoyjjo dy LNO Junu e461 O1 OT HWWSUPI XgdXd n SS pey g buy usso y di LL pajou s m y o ss jun syed yn 119 e 10 Adde suoneinesqqe Buimoy o au S umoig HG uaz 9 uLo O ng 1g SWUM M NI yuna ey 61a WSUEI EUW jeuBis 3419991 Xd peusis usuen Xgd 3910A N9991 Xd 0A WWSUE Xgd A1 XL J W bob HL UMOUS JOU Ae S1009 B Ge9 0E 009H S jqeo gGzy pue yezg 0 Ajuo Ajdde yeyo si Ul S1009 SuIM BU J Gz AS os S A ZLUXd ZLYXL WOVE Std ved 8HXd 9H ve Myg Z1LXd ZLLXL eNOVET Sd vel 81Xd 9IL 6r Yg A ZLYXL ZLLXd sO 849 eza 89XL SiH ez AD aora aur dIIM Z dJIM F yuniy AL JUUNIL M AL yuniy aur aur SsHod FZ M spod 97 spod g siaquinn IO OD yod eea aury aur a mL aora ymu OO xnv LaW PHq4H M 7 aury aury aur ud mog Ped rad laid tsa aia oo aur erta Sojeuy 3opeuy 10p uuo NASI NASI Te1siq pue pue aury aury Te1131q ea aqIM Z SHED nour spesy yueutdinby Areny pue yed HMO PE S IEL DEFINITY Enter
129. Assembly 10 Slide in Direction Shown 11 Wire Holders Figure C 12 Install AC Power Duct DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork Page C 19 duct9 KLC 071696 Figure C 13 Assembly of Ladder Rack DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 D Connector and Cable Diagrams Page D 1 Connector and Cable Diagrams This chapter provides connector and cable diagrams for the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server For circuit pack and auxiliary equipment classifications see the tables at the end of Chapter 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 D Connector and Cable Diagrams Page D 2 See Figure D 1 for Expansion Interface to Expansion Interface fiber interconnect FS 1 El to El fiber cable Backplane Backplane 9823A B 9823A B Front 5V AL E EEE A S E A E E E E E E A I Backplane Front 5V 5V XMT_DAT RCV_DAT XMT_DAT RCV_DAT o zZ m r975bb1a MMR 061396 Figure D 1 Expansion Interfa
130. CAUTION To avoid a disk crash never reset the DEFINITY AUDIX System without first shutting it down Shut down the DEFINITY AUDIX System and allow the disk to completely spin down before unplugging the assembly Seel DEFINITY AUDX Power Procedures pn page 3 32 for the proper procedures 6 Ifthe red LEDs still do not go off refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6r or to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs si gt NOTE Ignore the red alarm indication LED on the TN767 or TN464 DS1 circuit pack until after the DS1 circuit pack is administered Alarms will appear in the Alarm Log when power is applied to the system before all equipment connecting to port circuit packs is installed Normally some alarms will be logged when power is applied to the system but should be resolved quickly If no equipment is connected to the port circuit packs alarms associated with these ports can take up to four hours to log but will clear automatically after all equipment is installed and operating correctly DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Set Country Options Page 3 14 Change Craft Password The password for the craft login must be changed by the installing technician to prevent unauthorized administration changes A CAUTION
131. CC approved or equivalent analog type telephone for example a 2500 type can be used as an off premises station The TN746B and TN2183 Analog Line circuit packs can be used for off premises stations 1 Connect an A25D cable between the RJ21X network interface and a sneak fuse panel See Install Sneak Fuse Panels in Chapter 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling 2 Atthe MDF connect jumper wires between 1 row connecting block in the green field and up to 3 rows connecting blocks in the purple field to concentrate the analog line pairs 3 Connect an A25D cable between the sneak fuse panel and the 110 type terminal block connector associated with the green row in Step 2 4 Install a green label on the 110 type terminal block to identify the remote location 5 Administer per DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description Off Premises or Out of Building Stations Out of building campus stations are those telephones voice terminals not physically located in the same building as the equipment room but are located on the same property Analog Off Premises Stations Figure 5 15 shows the connections for 1 to 8 off premises analog telephones Only analog telephones connected to TN742 TN746B TN2183 or TN769 Analog Line circuit packs can be installed out of building The maximum distance from the system cabinet to the out of building voice terminal is 6000 feet 1828
132. Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Administer Fiber Links Release 6r Only Page 3 24 Administer Fiber Links on Simplex Systems 1 Administer the TN570 Expansion Interface and the TN574 or TN1654 DS1 Converter circuit packs Enter the change circuit packs command and press Enter See Screen 3 9 change circuit packs Page 4 of 5 SPE A CIRCUIT PACKS Cabinet 1 Carrier D Cabinet Layout five carrier Carrier Type dup sw node Slot Code Sfx Name Slot Code Sfx Name iii 0i TN570 _ EXPANSION INTF 12 TN572 _ SWITCH NODE CLOCK 02 TN573 _ SWITCH NODE INTF 13 _ 03 TN573 _ SWITCH NODE INTF 14 L 04 TN573 _ SWITCH NODE INTF 15 _ 05 _ 16 06 i 17 07 18 z 08 _ 19 TN573 _ SWITCH NODE INTF 09 _ 20 TNS73 _ SWITCH NODE INTF 10 TNS72 _ SWITCH NODE CLOCK 21 TNS74 _ DSi CONVERTER indicates circuit pack conflict Screen 3 9 Circuit Packs Form 2 Scroll through the pages on the form until the carrier containing the new circuit packs displays Enter the circuit packs into the appropriate slot locations on the form Press Enter when finished 3 Enter the list fiber command All administered fiber connections display 4 If a previously used fiber link is to be reused enter the add fiber lt number gt command If this is a new fiber link enter the add fiber next command The Fiber Link Administration screen appears Use this form to administer fiber lin
133. Component Comcodes ST and STII Description Comcode 100A Lightguide Interconnect Unit LIU 12 Terminations 104325600 Preterminated with Mini Fanouts 200A Lightguide Interconnect Unit LIU 24 Terminations 106658545 Preterminated with Mini Fanouts 400A Lightguide Interconnect Unit LIU 48 Terminations 106266901 Preterminated with Mini Fanouts Lightguide Distribution Shelf Preterminated with Mini Fanouts Contact Lucent Representative 10A Lightguide Coupling Panel for 100A and 200A 6 Couplings 104141858 1000ST Lightguide Coupling Panel for 400A 6 Couplings 105392005 1A4 Vertical Trough for 100A 104141866 1A6 Horizontal Trough for 100A 104141874 2A4 Vertical Trough for 200A 106497753 2A6 Horizontal Trough for 200A 106497761 C2000A 2 Multi mode Connector 104148028 C3000A 2 Single mode Connector 105271142 5dB Attenuator Single mode Yellow 106060718 10dB Attenuator Single mode Yellow 106060734 15dB Attenuator Single mode Yellow 106061021 Fiber Protector Cover 846929883 300A Fiber Optic Transceiver Single mode 107731853 9823A Fiber Optic Transceiver Multi mode 106455348 9823B Fiber Optic Transceiver Multi mode 106455363 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Fiber Optic Requirements Page A 5 Table A 3 provides multi mode
134. Connect Ground Block S Tie Wiaps 11 Main Distribution Frame MDF Sy PADIS SREI Or Scop ale PANS 12 To Other Cross Connect Ground 5 Ground on Carbon Block Protector Blocks or Equivalent 13 Approved Ground 6 Trunk Cable to Network Interface 14 Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC 7 10 AWG 25 6 mm Wire Figure 2 15 Coupled Bonding Conductor DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Station Wiring Design Page 2 28 Station Wiring Design The following hardware and cabling is used a Information outlets modular wall jacks a Station Cables a a A brief description of each of the above listed items follows Ordering information is not provided for station cables and information outlets Information Outlets Information outlets are 8 pin modular wall jacks Most of the outlets are wired with push on connections Information outlets are also available that connect to a double modular plug ended 4 pair station cable routed from the MDF a site satellite location or an adapter Station Cables For clarity a station cable is either a 25 pair cable multiple 25 pair cable or 4 pair D inside wire DIW run from the equipment room site satellite location or adapter to the information outlets The following station cables are available See Figure 2 16 25 pair station cable Use between
135. Distance from Information Outlet to Terminating 5 Maximum Distance From Satellite Endpoint 33 Feet 10 m ae to Work Location 250 Feet 11 Information Outlet Bridged Tap Figure 5 28 Basic Multi point with 1 Work Location DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add Circuit Packs Page 5 64 Add Circuit Packs When installing additional features or equipment it may be necessary to install additional port circuit packs See Figure 5 16 for a list of circuit packs This is a general procedure to use when adding features or equipment that require adding circuit packs 1 Log onto the system and answer y to the Suppress Alarm Origination question during login Install the circuit pack into the carrier Log off the system after the addition and any required administration is complete gt NOTE If North American and non United States circuit packs appear in the same row of a table those circuit pack codes ordinarily used in North America appear in bold font to help distinguish these circuit packs from their non United States counterparts If only circuit packs commonly used for non United States applications appear in a row of a table the circuit pack codes are enclosed in parentheses If only circuit packs commonly used in North America appear in a row of a table the circ
136. ELS uXd Etd 6H E HXd SH 60 d 4g GIXL 6L SYXd 4 S 1Xd Ed 6L 1Xd SL ve Yd d vdxXd 8d veXL eld LZS YXL 2a 0 8H YXL 80 y D vlXd 8L Y1XL EIL ZS LXL LO 8L LXL Ee 94 eH veXL ZY blXd d eH eg d d d EY LA ZY d 40 H 0 eL Y1XL ZL vdxXd L el ev L L l ELLA ZL L ce OH uXd 9H HXL ZN 40 cls cYXd Ctd 94 cHXd 90 719 1Xd 9L LXL cd es clXd od 9L clXd LE 19 4 YXL SY 1Xd cold elZS cYuXL cdo sH coxXL SO MS LXL SL E HXd ZIL eZS eLXL glo SL eLXL oe SM cH cYXd vH cYxXL cd cH cd cd cd cd CU tA vH vd cd v0 Myg cL clXd YL eLXL gL cL ov gL gL eL cLLA vl vl ol 6z Yg M coxXL eH clXd LW xe LLS buXd Ltd eH bkuXd d 0 MSD eLXL L cYXd LS LIXd k d L LLXd L 8z 9 M kuXd cH YX LiH LLZS YX lHo cH bYXL cd 20 M O LIXd cL LLXL LLL IZS LIXL LLO cL LIXL gL LZ OM kd bYXL kd L1Xd ky kd Ld ky ky kd LY LA kd ky ky LO M8 LL LIXL LL buXd LL LL LV LL LL LL LLIA LL LL LL 9z 1a M aoia duly dIIM Z dIIM F yuniy AIL yuniy dTIM AL yuniy aury aury spod FZ dIIM F spod 9 spod g sx qumyN IO OD Hog Req aury aurT L aL aora mL OD xnv IAW PHq4H M 7 aury aur aur ud mog Ped rad T44 tsa did oo aury RIIA Sojeuy Sojeuy 10 auU0D NASI NASI rer3Ia pue pue oury aury Rsa ea IIM Z Sueo moug speaq yuawudinby Areny pue Jed INAO PE S QLL Issue 5 May 1998 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation
137. Enter reset system interchange command The management terminal will be logged off and a beep will be heard 5 Login and verify that the screen displays PE_A in the upper right corner gt NOTE Processor A s yellow light is on and its green LED is off Processor B s yellow and green LEDs are off The system is alarm free 6 Make system test call The call must complete and the conversation must be satisfactory DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 6 Test Telephones and Other Equipment Test Terminating Trunk Transmission Page 6 6 Test Terminating Trunk Transmission The Terminating Trunk Transmission Test provides for extension number access to 3 tone sequences that can be used for trunk transmission testing from the distant end of the trunks The 3 test types must have extension numbers assigned on the system parameters maintenance form Test Type 100 Test Type 102 Test Type 105 Test type 100 provides a 5 5 Seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 0 dB Quiet until disconnect disconnect is forced after 1 minute Test Type 102 provides 9 Seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 0 dB 1 Second of silence Cycle is repeated until disconnect which is forced after 24 hours Test Type 105 provides a 9 Seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 16 dB 1 Second of silence a 9 Seconds of 404 Hz tone at 16 dB 1 Second of silence a 9 Seconds of 2804 Hz ton
138. Enterprise Communications Server ECS Release 6 Most of these documents are backward compatible with and can be used with the DEFINITY ECS Release 5 systems To order these or other DEFINITY documents contact the Publications Center at the address and phone number on the back of the title page of this document A complete catalog of Business Communications Systems BCS documents including previous issues of the documents listed here is available on the World Wide Web Ask your account team for the web address Basic DEFINITY ECS Documents These documents are issued for all new and upgrade DEFINITY ECS Release 6 systems Administration DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Overview Issue 5 555 230 024 Provides a detailed overview of the ECS including descriptions of many of the major features applications hardware system capabilities and the support provided with the system This document is available in the following languages English German DE Dutch NL Brazilian Portuguese PTB European French FR Latin Spanish SPL Italian IT Russian RU and Japanese JA To order append the language suffix to the document number for example 555 230 894DE for German No suffix is needed for the English version DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 E References Basic DEFINITY ECS Documents Page E 2 DEFINITY ECS Release 6 2 Cha
139. Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Station Wiring Design Page 2 32 crdf356 CJL 101296 Figure Notes 1 356A Adapter 2 4 Pair Modular Jacks 6 pins each connected to 25 pair ribbon connector Figure 2 18 356A Adapter Use the ZD8AJ adapter to connect a Multi button Electronic Telephone MET line cord to an information outlet The adapter interchanges pairs 3 and 4 to correspond with the pair assignments for the telephone The line cord plugs into the adapter and then the adapter plugs into an information outlet Adapter Ordering Information Description Comcode 258A Adapter 102605136 BR2580A Adapter 403384720 356A Adapter 104158829 400B Adapter 103848859 400B2 Adapter 104152558 ZD8AJ Adapter 103881421 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room Page 2 33 Satellite Locations Satellite locations are closets that provide an administration point using cross connect equipment for station cables and where adjunct power may be applied The station cable circuits from the equipment room MDF are 3 pair At the satellite location 4 pair circuits run to the information outlets The hardware used
140. FER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO This restores the system to the normal mode DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add PRI Over PACCON to R6si Page 5 127 Enter Added Translations 1 Log in as craft For a system where ISDN PRI interfaces were previously controlled by a TN765 PI circuit pack preliminary administration must first remove any a Existing Pl controlled ISDN PRI links a TN767C DS1 Interface circuit packs used to provide D channel signaling for ISDN PRI links The preliminary administration includes 2 Remove the existing Pl controlled ISDN PRI link translations busyout link lt n gt For each PRI link assigned change trunk lt nn gt To not reference the signaling groups associated with each trunk s B channel remove signaling group lt nn gt For each signaling group assigned change communications link To set the Enable field to n for each link of type ISDN change communications processor channel To clear all fields for each processor channel of type ISDN change communications link To vacate all fields for each link of type ISDN 3 For each TN767C previously used to provide D channel signaling for ISDN PRI remove its existing DS1 translations and reassign circuit pack as a TN464 Assign ISDN PRI and PRI O
141. H 1 Figure 1 3 shows a typical optional small battery holdover assembly These assemblies may ship with the battery leads disconnected to prevent the batteries from discharging 1 Plug the battery connector into the 48 VDC Batteries connector on the rear of the J58890CH 1 Power Distribution Unit connector psdfbatb RPY 061797 Figure 1 3 Typical Small Battery Assembly A CAUTION Power is present in the cabinet even if the AC power cable is unplugged Turn off the main circuit breaker on the front of the power distribution unit when procedures require ALL power to be removed from the cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect AC Power and Ground Page 1 13 Y AV pedf010 KLC 010797 Figure Notes 1 Connect small battery holdover cable or 7 1 0 AWG 50 mm 50 feet temperature sensor cable from large battery 15 2 m cable to large cabinet to J20 battery cabinet For 2 Carrier Circuit Breakers Gables greater than 50 feet 15 2 m contact your 3 Ground Terminal Block Lucent Technologies 4 Connect large battery holdover cable here fepleseiitaive 5 48 VDC Return 1 0 AWG 50 mm2 cable amp Ground Terminal Block 6 48 VDC 1 0 AWG 50 mm2 cable Se OAC Ipad tenter oF approved single point ground block Figure 1 4 Power Distribution Unit J58890CH
142. ISDN BRI 2 wire U Interface Table 5 27 TN2198 ISDN BRI 2 Wire U Interface Pinout Cross Connect Amphenol Port Signal Pin Color Pin Backplane Pin 1 T 1 1 W BL 26 102 R 1 2 BL W 01 002 2 T 2 3 W O 27 103 R 2 4 O W 02 003 3 T 3 5 W G 28 104 R 3 6 G W 03 004 4 T 4 7 W BR 29 105 R 4 8 BR W 04 005 5 T 5 9 W SL 30 106 R 5 10 SL W 05 006 6 T 6 11 R BL 31 107 R 6 12 BL R 06 007 7 T 7 13 R O 32 108 R 7 14 O R 07 008 8 T 8 15 R G 33 109 R 8 16 G R 08 009 9 T 9 17 R BR 34 110 R 9 18 BR R 09 010 10 T 10 19 R SL 35 111 R 10 20 SL R 10 011 11 T 11 21 BK BL 36 112 R 11 22 BL BK 11 012 12 T 12 23 BK O 37 113 R 12 24 O BK 12 013 Pins 25 and 50 are grounded by the backplane DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Connector and Cable Diagrams Pinout Charts Page 5 147 Table 5 28 Port Circuit Pack Lead Designations TN742 B TN747B TN753 T N760 B TN746 B Cross TN769 TN760C TN763 TN2183 Connect T N2147 TN754 TN760D TN763B TN767B TN793 Pin TN465 TN726 TN2209 N762 B TN763C TN735 TN464E TN2793 TN2224 1 TA TA TA TA TA C5 T 14 TA 2 R1 R 1 R 1 R 1 R 1 R1 RA 3 TXT 1 T11 TXT 1 SZ 1 BT C_ENAB T 2 T 2 4 TXR1 R11 TXR 1 SZ1 1 BR 1 R 2 R 2 5 PXT 1 E1 PXT 1 S 1 LT 1 C_SYNC T 3 T 3 6 PXR 1 M1 PXR 1 S1 1 LR 1 R 3 R 3 7 T 2 T 2
143. In a PBX all port circuits are connected to the TDM bus permitting any port to send a signal to any other port time division multiplexing TDM Multiplexing that divides a transmission channel into successive time slots See also time interval The period of time either one hour or one half hour that BCMS measurements are collected for a reports time slice See time interval time slot 64 kbps of digital information structured as eight bits every 125 microseconds In the switch a time slot refers to either a DSO on a T1 or E1 facility or a 64 kops unit on the TDM bus or fiber connection between port networks time slot sequence integrity The situation whereby the N octets of a wideband call that are transmitted in one T1 or E1 frame arrive at the output in the same order that they were introduced to control An application can invoke Third Party Call Control capabilities using either an adjunct control or domain control association to monitor An application can receive event reports on an active notification adjunct control or domain control association TOD Time of day tone ringer A device with a speaker used in electronic voice terminals to alert the user TOP Task oriented protocol trunk A dedicated telecommunications channel between two communications systems or COs DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and
144. L Y LIC 42 Y O LOC 17 O Y LOC 43 Y G CARESET 18 G Y CBRESET 44 Y BR LIB 19 BR Y LIB 45 Y SL LOB 20 SL Y LOB 46 V BL C2DADATA 21 BL V C2DBDATA 47 V O LIA 22 O V LIA 48 V G LOA 23 G V LOA 49 V BR CAPRES 24 BR V CBPRES 50 V SL GRD 25 SL V GRD Denotes an active low signal DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Connector and Cable Diagrams Pinout Charts Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 151 Table 5 32 TN793 24 Port Analog Line Lead Designations Pin Color Designation Pin Color Designation 26 W BL 01 BL W 27 W O 02 O W 28 W G 03 G W 29 W BR 04 BR W 30 W SL 05 SL W 31 R BL 06 BL R 32 R O 07 O R 33 R G 08 G R 34 R BR 09 BR R 35 R SL 10 SL R 36 BK BL 11 BL BK 37 BK O 12 O BK 38 BK G 13 G BK 39 BK BR 14 BR BK 40 BK SL 15 SL BK 41 Y BL 16 BL Y 42 Y O 17 O Y 43 Y G 18 G Y 44 Y BR 19 BR Y 45 Y SL 20 SL Y 46 V BL 21 BL V 47 V O 22 O V 48 V G 23 G V 49 V BR 24 BR V 50 V SL 25 SL V Issue 5 May 1998 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Connector and Cable Diagrams Pinout Charts 5 Page 5 152 uoyd d1u0199e UOPNqGHINW SueewW LAW Ee Buyeiq Psemino pemu poaq SuUeeW qola zZ Buryeiq pemu 4221
145. LOD GRDE 14 LOD 14 LOD ee ea 13 LID 13 LID GRDE GRDE 28 38 LID 38 LID GRDE XMT DAT TA 1975bb2 MMR 061396 Figure D 3 Sample Cross Connects DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 D Connector and Cable Diagrams Page D 5 FS 10 H600 348 cable FS 11 H600 347 cable 50 pin Amphenol 15 pin D sub packet gateway interface cable connector TN1654 DS1 interface to a CSU Connector 01 Amphenol 95 5in D sub Amphenol 95 pin D sub connector connectors connector connectors to TN577 to TN577 alo N 15 15 P FS 12 Amphenol connector Amphenol connector to TN1654 to TN570 or TN573 GRDE RCV_DAT GRDE es ee cd r ee a s l Ekel e S Ekel z S Ehl e S Eme e Eme a E s Eae s l EM No connection No connection No connection No connection virvinjinjinjirnjelefl l l gt aAlKLAaTS S ola rfoala Pass thru to Amphenol connector to H600 348 or to cross connect r975bb3 MMR 051096 Figure D 4 Sample Cable Pinouts DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 D Connector and Cable Diagrams FS 13 600 307 cable 50 pin Amphenol connector to TN767 1TN722 TN464 FS 15 Clock STRATUM 3 clock interface PPN control carrier a o ALRMS5A _ ALRM5B NO IN IN Pd Po N A o 20 EXT
146. Line PX private branch exchange transmitTTip A TX Terminal transmit R Ring B DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Three Pair and Four Pair Modularity Page 5 13 Three Pair and Four Pair Modularity Figure 5 8 shows 3 pair and 4 pair modularity from the port circuit pack to the terminal pins at the information outlet modular jack Most terminals connect to an information outlet installed at the work location Make the connections from the port circuit pack to the modular jacks Then plug the terminal into the modular jack r 26 1 1 i 1 2 2 2 i 2 27 3 3 3 3 2 4 4 4 4 28 5 5 5 S 3 6 6 6 6 E 7 7 8 8 8J widf3pm PDH 011397 Figure Notes 1 Port Circuit Pack 4 Input to Information Outlet 4 Pair 2 System Cabinet Connector Pins Modularity 3 Pair Modularity 5 Adjunct Power 3 Main Distribution Frame MDF Pins 6 Output From Information Outlet 3 Pair Modularity 4 Pair Modularity 7 Voice Terminal Figure 5 8 3 Pair and 4 Pair Modularity DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Adjunct Power Connections Page 5 14 Adjunct Power Connections Figure 5
147. Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Comcode 108215526 Issue 5 May 1998 Copyright 1998 Lucent Technologies All Rights Reserved Printed in U S A Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Your Responsibility for Your System s Security Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party for example persons other than your com pany s employees agents subcontractors or persons working on your company s behalf Note that there may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your telecommunications system and if toll fraud occurs it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services You and your system manager are responsible for the security of your system such as programming and configuring your equipment to pre vent unauthorized use The system manager is also responsible for reading all installation instruction and system administration docu ments provided with this product in order to fully understand the fea tures that can introduce risk of toll fraud and the steps that can be taken to reduce that risk Lucent Technologies does not warrant that this product is immune from or will prevent unau
148. MENTS Total Administered Members 2 Port Code Sfx Name 1 0100401 TN429 Cc 2 0100402 TN429 az 4 5 G Ta 8 ce 10 Ts 12 13 na w Screen 5 3 Group Member Assignments form page 5 9 On the Group Member Assignments screen in the Port field add the trunk members and press Enter when finished 10 At the prompt type change feature access code and press Enter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment CAMA E911 Installation Page 5 137 a Page 1 of 5 FEATURE ACCESS CODE FAC Abbreviated Dialing List1l Access Code Abbreviated Dialing List2 Access Code Abbreviated Dialing List3 Access Code Abbreviated Dial Prgm Group List Access Code Announcement Access Code Answer Back Access Code Auto Alternate Routing AAR Access Code Auto Route Selection ARS Access Code 1 9 Access Code 2 Automatic Callback Activation Deactivation Call Forwarding Activation Busy DA All Deactivation Call Park Access Code Call Pickup Access Code CAS Remote Hold Answer Hold Unhold Access Code CDR Account Code Access Code Change Coverage Data Origination Access Code Data Privacy Access Code Directed Call Pickup Access Code Emergency Access To Attendant Access Code Extended Call Fwd Activate Busy D A __ All ___ Deactivation _ Facility Test
149. N cabinet if provided 1 Unpack the cabinets as outlined on the previous page 2 Remove the lower rear panel from the Auxiliary cabinet Install the lower rear panel when the installation is completed Unpack and Inspect Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet 1 Check the status of the SHOCKWATCH and or TILTWATCH indicators on the cardboard container If the container has been jarred or tilted beyond specifications the indicators are red indicating possible damage 2 Remove all packing material 3 Remove front door and rear screw on panels from the cabinet 4 Inspect the cabinet for damage Report any damage per local instructions Check Customer s Order 1 Check the customer s order and the shipping packing lists to confirm all equipment is present If any equipment is missing report the information to your Lucent Technologies representative 2 Ensure all circuit packs are fully inserted into the proper slots according to the Customer Service Document CSD Report any discrepancies in circuit pack type or quantity to your Lucent Technologies representative 3 Check the system adjuncts for damage and report all damage according to local shipping instructions Correcting Shipping Errors 1 Red tag all defective equipment and over shipped equipment and return per the nearest Material Stocking Location MSL instructions For international customers contact your order service agent 2 Direct all short shipped reports to the ne
150. N wire to the DISCH GRD bar DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Fiber Optic Interconnect Cabling Page 1 29 Fiber Optic Interconnect Cabling Signals between the cabinets are carried by fiber optic cables Lightwave transceivers provide the required fiber optic interface The fiber optic cables from the DEFINITY System route to a Lightguide Interconnect Unit LIU or fiber optic shelf Refer to Appendix A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Refer to this information for fiber optic equipment comcode numbers connecting to LIUs or shelves and routing through lightguide equipment Use multi mode fiber transceivers and multi mode fiber optic cables between cabinets unless single mode fiber is required distance restrictions Use metallic cables between carriers A caution The DEFINITY ECS may contain a Class 1 LASER device if single mode fiber optic cable is connected to a remote Expansion Port Network EPN The LASER device operates within the following parameters a Maximum Power Output 5 dBm a Wavelength 1310 nm a Mode Field Diameter 8 8 microns CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT IEC 825 1993 A CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for more informat
151. NITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Single Carrier Cabinets 555 230 894 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description 555 230 522 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Upgrades and Additions for R6vs si 555 230 120 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Upgrades and Additions for R6r 555 230 121 Switch Administration for DEFINITY AUDIX 585 300 509 How to Order Books In addition to this book other description installation and test maintenance and administration books are available A complete list of DEFINITY books is provided in the Business Communications System Publications Catalog 555 000 010 This book and any other DEFINITY books can be ordered directly from the Lucent Technologies Business Communications System Publications Fulfillment Center at 1 317 322 6791 or toll free at 1 800 457 1235 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 About This Book Trademarks Page xi Trademarks This document contains references to the following Lucent Technologies trademarked products ACCUNET AUDIX Callmaster CallVisor CONVERSANT DEFINITY FORUM LGX MEGACOM SYSTIMAX TRANSTALK The following products are trademarked by their appropriate vendor Audichron is a regi
152. OFF 85 CLEAR TO SEND CTS 02 OFF 91 OVER RUN 02 256 92 DATA BIT 02 8 93 PROTOCOL 03 XON XOFF 94 STOP BIT 01 1 95 PARITY 01 NONE 96 PBS 01 9600 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 B Option Switch Settings TN760D Tie Trunk Option Settings Page B 10 TN760D Tie Trunk Option Settings The TN760D Tie Trunk circuit pack interfaces between four tie trunks and the TDM bus Two tip and ring pairs form a 4 wire analog transmission line An E and M pair are DC signaling leads used for call setup The E lead receives signals from the tie trunk and the M lead transmits signals to the tie trunk To choose the preferred signaling format Table B 5 and Table B 6 set the switches on the TN760D and administer the port using Figure B 2 and Table B 7 Table B 5 Signaling Formats for TN760D Mode Type E amp M Type Standard unprotected E amp M Type Compatible unprotected Protected Type Compatible Type Standard Simplex Type V E amp M Type V E amp M Type V Revised Table B 6 Signaling Type Summary Signaling Type Transmit M Lead Receive E Lead On Hook Off Hook On Hook Off Hook Type Standard ground battery open battery ground Type Compatible open battery ground ground open battery Type V open battery ground open ground Type V Reversed ground open ground open
153. PBX Trunk Circuit 1 1 BL W RTC1 Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 1 27 W O TTK1 Tip CO Trunk Circuit 1 2 O W RTK1 Ring CO Trunk Circuit 1 28 W G TLC1 Tip PBX Line Port 1 3 G W RLC1 Ring PBX Line Port 1 29 W BR TST1 Tip Emergency Terminal 1 4 BR W RST1 Ring Emergency Terminal 1 30 W S TTC2 Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 2 5 S W RTC2 Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 2 31 R BL TTK2 Tip CO Trunk Circuit 2 6 BL R RTK2 Ring CO Trunk Circuit 2 32 R O TLC2 Tip PBX Line Port 2 7 O R RLC2 Ring PBX Line Port 2 33 R G TST2 Tip Emergency Terminal 2 8 G R RST2 Ring Emergency Terminal 2 34 R BR TTC3 Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 3 9 BR R RTC3 Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 3 35 R S TTK3 Tip CO Trunk Circuit 3 10 S R RTK3 Ring CO Line Port 3 36 BK BL TLC3 Tip PBX Line Port 3 11 BL BK RLC3 Ring PBX Line Port 3 37 BK O TST3 Tip Emergency Terminal 3 12 O BK RST3 Ring Emergency Terminal 3 38 BK G TTC4 Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 4 13 G BK RTC4 Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 4 39 BK BR_ TTK4 Tip CO Trunk Circuit 4 14 BR BK RTK4 Ring CO Trunk Circuit 4 40 BK S TLC4 Tip PBX Line Port 4 15 S BK RLC4 Ring PBX Line Port 4 Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Emergency Transfer Units and Associated Telephones Page 5 40 Table 5 14 Pin Assignments for 25 Pair Connector Continued
154. Pack LEDs Eleven LEDs provide an indication of the state of the TN1654 DS1 Converter circuit pack and the T1 E1 facilities The top group has the standard red green and yellow LEDs The red LED indicates an alarm condition and the green LED indicates testing in progress The 4 SPAN LEDs indicate the status of the T1 E1 facilities The four STATUS LEDs are currently unused and remain off The yellow LED is used to indicate the state of the fiber interface the fiber channel the control channel and the communications link to the SPE in the following manner and order of priority See Table 4 2 Table 4 2 DS1 Converter Yellow LED Flashing States LED on LED off Condition 0 1 0 1 Fiber out of frame or fiber loss of signal second second 0 5 0 5 In frame fiber channel down The fiber channel communicating second second between the DS1 Converter and the other fiber endpoint El or SNI is down 1 1 In frame control channel down The control channel between the second second 2 DS1 Converters in the DS1 Converter complex is down 2 0 2 No response from SPE The SPE is not acknowledging seconds second messages from the DS1 Converter or the communications link to the SPE is down solid on DS1 Converter active This is the normal state for an active DS1 Converter solid off DS1 Converter standby This is the normal state for a standby DS1 Converter in critical reliability systems duplicated PNC SPAN LEDs The 4 SP
155. Pin Color Designation Connector Description 41 Y BL TST4 Tip Emergency Terminal 4 16 BL Y RST5 Ring Emergency Terminal 4 42 Y O TTC5 Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 5 17 O Y RTC5 Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 5 43 Y G TTK5 Tip CO Trunk Circuit 5 18 G Y RTK5 Ring CO Trunk Circuit 5 44 Y BR TLC5 Tip PBX Line Port 5 19 BR Y RLC5 Ring PBX Line Port 5 45 Y S TST5 Tip Emergency Terminal 5 20 S Y RST5 Ring Emergency Terminal 5 46 V BL COM1 Common 1 Relay Contact 21 BL V NO1 Normally Open 1 Contact 47 V O NC2 Normally Closed 2 Contact 22 O V NC1 Normally Closed 1 Contact 48 V G COM2 Common 2 Relay Contact 23 G V NO2 Normally Open 2 Contact 49 V BR 24 BR V 50 V S GRD Ground From PBX 25 S V 48PX 48V from Alm Panel 10 On the trunk identification label at the bottom of the panel record the trunk line extension and location for each circuit 11 Attach a label identifying each voice terminal designated as an emergency terminal The labels are provided with the unit 12 Check the system for normal operation Set the test switch switch 12 to NORMAL OPERATION Ensure the power supply is providing 48 VDC at 80 mA maximum The power LED should be ON Verify there is dial tone on all emergency transfer sets If all of the above conditions are not met replace the panel DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephone
156. RG E E E E E TERETE ET eh oo 6ZNL Boyeuy Hod pZ TAEA CIEE E e ean EEO eo BOE et e ee BO a ee eea EsSNL Jed HOd ZH Et EE Ie RI EI I RE EH IE Ie I EI M EDT E ES EOS PS ES ES ES LET Aa etd Eta Ee Ee Eo Eo Eo Ee en PR EDREDREAZREDREDRED SEED 8 Y e oome BEPESTAETSTASLASTALSSASSASSE ve wre PRED REDZRETREDREDR EDT EE 2 OE Ae TEZREZRETZREEAR EDR ED 8 OE See BuleuBis W83 OE es es ee LET eee Punch downs for Common Circuit Packs BEERSETAESTASITASSE wo wows PEER EUET EEE I th E S E BREE BREE EEEE st ZL OL GL bL EL ZL LL OL 6 Figure 5 1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Page 5 3 Telephone Connection Example The 302C Attendant Console is used as an example telephone connection This is typical of the 603E 84xx 4 wire and 94xx telephones The maximum cabling distance for a console powered from the cabinet is 350 feet 100 meters using 24 AWG 5 0 26 mm wire The general steps to connect a telephone are 1 Choose a device to connect such as a 302C Attendant Console 2 Choose the port circuit pack its carrier slot number and port such as TN754B cabinet 1 ca
157. SYNOR EXTSYNOT 15 pin D sub FS 16 TERMINAL PPN amp EPN terminal connections Pin number Lead designation RD RTS CTS ai DSR 17 EXTSYNIT EXTSYN1IR ALRM1A _ ALRM1B 3 4 5 6 7 8 SGRD fo clolololololojo a ajajajajaja DIJK a 1100 16 Jo v Joo JA janjo MININ IN w w w AJA AIAJAJSJAJA JAJA O IN OO 1 JO PM JO H T N 0 1M 0 B OID N 0 o ete 14 15 16 17 FS 14 846448652 Amphenol connection to TN1654 Amphenol connection to fiber transceiver Ql ld wj O we iw Cc IDIDIOD O AlJaIO Of JOOS 155 55 50 S 50 gt ojojo 0 26 29 5 30 6 re 22 47 20 45 41 14 39 13 38 _ 38_ LID Issue 5 May 1998 Page D 6 Pass thru to Amphenol connection to H600 348 or to cross connect r975bb4 MMR 061396 Figure D 5 Sample Pinouts DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 D Connector and Cable Diagrams Page D 7 FS 17 H600 210 cable FS 18 H600 362 cable 25 pin D sub 37 pin D sub 25 pin D sub 37 pin D sub 3 15 2 4 17 5 18 6 20 8 22 24 7 21 Strapped wire leads 21 Strapped wire leads FS 19 ED1E434 11 G175 25 pin D sub 37 pin D sub Resistor Strapped wire leads r975b
158. Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add ISDN BRI Page 5 123 Resolve Alarms 1 Examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6r Contact INADS to Enable Customer Options and Verify Alarm Origination 1 Be sure the system is part of the existing INADS database by calling the INADS Database Administrator at the Technical Service Center TSC Verify that INADS can dial into the system and that the system can dial out to INADS As part of the system registration process the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination and enables customer options A caution If you do not enable Alarm Origination when the customer has purchased a services contract the system cannot report any alarm to the TSC automatically causing the TSC to be unable to fulfill the services contract Save Translations 1 If the system is high or critical reliability enter status system 1 and press Enter to verify that the system is in the active standby mode 2 Enter save translation and press Enter This instructs the system to take all translation information in memory and write it to the translation card or tape 3 If the system contains a TN750 B Announ
159. Since if the packet bus is being added the addition of CallVisor ASAI requires a service interruption notify the customer in advance as to when the addition will be carried out Disable Alarm Origination 1 Enter change system parameters maintenance and press Enter 2 Setthe Alarm Origination Activated field to n A CAUTION If you do not disable Alarm Origination the system may generate alarms resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets 3 For some releases of software disable Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification before submitting the form Enter Added Translations 1 On the System Parameters Customer Options form be certain that the Calling Party Number Billing Number CPN BN option is disabled and enable the CallVisor ASAI Interface option Either CallVisor ASAI or CPN BN can be enabled on the switch but not both 2 Also enable the Packet Bus Activated option on the System Parameters Maintenance form 3 See DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description for details on disabling and enabling options on these forms DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add CallVisor ASAI Page 5 118 Save Translations ils If the system is high or critical reliability enter status system 1 and press Enter to verify that the
160. Sneak current protectors with a rating of 350 mA at 600 Volts must be UL listed for domestic installation and CSA certified for Canadian installation The 507B includes 52 sneak fuses and 2 cables and can be ordered using PEC code 63210 The SCP 110 protectors are used with 110 type hardware and on the 507B Sneak Fuse Panel The SCP 110 Protectors can be ordered separately and installed on the 157B connecting block Fifty protectors are required per block DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Install Sneak Fuse Panels Page 2 14 Q e a Sneak Current Protector 507B sneak CJL 032096 Figure Notes 1 Sneak Fuse Panel 3 25 Pair Female Connector Out 2 25 Pair Male Connector In 4 220029 Fuses Inside Panel Use Small Screwdriver to Pry Top Cover Off Figure 2 7 Model 507B Sneak Fuse Panel 1 Locate the 507B near the network interface or the MDF 2 Hold the panel against the mounting surface and mark the mounting screw locations Drill pilot holes at the marked locations and partially install a locally obtained 12 x 3 4 inch screw into the 2 bottom mounting slots 3 Slide the sneak fuse panel onto the mounting screws and tighten the screws securely 4 Install a locally obtained 12 x 3 4 inch screw into the top 2 mounting slots and tighten
161. T 2 T 2 T 2 C2D DATA T 4 T 4 8 R 2 R 2 R 2 R 2 R 2 RDATA R 4 R 4 9 TXT 2 T1 2 TXT 2 SZ 2 BT 2 TDATA T 5 10 TXR 2 R1 2 TXR 2 SZ1 2 BR 2 TRSYSNC R 5 11 PXT 2 E2 PXT 2 S 2 LT 2 GRD T 6 12 PXR 2 M 2 PXR 2 1 2 LR 2 SCLK R 6 13 T 3 T 3 T 3 T 3 T 3 T 7 14 R 3 R 3 R 3 R 3 R 3 R 7 15 TXT 3 T1 3 TXT 3 SZ 3 BT 3 T 8 16 TXR 3 R1 3 TXR 3 SZ1 3 BR3 PAHER R 8 17 PXT 3 E3 PXT 3 8 3 LT 3 T 5 T 9 18 PXR 3 M 3 PXR 3 S1 3 LR 3 C_48V R 5 R 9 19 T 4 T 4 T 4 T 4 T 4 T 6 T 10 20 R 4 R 4 R 4 R4 R 4 R 6 R 10 21 TXT 4 T1 4 TXT 4 SZ 4 BT 4 C_P2SCLK T 7 T 11 22 TXR 4 R14 TXR 4 SZ1 4 BR 4 LI RX R 7 R 11 23 PXT 4 E4 PXT 4 S 4 LT 4 LO TX T 8 T 12 24 PXR 4 M 4 PX4 4 S1 4 LR 4 LBACK1 R 8 R 12 25 T 5 T 5 T 5 T 5 T 5 GND T 9 T 13 26 R 5 R 5 R 5 R 5 R 5 C_5V R 9 R 13 27 TXT 5 T1 5 TXT 5 SZ 5 BT 5 T 10 T 14 28 TXR5 R1 5 TXR 5 SZ1 5 BR 5 R 10 R14 29 PXT 5 E5 PXT 5 5 LT 5 T 11 T 15 30 PXR 5 M 5 PXR 5 S1 5 LR 5 C_RST R 11 R 15 31 T 6 T 6 T 6 T 6 T 6 T 12 T 16 32 R 6 R 6 R 6 R 6 R 6 R 12 R 16 33 TXT 6 11 6 TXT 6 SZ 6 BT 6 RDATA T 17 34 TXR 6 R1 6 TXR 6 SZ1 6 BR 6 TDATA R 17 35 PXT 6 E 6 PXT 6 S 6 LT 6 TRSYNC T 18 36 PXR 6 M 6 PXR 6 S1 6 LR 6 GRD R 18 37 T 7 T 7 T 7 T 7 T 7 SCLK T19 38 R 7 R 7 R 7 R 7 R 7 R 19 39 TXT 7 11 7 TXT 7 SZ 7 BT 7 T 20 Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May
162. TY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description 4 After the system is administered the telephones and other equipment are tested See Chapter 6 Test Telephones and Other Equipment The Alarm Origination feature is then activated and tested Logoff the System Log off the system to prevent unauthorized changes to data To log off 1 Enter logoff at the Command prompt 2 The login prompt appears on the screen DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures Page 3 32 DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures Power Down the AUDIX System A yellow caution sticker on the system s power unit notifies technicians to shut down the DEFINITY AUDIX System prior to powering down the system 1 2 Log into the AUDIX System as craft Enter the reset system shutdown command Press Enter once gt NOTE Do not press Enter again This will force the AUDIX to shutdown immediately dropping all active calls on the AUDIX The SHUTDOWN Completed message appears when the AUDIX is successfully shutdown This takes about 2 minutes The AUDIX System can now be removed for service Power Up the AUDIX System If the AUDIX was removed from the cabinet 1 Re install the AUDIX and allow it to boot up automatically 2 Check f
163. TY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 15 CSU Channel service unit CTS Clear to Send CWC Seejcall work code D DAC 1 Dial access code or Direct Agent Calling 2 See digital to analog converter DAC data channel A communications path between two points used to transmit digital signals data communications equipment DCE The equipment usually a modem data module or packet assembler disassembler on the network side of a communications link that makes the binary serial data from the source or transmitter compatible with the communications channel data link The configuration of physical facilities enabling end terminals to communicate directly with each other data module An interconnection device between a BRI or DCP interface of the switch and data terminal equipment or data communications equipment data path The end to end connection used for a data communications link A data path is the combination of all elements of an interprocessor communication in a DCS data port A point of access to a computer that uses trunks or lines for transmitting or receiving data data rate See bit rate data service unit DSU A device that transmits digital data on transmission facilities data terminal An input output I O device that has either switched or direct access to a host computer o
164. Telephones and Other Equipment Add External Modem to TN1648B Page 5 103 prda0009 RPY 021698 Figure 5 50 Insert the Pass thru Tool DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add External Modem to TN1648B Page 5 104 prda0006 RPY 021298 Figure 5 51 Replace the Fan Cover DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add External Modem to TN1648B Page 5 105 10 Connect the cable to the front of the TN1648B circuit pack as shown in Figure 5 52 gt NOTE Dress the cable straight down the front of the circuit pack Do not allow the cable to cross in front of another circuit pack prda0007 RPY 021698 Figure 5 52 Connect the Cable to the Circuit Pack 11 Close the front door 12 Discard the pass thru tool Test the Installation 1 Login to the management terminal 2 Administer the system by referring to the Installation and Test for Adjuncts and Peripherals 555 230 125 3 Enter list config
165. Test modes The hardware group tests are described in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6r or DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs si gt NOTE This test takes several hours It may be best to run the test in the background or at night or both Resolve Alarms After the test has completed inspect the alarms log Type display alarms and resolve the alarms in the usual manner Check the error log for evidence of failure The only failure results logged should be the outcome of tests requiring a connected station where a station is not connected to the port under test Repair all other failures or refer them to a maintenance technician for repair Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6r DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 6 Test Telephones and Other Equipment Activate and Test Alarm Origination Feature Page 6 9 Activate and Test Alarm Origination Feature 1 Activate the Alarm Origination feature from the change system parameter maintenance form 2 Run test inads link to verify the system can reach the INADS Database Administrator at the Technical Service Center TSC 3 Be sure the system is part of the existing INADS database by calling the INADS Database Administrator to verify the sys
166. Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add the Fiber Optic Cable Page 5 84 a Q Icda4fop RPY 021398 Figure 5 40 Dress the Cable 15 Ifa circuit pack was removed to access 2 open slots from Preparation on page 5 72 replace the circuit pack into its original slot 16 Close the front door 17 Discard the pass thru tool Test the Installation 1 Login to the management terminal 2 Administer the system by referring to the ATM section of the nstallation and Test for Adjuncts and Peripherals 555 230 125 3 Enter list configuration all to determine if the new circuit pack appears in the correct slot and that there are no circuit pack conflicts DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add CO FX WATS and PCOL Page 5 85 Add CO FX WATS and PCOL Requirements Each Central Office CO Foreign Exchange FX Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS or Personal Central Office Line PCOL trunk is connected to 1 port of either an 8 port TN747 or to 1 of an assortment of non United States CO Trunk circuit packs Installation T 3 Determine the port assignment of
167. a Single Announcement from 1 Announcement Circuit Pack to Another Ans Execute the change announcements command to change the circuit pack locations of a particular announcement You may also change the compression rate at this time Rerecord the announcement as described in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add ISDN PRI Page 5 110 Add ISDN PRI North American Use a TN767C D E DS1 or a TN464C DS1 E1 circuit pack for the assignment of a signaling link and up to 23 ISDN PRI Trunk Group members A TN768 TN780 or TN2182 Tone Clock circuit pack is required to provide synchronization for the DS1 circuit pack A TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack is required for use with the TN767C DS1 circuit pack when PRI is activated As an option to the TN768 or TN2182 Tone Clock a TN780 Tone Clock circuit pack installed in the PPN can interface external Stratum 3 synchronization for DS1 connections European A TN464C DS1 E1 circuit pack is required for the assignment of the 2 signaling channels and up to 30 ISDN PRI Trunk Group members Each E1 span provides 32 ports Except for North American private network applications a TN780 TN2182 or TN419B Tone Clock circuit pack normally provi
168. a trunk not administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B P PACCON Packet control packet A group of bits including a message element which is the data and a control information element IE which is the header used in packet switching and transmitted as a discrete unit In each DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 38 packet the message element and control IE are arranged in a specified format See also packet bus and packet switching packet bus A wide bandwidth bus that transmits packets packet switching A data transmission technique whereby user information is segmented and routed in discrete data envelopes called packets each with its own appended control information for routing sequencing and error checking Packet switching allows a channel to be occupied only during the transmission of a packet On completion of the transmission the channel is made available for the transfer of other packets See also BX 25fand PAD Packet assembly disassembly paging trunk A telecommunications channel used to access an amplifier for loudspeaker paging party extension active on call A party is on the call if he or she is actually connected to the call in active talk or in held state An originator of a call is always a party on the call Alerting parties busy parties and tones are
169. abilities One or more applications can reside on a single adjunct However the switch cannot distinguish among several applications residing on the same adjunct and treats the adjunct and all resident applications as a single application The terms application and adjunct are used interchangeably throughout this document applications processor A micro computer based program controlled computer providing application services for the DEFINITY switch The processor is used with several user controlled applications such as traffic analysis and electronic documentation application service element See capability group architecture The organizational structure of a system including hardware and software ARS See Automatic Route Selection ARS ASAI See Adjunct Switch Application Interface ASAI ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange The standard code for representing characters in digital form Each character is represented by an 8 bit code including parity bit association A communication channel between adjunct and switch for messaging purposes An active association is one that applies to an existing call on the switch or to an extension on the call asynchronous data transmission A method of transmitting data in which each character is preceded by a start bit and followed by a stop bit thus permitting data characters to be transmitted at irregular intervals This type transmission is advantageous when t
170. ability system A system having the following two control carriers duplicate expansion interface El circuit packs in the PPN in R5r with CSS and duplicate switch node clock circuit packs in the switch node SN carriers See also and HNPA See home numbering plan area code HNPA holding time The total length of time in minutes and seconds that a facility is used during a call home numbering plan area code HNPA The local area code The area code does not have to be dialed to call numbers within the local geographical area hop Nondirect communication between two switch communications interfaces SCI where the SCI message passes automatically without intermediate processing through one or more intermediate SCls host computer A computer connected to a network that processes data from data entry devices hunt group A group of extensions that are assigned the Station Hunting feature so that a call to a busy extension reroutes to an idle extension in the group See also ACD work mode Hz See hertz Hz I1 The first information channel of DCP DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 26 I2 The second information channel of DCP I2 Interface A proprietary interface used for the DEFINITY Wireless Business System for the radio controller circuit packs Each interface provides comm
171. aled to transmit information to be processed by the computer equipment enhanced private switched communications service EPSCS An analog private telecommunications network based on the No 5 crossbar and 1A ESS that provides advanced voice and data telecommunications services to companies with many locations EPN Expansion port network EPROM Erasable programmable read only memory EPSCS Enhanced Private Switched Communications Services ERL Echo return loss Erlang A unit of traffic intensity or load used to express the amount of traffic needed to keep one facility busy for one hour One Erlang is equal to 36 CCS See also CCS or hundred call seconds ESF Extended superframe format ESPA European Standard Paging Access ETA Extended Trunk Access also Enhanced Terminal Administration DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 22 ETN Electronic tandem network ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute expansion archangel EAA A network control microprocessor located on an expansion interface El port circuit pack in an expansion port network The EA provides an interface between the EPN and its controlling switch processing element expansion archangel link EAL A link access function on the D channel LAPD logical link that exists between a switch processing element and an expan
172. all An incoming call in which the caller hangs up before the call is answered Abbreviated Dialing AD A feature that allows callers to place calls by dialing just one or two digits AC 1 Alternating current 2 See Administered Connection AC AAR Automatic Alternate Routing ACA See Automatic Circuit Assurance ACA ACB See Automatic Callback ACB ACD See Automatic Call Distribution ACD ACD agent See agent ACU See Automatic calling unit ACU ACW See after call work ACW mode access code A 1 2 or 3 digit dial code used to activate or cancel a feature or access an outgoing trunk DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 2 access endpoint Either a nonsignaling channel on a DS1 interface or a nonsignaling port on an analog tie trunk circuit pack that is assigned a unique extension access tie trunk A trunk that connects a main communications system with a tandem communications system in an electronic tandem network ETN An access tie trunk can also be used to connect a system or tandem to a serving office or service node Also called access trunk access trunk See access tie trunk ACCUNET A trademarked name for a family of digital services offered by AT amp T in the United States AC D See Automatic Call Distribution ACD JACD also refers to a work state in wh
173. all Detail Recording CDR B 5 calling queue 5 44 caution safeguarding craft password 3 14 CDR B 5 aa option settings B 8 printer B 5 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Index CDRU for remote connection 3 6 changing E system parameters country options 3 12 system parameters maintenance 3 18 Channel Service Unit o cabling to DS1 Converter 5 27 Smart Jacks 5 27 Channel Service Unit CSU 1 4 China country code 3 13 circuit pack configuration test procedure 4 3 test procedure circuit packs configuration test procedure 4 12 circuit packs adding 5 64 configuration test procedure 4 3 DS1 Converter LEDs 4 15 duplication interface LEDs 4 15 expansion interface El LEDs 4 15 green LEDs 4 14 ISDN wiring 5 12 LEDs 4 14 maintenance test LEDs 4 16 NT1 wiring 5 12 pin designations 5 143 5 153 to 5 155 D 1 red LEDs 4 14 sorted by code 5 65 SYSAM 4 16 T1654 DS1 CONV 5 23 TN2183 Analog Line 5 44 TN2185 ISDN BRI 4 wire S Interface 5 145 TN2198 2 wire U Interface 5 146 TN2198 circuit pack wiring 5 12 TN2224 Digital Line 5 12 5 147 5 152 tone clock LEDs 4 16 yellow LEDs 4 14 clamps cable 2 5 2 13 cleaning a fiber optic cables A 16 CO trunk B 12 wiring example 5 5 CO trunk adding 5 85 5 89 code calling access adding 5 93 commands list config
174. alog Telephone Wiring 1 Choose a peripheral to connect such as an analog station or 2 wire digital station 2 Choose the port circuit pack its carrier slot number and port For example TN2183 Analog Line cabinet 1 carrier C slot 1 port 03 3 Install cross connect jumpers to connect the pins from the analog station or 2 wire digital station to the appropriate pins on the port circuit pack This pinout information is for the TN2183 Analog Line circuit pack 4 Administer on the management terminal See DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description for more details DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Analog Tie Trunk Example Page 5 6 Analog Tie Trunk Example This example shows how to connect analog tie trunk wiring from one DEFINITY System to another DEFINITY System Q T 1 26 lt lt gt gt 29 T 2 R1 1 lt gt gt 4 R2 T1 1 274 lt gt gt 30 T1 2 Rit 2 lt lt gt gt 5 R1 2 E 1 28 lt lt gt gt 31 E 2 M 1 3 lt lt gt gt 6 M2 tie_wire RBP 071796 Figure Notes 1 External Trunk or Adapter 2 TN760 Tie Trunk Circuit Pack Position 1C05 Figure 5 5 Analog Tie Trunk Wiring 1 Set the option switches on the port circuit pack TN760 as described in Appendix B Option
175. amp M Figure 5 41 TN760 Tie Trunk Circuit Packs Component Side Table 5 18 TN760D Option Switch Settings and Administration E amp M SMPLX Prot Unprot Administered Installation Situation Preferred Signaling Format Switch Switch Port Circumstance To System Far End Co Located DEFINITY E amp M Type 1 E amp M Type 1 E amp M Unprotected Type 1 Compatible Standard Compatible Inter Building DEFINITY Protected Protected E amp M Protected Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Compatible Standard Compatible Plus Protection Unit Co Located Net E amp M Type 1 Any PBX E amp M Unprotected Type 1 Integrated Standard DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add DS1 Tie and OPS Page 5 89 Add DS1 Tie and OPS The TN722B DS1 Tie Trunk TN767C DS1 Interface and TN464C DS1 Interface circuit packs provide connections to a 1 544 Mbps or 2 08 Mbps DS1 facility as 24 independent 64 kbps trunks When upgrading from a TN722 to a TN767C 1 Remove all TN722 trunk members from affected trunk groups Enter remove dsl PCSS PCSS is the slot containing the TN722 2 3 Remove the TN722 circuit pack 4 Put the TN767C circuit pack into the same slot 5 Wait until the red LED goes off The hardware tests take 12 to 20 seconds to run When the red LED goes off the tests have completed O If the re
176. ance as to when the addition will take place Disable Alarm Origination 1 Enter change system parameters maintenance and press Enter 2 Setthe Alarm Origination Activated field to n A CAUTION If you do not disable Alarm Origination the system may generate alarms resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets 3 For some releases of software disable Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification before submitting the form Save Translations 1 If the system is high or critical reliability enter status system 1 and press Enter to verify that the system is in the active standby mode 2 Enter save translation and press Enter This instructs the system to take all translation information in memory and write it to the translation card or tape 3 If the system contains a TN750 Announcement circuit pack enter display announcements and press Enter If administered recorded announcements are listed enter list configuration software version press Enter To save the announcements enter save announcements and press Enter Power Down System If the packet bus is being added 1 Atthe PPN set the main circuit breaker to OFF 2 At each EPN set the main circuit breaker to OFF Add Circuit Packs 1 To control every ISDN PRI link in the system a TN778 Packet Control circuit pack and TN464 ISDN PRI circuit packs are required DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Mult
177. ances of up to 115 000 feet 22 miles or 35 km Single mode fiber may require attenuators It is usually more cost effective to use multi mode fiber between cabinets when possible Rule 3 A CAUTION Do not route fiber optic cables and the B25A cables together Route fiber optic cables away from groups of other cables where they may be stretched by the weight of metal cable bundles It may be necessary to run fiber optic cables with the I O cables such as in the cable slack manager or under a raised floor In these cases protect the cable by running it in a dedicated area if possible When the cable must be run with other cabling protect it by running it through flexible conduit Use the following steps to route the cable 1 Route the fiber optic cable up toward the top of the cabinet The excess cable should be looped and draped from the B25A cable clamp 2 Dress the cable running up the back of the cabinets by oosely tie wrapping the cable to the outside of the B25A cable clamp do not put the cable inside the clamp holding the B25A cables Rule 4 Avoid bending fiber optic cables to a radius smaller than 1 5 inches 3 8 cm to prevent mechanical stress on the cables Plan the use of cable ties to avoid crimping the cable or creating a fixed stress point where at a later time movement of the cable causes it to exceed the minimum bend radius DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test f
178. and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Page 5 154 a vd 4x u uo panulquog CLLXL ldXd O1 819 EZL 8LXL GIL 8p DA kL LYXd bLYXL a 8d 8d 8YLA ocd vid 8d oe A O LLLXd LLLXL l1 8L 8L BLLA cel YLL 8L Lv O A LLEHXL LLLXd Ltd kod ZuXd eld ke A 1d LLLXL kL LYXd Ld kel 21Xd ELL 9p Ta A OlYXd OLYXL ZY9 O0cd ZYXL oz AS OlLXd OLLXL 219 OeL 21XL St S A OLYXL O1LLXd ZY ZY ZYHLA 6lY Za 6L Add OLLXL OlYXd alk 4L LLIA 6IL ZL vv Yg 6YXd 6YXL 9 d 8H 9YXd 8L AD 61Xd 6LXL od 8IL 91Xd ev DA 6YXL 61Xd 999 Zld 9YXL Zi A O 6LXL 6YXd 919 ZbLL 91XL ov O A 89Xd 8YXL 9d 94 SHYLA 91d clu 9d QL Ad 81Xd 8LXL 9L 9L 9LLA OIL ZIL 9L Lv 19 A 8YXL 81Xd Gtd StH SYXd LEH SI T S 81XL 89Xd S d SIL S1Xd LEL Ov syd ZuXd ZYXL 2s 9 Lats SYXL Old vl a dd 21Xd 21XL blo DIL GIXL OL 6 Ya yd ZYXL 21Xd Sd Sd SHYLA eld 6d Sd toa a D 21XL ZuXd SL SL SLA ELL 6L SL 8e 9 9 9YXd cold 9YXL DW YIS vdXd ttd ARs vYXd 8d cl 4g O 91Xd ZIL 91XL vA vS vlXd vd ZIL vlXd 8L Ze o aoia ourys M oTIM F JUUNIL YL JUUNIL IM E AL yquniy r oury Sod FZ oIM F spod OL spod 8 sIIQUNN 1009 Hod eyed aur our or arr aora HMIL o3 XAV LAN PHq H M T aur our oury utd mog Ld rig rig Isa aia 070 aury NIA Zojpeuy 3opeuy 10p uuop NASI NASI tersa pue pue oury aur Tevs1q eea atIM Z SHED nour speq yuautdinby
179. and automatic tie trunk AUX Auxiliary auxiliary equipment Equipment used for optional system features such as Loudspeaker Paging and Music on Hold auxiliary trunk A trunk used to connect auxiliary equipment such as radio paging equipment to a communications system Aux Work mode A work mode in which agents are unavailable to receive ACD calls Agents enter Aux Work mode when involved in non ACD activities such as taking a break going to lunch or placing an outgoing call AVD Alternate voice data AWOH See Administration Without Hardware AWOH AWG American Wire Gauge AWT Average work time B B8ZS Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution bandwidth The difference expressed in hertz between the defined highest and lowest frequencies in a range barrier code A security code used with the Remote Access feature to prevent unauthorized access to the system baud A unit of transmission rate equal to the number of signal events per second See also and bits per second bps DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 8 BCC See Bearer capability class BCC BCMS Basic Call Management System BCT Seelbusiness communications terminal BCT Bearer capability class BCC Code that identifies the type of a call for example voice and different types of data Determination of BCC
180. anging the default parameters and audio levels refer to DEFINITY Application Notes available through the International Technical Assistance Center ITAC Administer other forms listed under Attendant Console in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Save Translations Page 3 30 Save Translations Save Translations Release 6si For standard reliability systems 1 translation card plus 1 backup is required For high or critical reliability systems 2 translation cards plus 2 backups are required A CAUTION Do not attempt to save translations on the orange labeled 10 MB memory card Use the white translation card Atthe Command prompt enter save translation and press Enter 2 After several minutes the Save Translation screen appears 3 Verify a 0 zero displays in the Error Code column for each SPE A 0 N O on A indicates that the save translation completed successfully If not the save translation did not complete Record the error code number and the error message and notify your Lucent Technologies representative Remove the original card from the TN777B and replace with backup card Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for the backup card s Remove the backu
181. are selected from the pool available in the PN when needed Table 5 24 denotes which of these circuit packs are compatible and which are not affected DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment CAMA E911 Installation Page 5 132 Table 5 24 Compatibility Tone Clock TTR CPTR and GPTR Circuit Packs Compatibility with CAMA Circuit Trunks in Pack Description Same PN Application Notes TN420 Touch Tone Not Compatible Not used in the 4TTR and 2CPTR TN420B Detector Call US ports Used in TN420C Progress Tone combination with Detector the TN780 in many countries initially in ver sions prior to G3V3 3 Use TN744DV2 if CAMA feature is to be supported TN744 Call Classifier Not Compatible Used globally 8 GPTR call clas TN7744B Detector sification ports TN744C Used for call clas TN744DV1 sification only ini tially prior to G3V3 3 Becomes a GPTR resource in G3V3 3 and later Use TN744DV2 if CAMA feature is to be supported TN744DV2 Call Classifier Compatible Used globally 8 GPTR call clas Detector sification ports Required in PN supporting CAMA trunks if GPTR resources are required in excess of those on the TN2182BV2 Also required if the TN768 or TN780 tone clocks are used in place of TN748 TN744 and TN744B and TN744C Continu
182. arest MSL Contact the appropriate location for specific instructions For Streamlined Implementation in the United States call 1 800 772 5409 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Install System Cabinets Page 1 3 Install System Cabinets Check the location of the AC power receptacles in the equipment room The receptacles must be on a separately fused circuit not controlled by a wall switch They must be located within 10 feet 3 m of the cabinet and outside the Main Distribution Frame MDF area Position the PPN Cabinet 3 If the system is supplied with cable ductwork space the cabinets on 32 inch 81 3 cm centers 1 8 inch 0 3 cm they must be level and must be square with respect to each other Ifthe system is supplied with cable slack managers place the cabinets far enough from the connection field to lay down the 32 inch 81 3 cm slack managers and to provide a little extra room for the cables to access the cable slack managers If earthquake protection is required skip to Earthquake Protection Installation on page 1 34 If earthquake protection is not required level the cabinets and adjust and lock the cabinet stabilizing bolts to keep the cabinet from moving At the bottom of the cabinet install hole plugs provided with cabinet in the holes previously occupied
183. arrier Route the connector cable through the cable slack manager to the assigned 110 type terminal block in the yellow field of the trunk auxiliary field Install Trunk Cables Among Network Interface Sneak Fuse Panel and Cabinet The 1 pair of Central Office CO trunks are installed by the network provider in the green field Up to 24 pairs may be terminated on each row of the 110 type terminal block Tie trunks also appear in the green field with up to eight 3 pair trunks terminated on each row of the 110 type terminal block Select Concentrator Cables WP 90929 List 1 and 3 concentrator cables can be used to connect the cabinet to the 110 type terminal blocks in the purple field The 1 pair patch cords jumper wires are then run from the purple terminal block rows to the green terminal block rows in order to establish the correct 3 pair modularity Connect Trunk Pairs Using Concentrator Cables Figure 2 1 2 shows trunk pairs connected to the cabinet with concentrator cables To install the cables 1 Connect B25A cables between the network interface and sneak fuse panels 2 Connect A25D cables from the sneak fuse panels to the 110 type terminal block connectors in the green field 3 Connect patch cords jumper wires from the terminal block in the green field to the associated terminal block in the purple field 4 Connect the single fingered end of the concentrator cables to the 110 type terminal block connectors in the purple fi
184. auxiliary circuits connecting to the trunk auxiliary field The bottom blue yellow label is for 25 pair cables connecting to site satellite closets A Sill A Q 4 L labels LJK 060396 Figure Notes 1 Purple Label Port Cable 3 Yellow Label Auxiliary 2 Blue Yellow Label Building and 4 Blue Yellow Label Site or Satellite Floor Figure 2 8 Equipment Room Cabling Labels DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Cable Installation Page 2 17 Table 2 3 details the label name and range of each label Table 2 3 Equipment Room Labels Label Name Range Port Cable 1A1 1A20 1B1 1B20 1C1 1C20 1D1 1D20 1E1 1E20 Building Field Identified Floor Field Identified Auxiliary Cable Field Identified Site or Satellite A F and or Field Identified Cable Connector Building Label Ordering Information Description Quantity Comcode 201A Labels 34 Sheets 103969994 Figure 2 9 shows the proper way to install a label on a 25 pair cable connector Install the label near the rear of the connector so it is not obscured by the cabinet connector retainers It can also be installed on the skin of the cable near the connector 1A2 He ll o Ibdf25p LJK 101596 Figure 2 9 Self Stick Label on 25 Pair Cable Connector DEFINITY E
185. availability When a duplicated subsystem fails its backup redundant system automatically takes over duplication option A system option that duplicates the following control carrier containing the SPE El circuit packs in carriers fiber optic cabling between port networks and center stage switch in a CSS connected system DWBS DEFINITY Wireless Business System Dxs Direct extension selection E E1 A digital transmission standard that carries traffic at 2 048 Mbps The E1 facility is divided into 32 channels DSOs of 64 kbps information Channel 0 is reserved for framing and synchronization information A D channel occupies channel 16 E amp M Ear and mouth receive and transmit EA Expansion archangel EAL Expansion archangel link ear and mouth E amp M signaling Trunk supervisory signaling used between two communications systems whereby signaling information is transferred through 2 state voltage conditions on the E and M leads for analog applications and through a single bit for digital applications EBCDIC Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interexchange Code ECC Error Correct Code ECMA European Computer Manufacturers Association EFP Electronic power feed EI Expansion interface EIA Electronic Industries Association DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 21 EJA 232 A
186. ave procedure 3 31 Issue 5 May 1998 Page IN 13 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Index trunk auxiliary field 2 1 trunks adding 5 85 type approved external modem B 2 Issue 5 May 1998 Page IN 14 U uniform call distribution testing queue warning indicator 6 3 United Kingdom country code 3 13 United States country code 3 13 USA country code 3 13 V Venezuela country code 3 13 voice and data terminals connection information 2 40 WwW warning safety instructions for power supply 5 52 warning alarms 4 13 WATS trunk adding 5 85 5 89 wiring 2 wire digital station example 5 5 analog station wiring example 5 5 analog tie trunk example 5 6 CO trunk example 5 5 DID trunk example 5 5 digital tie trunk example 5 7 ISDN BRI 2 wire line 5 12 NT1 5 12 pin designations 5 143 5 153 to 5 155 D 1 procedures 5 1 telephone connection example 5 3 wiring example 103A wall jack 3 6 Z Z113A Cable Slack Manager 2 12 Z77A Multiple Data Mounting 1 4
187. ay 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Page 2 45 M gt M U G 99999999 i 1758422 LJK 050996 Figure Notes 1 Write Floor or Building Identification on 5 Information Outlet rape 6 Site Satellite Closet Av abiak 7 Tie Circuit 3 Carrier 8 Floor Teall 9 Building Figure 2 24 Label Graphic Symbols and Nomenclature Each 110 type label identifies 2 rows on the 110 type terminal block The upper half identifies the row above it and the lower half identifies the row below it The labels are inserted into the clear plastic designation strips furnished with the 110 type terminal blocks The strip is snapped in place between the terminal block rows Label code number 220A comcode 103970000 contains all of the 110 type labels Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Before starting the patch cord installation obtain a copy of the Port Assignment Record forms from the customer or marketing representative See Figure 2 25 These forms contain the port assignments and identify the extension numbers Terminal No of the telephones voice terminals Enter the jack assignments at the equipment room and indicate if adjunct power is required and where it is provided MDF site satellite closet or information outlet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 2 Install Telecommu
188. b5 MMR 051396 Figure D 6 Sample Cable Pinouts DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 D Connector and Cable Diagrams Page D 8 FS 20 STRATUM 3 clock connector Duplicated synchronization clock simplex system dual input references STRATUM 8 clock connector To H600 274 primary source See FS 22 02 TREF2 To H600 274 secondary source 27 RREF2 See FS 22 A carrier TN780 a 25 pair pin conn a a e E ii a E O O E a e E e a ee o SCLKLST L AaRmAa o6 33 SPWRRTN 08 SPWRLST 28 REF1RTN 03 REF1LST 10 CCA01T EXTSYNOT 46 a ee 62 ee EXTSYN1T EXTSYNiR a as 4 E 13 CCB02T 38 CCB02R 14 CCA03T 39 CCA03R 15 CCBO3T 40 CCBO03R cc t NC ie ce NC r975bb6 MMR 051396 Figure D 7 STRATUM 3 Clock Connector Pinout DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 D Connector and Cable Diagrams FS 21 STRATUM 3 clock connector Duplicated synchronization clock duplicated system dual input references STRATUM 3 clock connector 02 TREF2 27 RREF2 BCLKRTN 32 07 BCLKLST 34 BPWRRTN To H600 274 primary source See FS 22 To H600 274 secondary source See FS 22
189. ble Slack Managers m Sneak Fuse Panels a Labels for the Main Distribution Frame Install the Main Distribution Frame The preferred MDF location is directly behind the system cabinets Wall Mounting 110A Type Terminal Blocks The 110A type hardware can be stacked in almost any arrangement at any height or location on the wall One arrangement is shown in Figure 2 3 The distance between the mounting screw holes on the terminal blocks is 10 81 inches 27 4 cm If a vertical patch cord trough is used the distance between the mounting screw holes is 5 31 inches 13 3 cm DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Install Equipment and Cables Page 2 7 1758420b MMR 031496 Figure Notes 1 4 Feet 1 22 m 6 47 5 Inches 120 6 cm 2 6 6 Feet 2 m 7 Horizontal Line 3 7 68 Inches 19 5 cm 8 AC Power Strip 4 7 8 Inch 2 22 cm 9 Floor Line 5 5 31 Inches 13 5 cm Figure 2 3 110A Type Terminal Blocks 300 Pair DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Install Equipment and Cables Page 2 8 Wall Mounting 110P Type Terminal Blocks The first terminal block of the tr
190. bles cydf014 PDH 041697 Figure Notes 1 Lightwave Transceiver 5 TX Connector 2 To I O Connector Panel 6 RX Connector 3 Fiber Optic Cable 7 Lightguide Interconnect Unit 4 Fiber Plant Figure A 7 Fiber Optic Cable Connections Between Transceivers DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Optical Cross Connect Hardware Page A 15 Rule 1 Cross connect the fiber optic cable between 2 lightwave transceivers That is run the cable from the TX connector on 1 transceiver to the RX connector on the other transceiver and in reverse for the other cable See the top half of Figure A 7 Multi mode connections using an LIU for fiber cross connects to remote EPNs are shown in the bottom half of Figure A 7 For single mode connections refer to Cross connect the fiber optic cable between 2 lightwave transceivers for each connection row on the fiber optic cable running list as shown in the Customer Service Document Rule 2 For multi mode fiber use the 9823A shortwave transceiver for distances of up to 4900 feet 1494 m Use the 9823B longwave transceiver for distances of up to 25 000 feet 7620 m Ensure all 9823As connect to 9823As and all 9823Bs connect to 9823Bs For single mode fiber use the 300A single mode fiber optic transceivers Single mode fiber is generally used to connect remote EPNs at dist
191. bution from Equipment Room Page 2 35 The 4 pair station cables can be run directly from the equipment room to the information outlets if 4 pair terminal blocks are used in the distribution field See Figure 2 20 The station cables must be field terminated on the 110 type terminal blocks r764798a CJL 030796 Figure Notes 1 Station Side of MDF or Satellite 3 Blue Field Location 4 DIW Station Cable D Inside Wire 2 4 Pair Circuit 5 Information Outlet Figure 2 20 4 Pair Run to Equipment Room or Satellite Location DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room Page 2 36 If 110 type terminal blocks are used with a modular plug ended station cable an adapter can be connected directly to the 110 type terminal block connectors See Figure 2 21 PR N MN r758532a CJL 031196 Figure Notes 1 Part of MDF 7 To System Cabinet 3 pair modularity 8 A25D Cable 9 258A or BR2580A Adapter 10 Information Outlet 11 4 Pair Circuit DIW station cable D Inside Wire 2 3 Pair Connecting Blocks 3 4 Pair Connecting Blocks 4 Purple Field 5 Patch Cord or Cross Connect Jumpers 6 Blue Field Figure 2 21 4 Pair Run to Equipment Room or Satellite Location DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6
192. by step synchronous data transmission A method of sending data in which discrete signal elements are sent at a fixed and continuous rate and specified times See also association SYSAM System Access and Administration DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 47 system administrator The person who maintains overall customer responsibility for system administration Generally all administration functions are performed from the Management Terminal The switch requires a special login referred to as the system administrator login to gain access to system administration capabilities system printer An optional printer that may be used to print scheduled reports via the report scheduler system report A report that provides historical traffic information for internally measured splits system status report A report that provides real time status information for internally measured splits system manager A person responsible for specifying and administering features and services for a system system reload A process that allows stored data to be written from a tape into the system memory normally after a power outage T1 A digital transmission standard that in North America carries traffic at the DS1 rate of 1 544 Mbps A T1 facility is divided into 24 channels DSOs of 64 kbps These 24 channels wit
193. cation number simplex system A system that has no redundant hardware simulated bridged appearance Issue 5 May 1998 Page GL 44 The same as a temporary bridged appearance allows the terminal user usually the principal to bridge onto a call that had been answered by another party on his or her behalf single carrier cabinet A combined cabinet and carrier unit that contains one carrier See also Multicarrier cabinet single line voice terminal A voice terminal served by a single line tip and ring circuit models 500 2500 7101A 7103A SIT Special information tones small computer system interface SCSI An ANSI bus standard that provides a high level command interface between host computers and peripheral devices SMDR Station Message Detail Recording DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 45 SN Switch Node SNA Systems Network Architecture SNC Switch Node Clock SNI Switch Node Interface SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol software A set of computer programs that perform one or more tasks SPE Switch Processing Element SPID Service Profile Identifier split See ACD work mode split condition A condition whereby a caller is temporarily separated from a connection with an attendant A split condition automatically occurs when the attendant active on a cal
194. cations Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 E References Call Center Documents Page E 5 Provides detailed descriptions of the procedures for monitoring testing troubleshooting and maintaining the R6csi ECS Included are maintenance commands step by step trouble clearing procedures the procedures for using all tests and explanations of the system s error codes DEFINITY ECS International Telephone Guide Builder Issue 1 555 230 742 Same as 555 230 755 above but customized for international locations Call Center Documents These documents are issued for DEFINITY ECS Call Center applications DEFINITY DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Call Vectoring EAS Guide Issue 1 585 230 521 Provides information on how to write use and troubleshoot vectors which are command sequences that process telephone calls in an Automatic Call Distribution ACD environment This document applies to Release 6 as well as earlier DEFINITY systems It is provided in two parts tutorial and reference The tutorial provides step by step procedures for writing and implementing basic vectors The reference includes detailed descriptions of the call vectoring features vector management vector administration adjunct routing troubleshooting and interactions with management information systems including the Call Management System DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Basic Call Management System BCMS
195. ce to Expansion Interface Fiber Part 1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 D Connector and Cable Diagrams Page D 3 Backplane FS 4 El to El metallic cable H600 278 Backplane Front Front 5V J1 1 5V J2 1 5V 5V T J1 26 5V 5V J1 2 GRD XMT_DAT RCV_DAT RCV_DAT A Backplane Backplane Front Rear 5V RCV_DAT SNI r975bb1b MMR 061396 Figure D 2 Expansion Interface to Expansion Interface Fiber Part 2 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 D Connector and Cable Diagrams 103A information outlet Modular cord R pa 23456789 110 block 4238 Issue 5 May 1998 Page D 4 Example cross connect Amphenol pinouts TN762B rt2 10 11 TN553 E 110 block 1 Pinouts TN726 8 ports TN553 12 ports pinouts 23 45 67 8 9 TN1654 Amphenol 10 11 12 TN726B TN1654 to TN1654 direct cross connect aro fero 50 48 LOA 48 LOA 23 LOA 23 LOA pee 48 22 LIA 22 LIA 47 LIA 47 LIA 45 LOB 45 LOB 20 LOB 20 LOB 19 LIB 19 LIB 44 LIB 44 LIB 42 LOC 42 LOC 17 LOc 17 LOc 16 LIC 16 LIC 41 LIC 41 LIC PSSG a 39 LOD 39
196. cement circuit pack enter list configuration software version and press Enter If Page 2 of this form shows that recorded announcements were saved these announcements can be restored using restore announcements and press Enter 4 Update backup tape if required DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add PRI Over PACCON to R6si Page 5 124 Add PRI Over PACCON to R 6si The optional asynchronous packet bus provided by a TN778 Packet Control circuit pack rather than the synchronous TDM bus provided by TN765 Processor Interface circuit packs can allow TN464 ISDN PRI interfaces on an R6si system to communicate with the system s SPE Tone Clock Circuit Packs A TN756 Tone Detector Generator circuit pack cannot be used with PRI Over PACCON interfaces Therefore replace the TN756 circuit pack with both a TN768 TN780 TN419B or TN2182 Tone Clock circuit pack a TN748B TN420B or TN744C Tone Detector circuit pack gt NOTE If a TN756 tone detector generator is removed from the R5si control cabinet the TN2182 tone clock should replace this circuit pack The TN2182 Tone Clock serves to replace the tone detector circuits on the TN756 If using a TN2182 no TN748B is required Expansion Interface EI Circuit Packs If a new packet bus is being added to provide PRI Over PACCON for an R6si sys
197. ck and Inspect Cabinets Page 1 1 Install and Connect Cabinets This chapter discusses installation of Multi Carrier Cabinets only For information on Single Carrier Cabinets refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5 Installation and Test for Single Carrier Cabinets Floor plans and equipment layouts for typical system installations are provided in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 System Description Pocket Reference Unpack and Inspect Cabinets Perform these steps for all cabinets DANGER A cabinet may weigh as much as 800 Ibs 363 kg and may be top heavy Use extreme caution 1 Check the status of the SHOCKWATCH and or TILTWATCH indicators on the container If the container has been shaken or tilted beyond specifications the indicators are red indicating potential damage Report any damage according to local shipping instructions A DANGER Take care to avoid injury while cutting and removing the 2 metal bands 2 Unpack the cabinet and remove all packing material 3 Move the cabinets into their proper positions 4 Do not adjust the leveling feet at this time DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Check Customer s Order Page 1 2 Unpack and Inspect Auxiliary Cabinet The Auxiliary cabinet is normally positioned adjacent to the PPN cabinet or the EP
198. cluded in the hardware It is not necessary to fill in the Circuit Packs form if the circuit packs are installed at the time of administration Refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Planning and Configuration 555 230 601 for more information about circuit pack administration and port assignment records For initial installation assign circuit packs to slots using the hardware configuration layout record from the factory or Customer Services Organization Do not arbitrarily assign circuit packs to slots For Release 6r if the carrier type administered on the Cabinet Administration form does not match the physical hardware question marks may display in the Code fields When a circuit pack in a slot differs from what has been administered on the form a displays between the Sfx and Name fields For Release 6r the number of slot fields displayed represents administrable slots for the given carrier type For Release 6si configurations all slot fields are displayed DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Set System Maintenance Parameters Page 3 18 Set System Maintenance Parameters If the system does not contain a TN778 Packet Control circuit pack skip this section and proceed to Administer System Configurations Release 6r 1 Verify the t
199. connections Expansion Interface El circuit packs in port slots in cabinet carriers Switch Node Interface SNI circuit packs in the Switch Node Carrier a The 300A lightwave transceivers Each 300A transmits light up to 115 000 feet or 22 miles 85 km Fiber loss must be less than 17dB Saturation may occur if distances are short attenuators may be required if the total loss on the fiber link is less than 10dBm An OTDR or Optical Power Meter test is recommended to determine specific fiber optic hardware requirements gt NOTE Using the 300A may require 5 10 or 15dB attenuators See When to Use Single Mode Fiber Attenuators on page A 7 Also contact your Lucent Technologies representative for attenuator requirements on single mode links a Single mode fiber optic cable consisting of 2 separate 8 to 10 micron core cables DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Fiber Optic Requirements Fiber Optic Component Comcodes Issue 5 May 1998 Page A 4 Table A 2 provides fiber optic components and associated comcodes These comcodes are from the Lucent Fiber Optics Product Catalog For BCS comcodes contact your Lucent Technologies representative For multi mode fiber optic cables and comcodes refer to Table A 3 For single mode fiber optic cables and comcodes refer to Table A 4 Table A 2 Fiber Optic
200. crew 7 Install shielded troughs on any other pairs of cabinets that require shielded duct connections DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork 8 9 Page C 9 Route the appropriate cables between the cabinets just connected If a given cabinet is to support a cross aisle shielded duct set a cross aisle riser C in Figure C 4 on the cabinet riser A Otherwise set a shielded coupling D on the cabinet riser In either case position the device so the two holes on the back wall line up with the holes on the back wall of the cabinet riser Bolt the two pieces together at the holes just described If there is no trough to install in one end of the cabinet riser press a shielded end cap E on the unused end of the riser The side walls of the end cap go inside the walls of the riser and outside of the ears of the riser The top of the end cap should rest on top of the shielded coupling or cross aisle riser previously installed Bolt the bottom of the end cap to the cabinet riser with a self tapping screw Set the shielded cover D on the shielded trough B and press it down so the dimples on the cover engage the holes in the trough Install Cross Aisle Shielded Ducts The inter cabinet ducts and cross aisle risers must be installed before any cross aisle ductwork is installed
201. ctivate System Screens and Commands Page 3 10 Screens and Commands Screens The system is administered using screens displayed on the terminal The screens are used to add change display list data and to remove system and telephone features To access a screen enter a valid system command in response to the Command prompt Commands System commands are standard words and phrases instructing the system to perform a specific function The commands are arranged in a hierarchy of keywords that is enter 1 command to go to a different level The commands contain three parts ACTION OBJECT and QUALIFIER a ACTION is the first part of the command When Command appears on the screen The ACTION specifies the operation desired Examples include add duplicate change remove display list and save OBJECT is the second part of the command and specifies the particular object to be administered Typical entries are hunt group coverage path and station QUALIFIER is the last part of the command It is 1 or more words or digits used to further identify or complete the OBJECT For example hunt group 15 or station 3600 where 15 and 3600 are qualifiers An example of the command line required to add a station with extension number 1234 is add station 1234 In this example add is the ACTION station is the OBJECT and 1234 is the QUALIFIER In the command line spaces are required between the ACTION OBJECT and QUALIFIER To sa
202. ctor on the other end Use this cable as an extension cable between the DS1 tie trunk circuit pack and other connector cables C6F connector cable comcode 104307475 50 foot 15 24 m shielded cable equipped with a 50 pin male connector on 1 end and a 3 inch 7 62 cm stub on the other end Use this cable to connect the DS1 tie trunk circuit pack to channel multiplexers requiring hardwired connections See Table 5 1 for a pinout of the C6F cable Table 5 1 Pinout of C6F Cable Wire Color Lead Designation Pin Number White Green LI High Side 47 Green LI 22 White Brown LO 48 Brown LO High Side 23 White Slate LBACK2 49 Slate LBACK1 24 Collocated DS1 Tie Trunks Connection to 2 TN722B DSi Tie Trunk circuit packs in collocated systems can include a C6D cable for distances up to 50 feet 15 24 m For distances over 50 feet 15 24 m and up to 1310 Feet 899 3 m maximum use C6E cables DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment DS1 Tie Trunk Example Page 5 9 DS1 Tie Trunks Using Channel Service Unit Figure 5 7 shows an example of the connections required to connect a DS1 tie trunk to an external T1 Channel Service Unit CSU or Integrated Channel Service Unit ICSU The ICSU is used to interface the DS1 tie trunks with the 1 544 Mbps digital facility
203. cuit pack was removed in step 3 it will be replaced into the same slot later in this section Install the new circuit pack 5 Open the rear door From the rear remove the I O cable connector associated with the slot that will contain the new fiber optic circuit pack See Figure 5 30 Using a supplied cable tie secure the removed I O connector to nearby cabling See Figure 5 31 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add the Fiber Optic Cable Page 5 74 Icda8fop RPY 021198 Figure Notes 1 Press tab down 2 Pull connector forward Figure 5 30 Remove the I O Cable Connector DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add the Fiber Optic Cable Page 5 75 Icda9fop RPY 021398 Figure Notes 1 Tie wrap Figure 5 31 Secure the I O Cable Connector 8 From the front remove the fan cover See Figure 5 32 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipme
204. cy transfer row connecting block for each emergency transfer telephone to the ST terminal appearance in the purple trunk auxiliary field Connect the ST leads from the terminal in Step 4 to the assigned terminal in the blue or white station distribution field Telephone Installation Install telephone assigned to emergency transfer as follows 1 2 Connect telephone to the information outlet Install patch cords jumper wires between the system side and the station side of the station distribution field on the MDF DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment External Ringing Page 5 44 External Ringing Connections for external ringing provided by a device such as a gong chime or bell are at an information outlet The system side of the MDF connects to a TN2183 or equivalent analog line circuit pack located in a port carrier The circuit packs contain 16 ports each gt NOTE A maximum of 3 devices can connect to 1 TN2183 circuit pack port 1 Wire the ringing device to the information outlet as shown in Figure 5 8 and 2 Administer per DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description Queue Warning Indicator The connections for the queue warning indicator are the same as external ringing An AC indicator lamp such as a 21C49 can b
205. d LED stays on reseat the board and repeat this step 7 Enter add ds1 PCSS 8 Continue with appropriate procedures to set up members of trunk groups Service Interruption Since the addition of DS1 tie trunk service may require a service interruption notify the customer in advance as to when the addition will be carried out Disable Alarm Origination 1 Enter change system parameters maintenance and press RETURN 2 Setthe Alarm Origination Activated field to n A WARNING If you do not disable Alarm Origination the system may generate alarms resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets 3 For some releases of software disable Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification before submitting the form DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add DS1 Tie and OPS Page 5 90 Save Translations 1 If the system is high or critical reliability enter status system 1 and press Enter to verify that the system is in the active standby mode 2 Enter save translation Press Enter This instructs the system to take all translation information in memory and write it to the translation card or tape 3 If the system contains a TN750 B Announcement circuit pack enter display announcements and press Enter If administered recorded announcements are listed enter list configuration softwar
206. d a DXS button Direct Inward Dialing DID A feature that allows an incoming call from the public network not FX or WATS to reach a specific telephone without attendant assistance Direct Inward Dialing DID trunk An incoming trunk used for dialing directly from the public network into a communications system without help from the attendant disk drive An electromechanical device that stores data on and retrieves data from one or more disks distributed communications system DCS A network configuration linking two or more communications systems in such a way that selected features appear to operate as if the network were one system DIVA Data In Voice Answer DLC Data line circuit DLDM Data line data module DMI Digital multiplexed interface DND Do not disturb DNIS Dialed Number Identification Service DOD Direct Outward Dialing domain VDNs ACD splits and stations The VDN domain is used for active notification associations The ACD split domain is for active notification associations and domain control associations The station domain is used for the domain control associations domain control association A Third Party Domain Control Request capability initiates a unique CRV link number combination which is referred to as a domain control association DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations
207. d by the time maintenance reschedules testing the green status LED resumes its steady state DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 4 Test the System LED Indicators Page 4 14 Circuit Pack LEDs Typically each circuit pack has 3 LEDs on the front panel Table 4 1 describes the red green and yellow LEDs and their meaning Also see Figure 4 1 Table 4 1 Circuit Pack LEDs LED Color Status Description Red Alarm The system has detected a fault in this circuit pack The alarm log should contain an on board alarm The red LED is also lit briefly when a circuit pack is inserted or reset If the circuit pack passes its initialization tests the LED goes out Green Testing The system is currently running tests on this circuit pack as part of background maintenance or demand testing This LED is also lit during initialization tests when a circuit pack is inserted or reset Yellow Busy The circuit pack is currently in use by the system Tle st amp fpdfled LUK 101596 Figure Notes 1 Alarm LED Red 4 Latch Pin 2 Test LED Green 5 Locking Lever 3 Busy LED Yellow Figure 4 1 Circuit Pack LEDs DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 4 Test the System LED Indicators Page 4 15 DS1 Converter Circuit
208. d cable provides up to 4 DS1 connections using a 15 pin connector that plugs into the DTE jack on each CSU An adapter cable comcode 107063711 may be required to connect the H600 348 and the H600 307 cables to the CSU ouu ood NETWORK 3150csu RBP 062696 Figure Notes 1 H600 348 Quad Cable 6 Smart Jack 2 15 Pin Male D Connectors to DTE Jacks 7 Cable A ane 8 Cable B 3 Channel Service Unit CSU 9 Cable C 4 H600 307 Cable RJ 48C to RJ 48C 10 Cable D 5 Network Interface Figure 5 13 DS1 Converter Connections Part 2 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment TN1654 DS1 Converter Release 6r Only Page 5 28 1 Connection to the remote located system is the same as that shown in Figure 5 12 and Figure 5 13 Table 5 10 shows the Y cable lengths and associated comcode numbers Table 5 10 Y Cable Lengths Length Description Comcode 14 Inches 35 5 cm TN1654 to adjacent Expansion Interface 847245750 circuit pack or TN573B Switch Node Interface circuit pack in same carrier 70 Inches 177 8 cm TN1654 to Expansion Interface circu
209. d on the first page of the 8411 station form The 12 channel is the DCP channel assigned on the analog adjunct page of the 8411 station form or on the data module page a Digital Communications Protocol The DCP protocol supports 2 information bearing channels and thus two telephones data modules The 11 channel is the DCP channel assigned on the first page of the 8411 station form The 12 channel is the DCP channel assigned on the analog adjunct page of the 8411 station form or on the data module page digital data endpoints In DEFINITY ECS devices such as the 510D terminal or the 515 type business communications terminal BCT digital multiplexed interface DMI An interface that provides connectivity between a communications system and a host computer or between two communications systems using DS1 24th channel signaling DMI provides 23 64 kbps data channels and 1 common signaling channel over a twisted pair connection DMI is offered through two capabilities bit oriented signaling DMI BOS and message oriented signaling DMI MOS digital signal level 0 DSO A single 64 kbps voice channel A DSO is a single 64 kbps channel in a T1 or E1 facility and consists of eight bits in a T1 or E1 frame every 125 microseconds digital signal level 1 DS1 A single 1 544 Mbps United States or 2 048 Mbps outside the United States digital signal carried on a T1 transmission facility ADS1 converter complex consists of a pair one at each end
210. des synchronization for the DS1 E1 circuit pack A TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack is required for use with the TN464C DS1 E1 circuit pack when PRI is activated As an option to the TN2182 or TN419B Tone Clock a TN780 Tone Clock circuit pack installed in the PPN can interface external Stratum 3 synchronization for DS1 connections Service Interruption Since the addition of ISDN PRI requires a service interruption notify the customer in advance as to when the addition will be carried out Disable Alarm Origination 1 Enter change system parameters maintenance and press Enter 2 Setthe Alarm Origination Activated field to n A CAUTION If you do not disable Alarm Origination the system may generate alarms resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets 3 For some releases of system software disable Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification before submitting the form DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add ISDN PRI Page 5 111 Save Translations iP If the system is high or critical reliability enter status system 1 and press RETURN to verify that the system is in the active standby mode Enter save translation and press Enter This instructs the system to take all translation information in memory and write it to the translation card or tape
211. dress and facilities restriction level FRL thus facilitating a Uniform Dial Plan UDP that is independent of the type of call being placed glare The simultaneous seizure of a 2 way trunk by two communications systems resulting in a standoff GM Group manager GPTR General purpose tone receiver grade of service The number of call attempts that fail to receive service immediately Grade of service is also expressed as the quantity of all calls that are blocked or delayed ground start trunk A trunk on which for outgoing calls the system transmits a request for services to a distant switching system by grounding the trunk ring lead To receive the digits of the called number that system grounds the trunk tip lead When the system detects this ground the digits are sent GRS Generalized Route Selection DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 25 H HO An ISDN information transfer rate for 384 kbps data defined by CCITT and ANSI standards H11 An ISDN information transfer rate for 1536 kbps data defined by CCITT and ANSI standards H12 An ISDN information transfer rate for 1920 kbps data defined by CCITT and ANSI standards handshaking logic A format used to initiate a data connection between two data module devices hertz Hz A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second high reli
212. e 848029278 provides the equipment necessary to install the fiber optic connectors and associated cabling Unpack and Inspect 1 Verify the equipment received See Figure 5 29 Actual equipment may vary in appearance and may ship in separate packages 2 See lable 5 17 for a list of part comcodes DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add the Fiber Optic Cable Page 5 71 indapkit RPY 012398 Figure Notes 1 Pass thru Tool 5 Fiber Optic Cable Disconnect Label 2 SC SC Fiber Optic Adapter 6 I O Connector Adapter Bracket 3 ST SC Fiber Optic Adapter 7 Cable Tie 4 Fiber Optic Cable 8 Cable Tie Mount Figure 5 29 Fiber Pass Thru Kit Equipment DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add the Fiber Optic Cable Page 5 72 Table 5 17 Quantity Description Comcode 1 Pass thru Tool 847978715 1 Beige SC SC Fiber Optic Adapter multimode 107118903 1 Beige ST SC Fiber Optic Adapter multimode 107087967 1 Ten foot 3 m Fiber Optic Cable multimode 107122640 1 I O Connector Adapter Bracket 847978673 1 Fiber Optic Cable Disconnect Label 848029286 10 Cable Ties 407814672 6 Cable Tie Mounts 403053150 LASER Prod
213. e Make the first call by dialing a telephone and make the second call by dialing a trunk access code and a Listed Directory Number LDN Test 302C Attendant Console Check all lamps are operational and call another telephone in the system 1 Simultaneously press and hold the Ringer Volume up button and the POS BUSY button This puts the console in the self test mode gt NOTE Releasing the buttons causes the console to return to normal mode 2 Verify all lamps on display light and remain lighted Each row of lamps on the console lights and goes dark in sequence from top to bottom 3 Press Start Listen for dial tone The green lamp associated with idle call appearance button lights The Position Available lamp goes dark 4 Dial number associated with a working telephone Audible ringing tone is heard in ear piece 5 Press Release Audible ringing tone is silenced The green lamp associated with idle call appearance button goes dark The Position Available lamp lights Test Selector Console Check all selector console lamps are operational Make call to a telephone in the system 1 Simultaneously press and hold the Ringer Volume up button and the POS BUSY button on the attendant console This puts the console in the self test mode 2 Each row of lamps on the selector console lights and goes dark in sequence from top to bottom 3 Press hundreds group select button The hundreds group select lamp lights and any lamps as
214. e 4 555 230 723 Provides step by step procedures for using the features available for the lodging and health industries to improve their property management and to provide assistance to their employees and clients Includes detailed descriptions of reports DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 E References Documents on CD ROM Page E 9 Documents on CD ROM The following CD ROMs are available from the Publications Center Administration and Call Center CD ROM Issue 3 555 230 828 Includes the documents listed in the Administration JCall Center Operations and Hospitality sections above DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Documentation Library CD ROM Issue 1 555 230 833 A comprehensive set of DEFINITY documentation Includes the documents in the Administration and Call Center CD ROM and the documents listed in the Installation and Maintenance sections above DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 1 Glossary and Abbreviations Numerics 800 service A service in the United States that allows incoming calls from certain areas to an assigned number for a flat rate charge based on usage a A AA Archangel See angel AAC ATM access concentrator AAR See Automatic Alternate Routing AAR abandoned c
215. e 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Administer System Configurations Release 6r Page 3 21 Change Site Data This form initializes the building floor and color data to make them available later in help messages that refer to site information 1 Atthe Command prompt enter the change site data command The first of 3 pages of site data appears 2 Enter optional names for the buildings or offices served by the system 3 Access the remaining site data pages and fill them in appropriately Change Cabinet 1 1 Enter change cabinet 1 A screen similar to Screen 3 7 appears 2 Fill in the blanks as required by the location and nature of the cabinet If the system is critical reliability verify the B field is set to the processor option the D field is set to the dup sw node option and the E field is set to the switch node option change cabinet 1 Page 1_ of 1 SPE B CABINET CABINET DESCRIPTION Cabinet 1 Cabinet Layout five carrier Cabinet Type processor Number of Portnetworks 1 Room Floor Building CARRIER DESCRIPTION Carrier Carrier Type Number Duplicate Cc port PN 01 B processor PN 01 A processor PN 01 X Fan D dup sw node SN 0i 01E E switch node SN 0i 61D Screen 3 7 Typical Change Cabinet 1 Form DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Ma
216. e EPN cabinet is located remote from the PPN cabinet in a separate room or building connect the CABINET GROUND wire to an approved ground widmgrnd LJK 092697 Figure Notes 1 PPN Cabinet 5 AC Load Center 2 EPN Cabinet if Installed single Paint Ground 3 X lis 40 16 mm2 CABINETGROUND s one SOVE TBBI 7 10 AWG 25 6 mm 4 Cabinet Ground Terminal Block Ground Wire to CBC Figure 1 1 Typical Cabinet Ground Location 5 Repeat connecting each EPN cabinet to the single point ground block DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect AC Power and Ground Page 1 10 6 At the AC load center connect a 10 AWG 25 6 mm wire to the single point ground block This ground wire will later be tie wrapped to the trunk cables and connected to the Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC ground block at the MDF AC Load Center is More Than 50 Feet 15 2 m from Cabinet 1 Mount the single point ground block to any surface between the MCC cabinets and the AC load center single point ground The single point ground block must be mounted to a non metallic surface 2 At the bottom rear of the PPN cabinet connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm CABINET GROUND wire to the cabinet ground block See Figure 1 2 3 Route the wire to the single point ground block and connect 4 At the first
217. e ITW Linx may be used on all vintages of the TN754 and TN754B circuit packs Table 5 12 lists the approved protectors Table 5 12 Digital Voice Circuit Protectors Enhanced Primary Protector Circuit Pack With Sneak Current Protection TN754 V13 or earlier ITW Linx Only TN754 V14 or later 4C3S 75 or ITW Linx TN754B all vintages 4C3S 75 or ITW Linx TN2181 all vintages 4C3S 75 or ITW Linx TN2224 all vintages 4C3S 75 or ITW Linx DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Off Premises or Out of Building Stations Page 5 35 When possible all new and reused wiring installations should use blocks that accept the standard 5 pin plug in 4C3S 75 protector However there are reused wiring installations where this may not be cost effective For these installations the ITW Linx protector may be installed An example of this is where screw type carbon block protectors or other non plug compatible types are in place and it is too costly to re terminate the outside plant cable on a 5 pin mounting block for only a few out of building terminals The ITW Linx Enhanced Protector may be installed in series with existing primary protection The 4C3S 75 protector cannot be installed in series with other types of primary protection It must be installed as the only protection on the line entering the bu
218. e Port TN735 MET Line Port TN742 Analog Line Port TN744 B C Call Classifier Service Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment List of Circuit Packs Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 67 Table 5 16 Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules Continued Apparatus Code Name Type TN744 D Call Classifier Detector Service TN746 B Analog Line Port TN747B Central Office Trunk Port TN748 B C D Tone Detector Service TN750 B C Announcement Service T N753 B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN754 B C Digital Line 4 Wire DCP Port TN755B Neon Power Unit Power TN756 Tone Detector Service TN758 Pooled Modem Port TN760B C D Tie Trunk Port TN762B Hybrid Line Port TN763B C D Auxiliary Trunk Port TN765 Processor Interface Control TN767B C D E DS1 Interface T1 24 Channel Port TN768 Tone Clock Control TN769 Analog Line Port T N771D Maintenance Test Service TN772 Duplication Interface Control TN773 Processor Control TN775 B C Maintenance Service TN776 Expansion Interface Port T N777 B Network Control Control TN778 Packet Control Control TN780 Tone Clock Control TN786 Processor Control TN786B Processor Control TN787F G H J K Multimedia Interface Service Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Commu
219. e Table 5 25 for lead designations The circuit packs and auxiliary equipment are classified as shown in the tables at the end of this chapter Table 5 25 Lead and Color Designations Cross Connect Pin Color Amphenol Pin Backplane Pin 1 W BL 26 102 2 BL W 01 002 3 W O 27 103 4 O W 02 003 5 W G 28 104 6 G W 03 004 7 W BR 29 105 8 BR W 04 005 9 W SL 30 106 10 SL W 05 006 11 R BL 31 107 12 BL R 06 007 13 R O 32 108 14 O R 07 008 15 R G 33 109 16 G R 08 009 17 R BR 34 110 18 BR R 09 010 19 R SL 35 111 20 SL R 10 011 21 BK BL 36 112 22 BL BK 11 012 23 BK O 37 113 24 O BK 12 013 25 BK G 38 302 26 G BK 13 202 27 BK BR 39 303 28 BR BK 14 203 29 BK SL 40 304 Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Connector and Cable Diagrams Pinout Charts Page 5 144 Table 5 25 Lead and Color Designations Continued Cross Connect Pin Color Amphenol Pin Backplane Pin 30 SL BK 15 204 31 Y BL 41 305 32 BL Y 16 205 33 Y O 42 306 34 O Y 17 206 35 Y G 43 307 36 G Y 18 207 37 Y BR 44 308 38 BR Y 19 208 39 Y SL 45 309 40 SL Y 20 209 41 V BL 46 310 42 BL V 21 210 43 V O 47 311 44 O V 22 211 45 V G 48 312 46 G V 23 212 47 V BR 49 313 48 BR V 24 213 49 V SL 50 300 50 SL V 25 200 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications S
220. e assigned connecting terminal block Avoid placing copper cables where they may bend or strain fiber optic cables Install Control Carrier Outputs Cable A connector on the rear of the Control Carrier is labeled AUX A 25 pair cable connects the AUX connector to a 110 type terminal block in the yellow field of the trunk auxiliary field The AUX connector outputs include the following Alarm monitoring for the processor interface 7 DC power 48 VDC sources for emergency transfer units 3 DC power 48 VDC sources for remotely powering a total of 3 attendant consoles or executive voice terminal adjuncts The remote maintenance internal modem connection location Access to a relay contact is available to actuate a light bell or similar type customer supplied device The relay can be administered to make contact when a major minor or warning alarm condition occurs in the system Label Control Carrier Cable Place the appropriate AUX connector label on the assigned 110 type terminal block row On the control carrier cable place a yellow auxiliary label on the connectors at each end of the cable Write AUX on each label DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Cable Installation Page 2 21 Connect Control Carrier Outputs Cable Plug the connector cable in the AUX connector on the rear of the Control C
221. e at 16 dB a 30 Seconds of silence a 0 5 Seconds of test progress tone 2225 Hz Approximately 5 seconds of silence m Forced disconnect DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 6 Test Telephones and Other Equipment Test Stratum 3 Clock Page 6 7 Test Stratum 3 Clock Check for Red LEDs This sections tests the ability of the Stratum 3 clock to correctly provide timing and alarms to the system A caution The following procedures are destructive to DS1 data and should not be attempted while there are DS1 facilities in active use 1 Turn on the Stratum 3 clock and wait 40 50 seconds to allow the system to complete the on board diagnostics before checking LEDs 2 If there are any red LEDs follow the procedures in Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Stratum 3 Clock LED Indicators Card LED Label Procedure PAI REF A Check that the Cl circuit pack on the left is inserted properly Check wiring for DS1 in carrier A which connects the system to the CSU and the External Synchronization Clock at the MDF through a Y cable assembly If all else fails to clear the LED then replace the circuit pack PAI REF B Check that the Cl circuit pack on the right is inserted properly Check wiring for DS1 in carrier B which connects the system to the CSU and the External Synchronization Clock at the MDF through a Y cable assembly If
222. e customer s fiber plant or overlay your own load line Using the measured loss of 0 33dB km as an example install a 10dB attenuator if the distance is about 9 miles 14 km or less Use a 5dB attenuator if the distance is from 9 to 18 miles 14 4 to 30 km No attenuator required 10dB attenuator required Total loss fiber plant patch cords misc 5 km 10 km 15 km 20 km 25 km 30 km 35 km 3 1 miles 6 2 miles 93miles 12 4 miles 15 5 miles 18 6 miles 21 7 miles Length of single mode fiber plant gratfibr PDH 041697 Figure A 1 Single Mode Attenuator Requirements DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Optical Cross Connect Hardware Page A 8 Single Mode Fiber Link with Attenuators cydf015 PDH 041697 Figure Notes 1 300A Lightwave Transceiver 5 TX Connector 2 2 Foot 0 6 m Patchcord 6 RX Connector 3 In Line Attenuator 7 Lightguide Interconnect Unit 4 Fiber Plant 8 Fiber Optic Cable Figure A 2 Typical Single Mode Connection with Attenuator 1 Connect a 2 foot 0 6 m patchcord to the TX connector on the local 300A transceiver See Figure A 2 2 Connect the patchcord to the required attenuator The attenuator must be installed in series with the strand of fiber connecting to the TX connector 3 Repeat for the TX connector at the opposite end of the fiber link remote EPN
223. e directly below the other such that the AC power cord 6 5 feet or 2 meters reaches the electrical outlet from a power supply mounted on the bottom plate Both plates should be located so the raised letters are right side up gt NOTE A maximum of 4 power supplies can be powered from 1 dedicated 110 VAC 20 amp or 230 VAC 15 amp feeder Use only unswitched receptacles receptacles not connected to a wall switch Secure the wall mounting plates to a standard 3 4 inch 2 cm thick plywood mounting board Each mounting plate comes with four 10 x 1 2 inch wood screws The 1145B Power Supply is snap fit onto the bottom wall mounting plate without tools Aninstaller provided insulated ground wire 16 AWG 1 5 mm or greater is required to connect the power supply frame ground lug to an approved ground The frame ground screw is located next to the AC receptacle to the left of the unit Mark the Unit Number and Connectivity information on the front label next to the LEDs DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment 1145B Power Supply Page 5 47 1149 Battery On Battery Reserve o 1145 Power Unit Charging Battery Output Power On
224. e for R6vs si to clear the trouble DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Activate the System Page 3 9 INTERNAL REGISTER TEST PASSED LOOP DATA TEST PASSED DUART TEST PASSED ROM CHECKSUM TEST PASSED CONTROL STATUS TEST PASSED DCACHE TEST PASSED ICACHE TEST PASSED WRITE BUFFER TEST PASSED BTO TEST PASSED MEM CONFIG TEST FARDED MEMORY FUNCTIONAL TEST PAPSED POEN PASSED EMORY MODULE A STUCK BIT TEST EARS PASSED MEMORY MODULE A PARITY TEST PASSED EMORY MODULE A BURST TEST PASSED y ST IT TES EMORY MODULE B STUCK BIT TEST PASSED EMORY MODULE B PARITY TEST 7 PASSED EMORY MODULE B BURS TEST PASSED EMORY MODULE C STUCK BET TESS SAGER EMORY MODULE C PARITY TES SASSEN MEMORY MODULE C BURST TEST PASSED VIRTUAL MEMORY TEST PASSED EXCEPTION TEST PASSET TIMER TEST PASSED MTP TEST PASSED SANITY TIMER TEST PASSED ADDRESS MATCHER TEST PASSED FLASH TEXT CHECKSUM TEST PASSED RAM DATA CHECKSUM TEST PASSED RESET 4 REBOOT PERFORMED Screen 3 1 Typical Start up Messages Release 6r 2 About 2 minutes after REBOOT PERFORMED displays the screen displays Login DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and A
225. e is present at each trunk circuit Locate the circuit start selection switches See Figure 5 17 These are the first 10 two position switches on the left side of the panel They are used to set each of the 5 incoming trunk lines to either loop start or ground start Two switches are used for each circuit switches 1 and 2 are used for circuit 1 switches 3 and 4 are used for circuit 2 and so forth See Table 5 13 For loop start set the switches to the left For ground start set the switches to the right Table 5 13 Trunk Test Switches Switch Circuit Number Number 1 1 2 1 3 2 4 2 5 3 6 3 7 4 8 4 9 5 10 5 11 Not Used 12 Test Switch 8 Connect a 25 pair cable between the male RJ21 25 pair connector on the Emergency Transfer Panel and the yellow field of the MDF See Figure 5 18 Table 5 14 shows the pin assignments 9 Make cross connections for each emergency trunk emergency station pair See Figure 5 19 and Table 5 14 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Emergency Transfer Units and Associated Telephones Page 5 39 Table 5 14 Pin Assignments for 25 Pair Connector Pin Color Designation Connector Description 26 W BL TTC1 Tip
226. e is applied LEDs provide a visual indication of the operational status of hardware components the results of maintenance tests the alarm status of circuit packs and the activation of telephone features DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 30 lightwave transceiver Hardware that provides an interface to fiber optic cable from port circuit packs and DS1 converter circuit packs Lightwave transceivers convert electrical signals to light signals and vice versa line A transmission path between a communications system or CO switching system and a voice terminal or other terminal line appearance Seelappearance line buildout A selectable output attenuation is generally required of DTE equipment because T1 circuits require the last span to lose 15 22 5 dB line port Hardware that provides the access point to a communications system for each circuit associated with a telephone or data terminal link A transmitter receiver channel that connects two systems link access procedure on the D channel LAPD A link layer protocol on the ISDN BRI and ISDN PRI data link layer level 2 LAPD provides data transfer between two devices and error and flow control on multiple logical links LAPD is used for signaling and low speed packet data X 25 and mode 3 on the signaling D channel and for mode 3 data commu
227. e point unit ground 48V RTN DC power supply Cabinet Ground Block To CBC terminal block at MDF Coupled Bonding Conductor Sydtacde APY 021798 Figure 1 8 Typical Power and Ground for a Mixed AC DC Powered Cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Approved Grounds Page 1 23 Approved Grounds An approved ground is the closest acceptable medium for grounding the building entrance protector entrance cable shield or single point ground of electronic telephony equipment If more than 1 type of approved ground is available on the premises the grounds must be bonded together as required in Section 250 81 of the National Electrical Code Grounded Building Steel The metal frame of the building where it is effectively grounded by 1 of the following grounds acceptable metallic water pipe concrete encased ground or a ground ring Acceptable Water Pipe A metal underground water pipe at least 1 2 inch 1 3 cm in diameter in direct contact with the earth for at least 10 feet 3 m The pipe must be electrically continuous or made electrically continuous by bonding around insulated joints plastic pipe or plastic water meters to the point where the protector ground wire connects A metallic underground water pipe must be supplemented by the metal frame of the building
228. e translation card by entering the restore announcements command DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add Multiple Announcement Page 5 108 Replace a TN750B with a TN750C or Move all Announcements from a TN750B to a TN750C Use this procedure to replace a TN750B circuit pack with a TN750C circuit pack or to move every announcement from a TN750B to a TN750C gt NOTE Do not copy or restore announcements from a TN750C to a TN750 or TN750B circuit pack as this may corrupt the announcement data Save announcements from the TN750 B to the mass storage system Insert the TN750C circuit pack into a vacant slot of a carrier gt NOTE Any carrier is acceptable since power holdover is not a concern Lift the locking lever upward until the latch pin engages Administer a new data module on the TN750C circuit pack as described in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description Execute the restore announcements command to the TN750C circuit pack equipment location Wait until announcements copy from voice RAM to flash memory yellow LED on the TN750C stops flashing This may take about 10 minutes Execute the busyout board 01c11 command for the TN750 B circuit pack where 01c11 is an example circuit pack location
229. e used in a Uniform Call Distribution Direct Departmental Calling UCD DDC queue The lamp connects to an information outlet The system side of the MDF connects to an analog line circuit pack in a port carrier 1 Wire the queue warning indicator to the information outlet as shown in Figure 5 8 and Figure 5 9 2 Administer per DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment 1145B Power Supply Page 5 45 1145B Power Supply The 1145B closet power arrangement provides an uninterruptible 48 VDC power source with battery and 1145B distribution unit for ISDN DCP terminal equipment adjuncts and other customer supplied equipment During AC power interruptions batteries automatically provide power to the load A manual switch on the distribution unit allows the user to redirect reserve power to outputs 1 through 32 so all outputs are provided battery reserve power gt NOTE The switch must be set to the 1 32 position The 1145B 1146B is a 48V power supply with 200 Watts total output Each output circuit is current limited by a thermistor that limits the maximum output to 12 Watts Each 1145B output has an LED to indicate the status of the thermistor If the LED is on the thermistor has a short on that power
230. e version press Enter Check Page 2 of this form to see when the announcements were last saved To save the current announcements enter save announcements and press Enter Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System A WARNING Neglecting to shut down a DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly before powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the LAN Gateway disk A caution Save the system parameters if you plan to reuse the current system 1 Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway When the main menu appears select Maintenance Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu AA WO PY Select Shutdown from the Reset System menu Shut Down DEFINITY AUDIX System A WARNING Neglecting to shut down an AUDIX assembly before powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the AUDIX disk 1 Ifa DEFINITY AUDIX resides in the system to be upgraded shut down the AUDIX assembly and allow the disk to completely spin down DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add DS1 Tie and OPS Page 5 91 Power Down System gt NOTE Power down the PPN only if the existing Tone Clock is being replaced ina standard reliability system 1 At the PPN set the main circuit breaker to OFF 2 At each EPN set the main circuit breaker to OFF Add Circuit Packs 1 Determine the port assi
231. ead of emer In Call Type field enter emer On the next empty row in the Dialed String field type 911 In the 1 In the 1 Total Mn field enter 3 Total Mx field enter 3 Inthe Rte Pat field type the desired Route Pattern in the example above the route pattern is 12 gt NOTE For the following step if you are using the Attendant Crisis Alerting feature type alrt instead of emer Inthe Call Type field enter emer and press Enter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment CAMA E911 Installation Page 5 139 24 Atthe prompt type change route pattern lt numbers gt the route pattern to be changed in the example above the route pattern is 11 and press Enter a Page 1 of ry Pattern Number 11 Grp FRL NPA Pfx Hop Toll No Del Inserted IXC No Mrk Imt List Digits Digits sid 0 user a user ch user 4 user 5s user 6 user BCC VALUE TSC CA TSC ITC BCIE Service Feature Numbering LAR 01234W Request Format 1 yyyyyn y none both ept outwats bnd BAND ___ none 2 yyyyynioo7n rest next 3 yyyyyn n rest rehu 4 yyyyyneioon rest none 5 yyyyyn n rest none 6 amp yyyyyn n C rest ee Screen 5 6 Route Pattern form Page 1 25 On the Route Pattern screen in Grp No field enter the CAMA trunk group n
232. ecent change history reports available in the system and is intended for administrators who validate traffic reports and evaluate system performance Includes corrective actions for potential problems Issue 2 of this document was titled Traffic Reports The Release 5 version of this document applies to Release 6 as well DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Implementation Blank Forms Issue 3 555 230 303 Provides blank paper forms corresponding to the screens that are required to implement the features functions and services of the system The Release 5 forms apply to Release 6 as well BCS Products Security Handbook Issue 6 555 025 600 Provides information about the risks of telecommunications fraud and measures for addressing those risks and preventing unauthorized use of BCS products This document is intended for telecommunications managers console operators and security organizations within companies DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 E References Basic DEFINITY ECS Documents Page E 3 DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Terminals and Adjuncts Reference Issue 9 555 015 201 Provides descriptions of the peripheral equipment that can be used with System 75 System 85 DEFINITY Communications System and DEFINITY ECS This document is intended for customers and Lucent Technologies account teams for selecting the correct peripherals to accompany an ECS
233. eck Circuit Pack Configuration Verify the screen displays Command Type list configuration all and press Enter Issue 5 May 1998 Page 4 3 Verify the screen displays list configuration screens similar to the example shown below Check the report on the screen with the equipment installed and make sure the software is communicating with each circuit pack except power supply circuit packs Wait until after the diagnostic tests later in this chapter before attempting to correct any problems Note any circuit packs in the VINTAG PRESENT Of CONFLICT list configuration all Board Number 01C00 01C01 61C02 01003 01CO4 081C05 01CO6 01c09 01C13 press CANCEL to quit press NEXT PAGE to continue SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Board Type Code TONE DETECTOR TN748D CALL CLASSIFIER TN744C PGATE BOARD TN577 DATA LINE TN726B ANALOG LINE TN746B DIGITAL LINE TN7S4B MAINTENANCE TEST TN771D PGATE BOARD TN577 DSi INTERFACE Vintage 000001 000003 000006 000002 000004 000002 000004 000007 no board 01 01 01 01 u 09 01 u 01 u u u u 02 02 02 u 02 10 02 02 02 u u u u Screen 4 2 Example System Configuration Screen gt NOTE Under Assigned Ports a u indicates unassigned ports and a number indicates the port has been translated 03 03 04 03 04 u 04 u 0 il u 03 04 03 04 03 04 u u u u u u u u Page 05 06 07 05 06 07 08 u u u 0
234. ed TDM bus cables and intercabinet cables in the EPN 3 Repeat Step 2 for each installed Tone Clock circuit pack Test Tone Clock Interchange for each EPN Critical reliability only 1 Verify the screen displays Command 2 Type status system all cabinets and press Enter This displays the location of the Standby Tone Clock 3 Type set tone clock xxx where xxx is the port network carrier for the standby tone clock Press Enter 4 Type status system all cabinets and press Enter 5 Verify the duplicated Tone Clock is active using the information displayed on the screen If any problems are indicated check the TDM cables in the associated EPN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 4 Test the System Test Expansion Interface Exchange for Each EPN Page 4 11 Test Expansion Interface Exchange for Each EPN Critical reliability only 1 Verify the screen displays Command 2 Enter status cabinet lt 1 44 gt and press Enter This displays the standby expansion link before changes are made See Screen 4 9 foe system all cabinets b SYSTEM STATUS CABINET 1 EMERGENCY SELECT SERVICE CABINET TRANSFER SWITCH EXP LINK STATE MODE TYPE 1A unavail 01A01 02A01 in standby MCC 1B auto on 01B01 02B02 in active Command successfully completed Command Ne F Screen 4 9 Example of System Status Before Expansion Link is Set
235. ed on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment CAMA E911 Installation Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 133 Table 5 24 Compatibility Tone Clock TTR CPTR and GPTR Circuit Packs Continued Circuit Pack Description Compatibility with CAMA Trunks in Same PN Application Notes TN748 TN748B TN748C TN748D Touch Tone Detector Call Progress Tone Detector Not Compatible Used in the U S and a few other countries 4 TTR and 2 CPTR ports Used in combination with the TN756 TN768 or TN780 in many countries initially in versions prior to G3V3 3 Use TN744DV2 if CAMA feature is to be supported TN756 Tone Detector Generator Not Compatible Used in the U S and a few other countries Tone detec tor tone clock with 4 TTR and 2 CPTR ports Used in combination with the TN748 in many countries initially in ver sions prior to G3V3 3 Used only with SCC ESCC cabi nets with no EPNs no duplica tion no ASAI Use TN2182BV2 if CAMA feature is to be supported TN768 Tone Clock Not Affected Used in the U S and many other countries Tone clock only no TTR CPTR functionality Typ ically found with TN748 circuit packs in the U S Use TN7744DV2 instead of TN748 with CAMA Continued on next page DEFINITY E
236. eld in Step 3 5 Connect the other end 2 3 fingered end of the concentrator cables to the appropriate carrier slots Equipped carrier slots are identified on the CSD Mark the nomenclature strips above the carriers to identify the slots 6 Label connectors on each end of the cables that connect to the cabinet 7 Route the cables down the sides of the cabinet and store the excess cable slack in the cable slack manager as previously described DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Cable Installation Page 2 22 Q Q I AN Y A N aN Y Y c MN N N Y 9 5 6 3 4 NEW796 THC 031296 Figure Notes 1 Trunk Auxiliary Field 7 RJ21X RJ2GX Network Interface 2 To Control Carrier AUX Connector 8 Sneak Fuse Panel 3 Concentrator Cable WP90929 List 1 9 B25A Cable 4 Concentrator Cable WP90929 List 3 10 Central Office Trunks 5 A25D Male to Male Cable 11 System Cabinet 6 Alternate Block Rows Figure 2 12 Connect Trunk Pairs Using Concentrator Cables DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Cable Installation Page 2 23 Connect Trunk Pairs to Cabinet Using Jumper Wires To Establish 3 Pair Modularity Figure 2 13 on
237. ement ROSE S S1 The first logical signalling channel of DCP The channel is used to provide signaling information for DCP s I1 channel 2 The second logical signaling channel of DCP The channel is used to provide signaling information for DCP s 12 channel SABM Set Asynchronous Balance Mode SAC Send All Calls SAKI See sanity and control interface SAKI sanity and control interface SAKI A custom VLSI microchip located on each port circuit pack The SAKI provides address recognition buffering and synchronization between the angel and the five control time slots that make up the control channel The SAKI also scans and collects status information for the angel on its port circuit pack and when polled transmits this information to the archangel SAT System access terminal DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Glossary and Abbreviations SCC 1 See single carrier cabinet 2 Serial communications controller SCD Switch control driver SCI Switch communications interface SCO System control office SCOTCH Switch Conferencing for TDM Bus in Concentration Highway SCSI See small computer system interface SCSI SDDN Software Defined Data Network SDI Switched Digital International SDLC Synchronous data link control SDN Software defined network SFRL Single frequency return loss SID Station identifi
238. ent System CMS An application running on an adjunct processor that collects information from an ACD unit CMS enables customers to monitor and manage telemarketing centers by generating reports on the status of agents splits trunks trunk groups vectors and VDNs and enables customers to partially administer the ACD feature for a communications system call reference value CRV An identifier present in ISDN messages that associates a related sequence of messages In ASAI CRVs distinguish between associations call vector A set of up to 15 vector commands to be performed for an incoming or internal call callback call A call that automatically returns to a voice terminal user who activated the Automatic Callback or Ringback Queuing feature call waiting ringback tone A low pitched tone identical to ringback tone except that the tone decreases in the last 0 2 seconds in the United States Call waiting ringback tone notifies the attendant that the Attendant Call Waiting feature is activate and that the called party is aware of the waiting call Tones in international countries may sound different call work code A number up to 16 digits entered by ACD agents to record the occurrence of customer defined events such as account codes social security numbers or phone numbers on ACD calls CAMA Centralized Automatic Message Accounting carrier An enclosed shelf containing vertical slots that hold circuit packs carried load T
239. ent flows 2 A channel or transmission path between two or more points circuit pack A card on which electrical circuits are printed and IC chips and electrical components are installed A circuit pack is installed in a switch carrier CISPR International Special Committee on Radio Interference Class of Restriction COR A feature that allows up to 64 classes of call origination and call termination restrictions for voice terminals voice terminal groups data modules and trunk groups See also Class of Service COS Class of Service COS A feature that uses a number to specify if voice terminal users can activate the Automatic Callback Call Forwarding All Calls Data Privacy or Priority Calling features See also Class of Restriction COR DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 13 cm Centimeter CM Connection Manager CMC Compact Modular Cabinet CMDR Centralized Message Detail Recording CMS Call Management System co See central office CO common control switching arrangement CCSA A private telecommunications network using dedicated trunks and a shared switching center for interconnecting company locations communications system The software controlled processor complex that interprets dialing pulses tones and keyboard characters and makes the proper connections both within the
240. ephone set is a typical example of an analog telephone analog to digital converter ADC A device that converts an analog signal to digital form See alsojdigital to analog converter DAC angel A microprocessor located on each port card in a processor port network PPN The angel uses the control channel message set CCMS to manage communications between the port card and the archangel on the controlling switch processing element SPE The angel also monitors the status of other microprocessors on a port card and maintains error counters and thresholds ANI See Automatic Number Identification ANI ANSI American National Standards Institute A United States professional technical association supporting a variety of standards answerback code A number used to respond to a page from a code calling or loudspeaker paging system or to retrieve a parked call AOL Attendant offered load AP Applications processor APLT Advanced Private Line Termination DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 5 appearance A software process that is associated with an extension and whose purpose is to supervise a call An extension can have multiple appearances Also called call appearance line appearance and occurrence See alsojcall appearance application An adjunct that requests and receives ASAI services or cap
241. er 6 Test Telephones and Other Equipment How to test the equipment installed in Chapter 5 How to Comment on This Book Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback Please fill out the reader comment card at the front of this book and return it Your comments are of great value and help improve our documentation If the reader comment card is missing fax your comments to 1 303 538 1741 or to your Lucent Technologies representative and mention this document s name and number DEFINITY Enterprise Communication Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 About This Book Related Books Page x Related Books The following books are useful for system related information DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 System Description Pocket Reference 555 230 211 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6r 555 230 126 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs si 555 230 127 AT amp T Network and Data Connectivity Reference 555 025 201 BCS Products Security Handbook 555 025 600 DEFINITY Wireless Business System Users Guide 555 232 105 DEFINITY Wireless Business System Installation and Test Guide 555 232 102 DEFINITY Wireless Business Systems System Interface 555 232 108 DEFI
242. er Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Activate the System Page 3 7 Set Up Management Terminal Each management terminal requires a different setup procedure Refer to the installation and usage instructions packed with the management terminal Install Management Applications The PC based Management Applications are installed according to the complete installation instructions provided in Management Applications Operations 585 229 202 Activate the System Instructions are provided to activate Release 6 and later systems To activate a G3V4 and earlier system refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Installation and Test 555 230 104 gt NOTE To prevent unnecessary trouble tickets do not enable the system alarms Alarm Origination feature until all installation and administration procedures are completed A caution It may be necessary to reseat circuit packs To prevent damage from static electricity always wear an Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC wrist strap comcode 900698226 when handling all system components Install Translation Card Release 6si in MCC Cabinet If a Release 6r system is installed skip this section 1 Insert the translation card into the TN777B Network Control circuit pack in the direction indicated by the arrow on the label Power Up the System AC Powered System 1 Set the circuit breakers on the AC power panel to ON If the system
243. er Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 E References Application Specific Documents Page E 7 ACD DEFINITY ECS Release 6 CallVisor ASAI DEFINITY LAN Gateway over MAP D Installation Administration and Maintenance of Issue 1 555 230 114 Provides procedures for installation administration and maintenance of the CallVisor Adjunct Switch Application Interface ASAI Ethernet application over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway and is intended for system administrators telecommunications managers Management Information System MIS managers LAN managers and Lucent personnel The ASAI Ethernet application provides ASAI functionality using 10Base T Ethernet rather than BRI as a transport media DEFINITY ECS Release 6 CallVisor ASAI PC LAN over MAP D Installation Administration and Maintenance of Issue 1 555 230 113 Provides procedures for installation administration and maintenance of the CallVisor Adjunct Switch Application Interface ASAI Ethernet application over the PC LAN and is intended for system administrators telecommunications managers Management Information System MIS managers LAN managers and Lucent personnel The ASAI Ethernet application provides ASAI functionality using 10Base T Ethernet rather than BRI as a transport media DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Call Visor ASAI Overview Issue 2 555 230 225 Provides a general description of Call Visor ASAI This document is available in the following languages English German
244. er the following conditions If liquid has been spilled into any of the products If any of the products have been exposed to water If any of the products do not operate normally If any of the products have been dropped or damaged If any of the products exhibits a change in performance Do not attempt to recharge batteries on your own The batteries may leak corrosive electrolyte or explode The 1145B power unit recharges the batteries safely Remove the batteries if the power unit will not be used for a long period of time several months or more since during this time the battery may leak a Discard discharged batteries as soon as possible Discharged batteries are more likely to leak Donotstore batteries in high temperature areas Batteries stored in a cold environment should be protected from condensation during storage and warming Batteries should be stabilized at room temperature prior to use after cold storage Do not install batteries if the manufacturing date on the label indicates that the batteries are more than 6 months old DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment 1151A Power Supply Page 5 54 1151A Power Supply The 1151A and 1151A2 Power Supplies comply with the UL Standard UL 1459 second edition Safety instructions follow the table of certifications
245. erminal screen displays Command 2 Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter Verify the screen displayed is similar to Screen 3 5 The screen shows default values and the cursor is positioned on Product Identification line change system parameters maintenance Page 1 of 3 SPE A MAINTENANCE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS OPERATIONS SUPPORT PARAMETERS Product Identification 1000000000 First OSS Telephone Number Abbrev Alarm Report y Second OSS Telephone Number Abbrev Alarm Report n Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers neither Cleared Alarm Notification Restart Notification Test Remote Access Port CPE Alarm Activation Level Packet Bus Activated y Customer Access to INADS Port n Repeat Dial Interval mins 1_ Suspension Threshold 5 In 13 Ia e M SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE Start Time Oi 00 Stop Time 03 00 Daily Maintenance daily Save Translation no Control Channel Interchange daily System Clocks Interchange daily SPE Interchange daily EXP LINK Interchange daily Screen 3 5 Typical System Parameters Maintenance Screen A CAUTION To prevent unnecessary trouble tickets do not enable the system alarms Alarm Origination feature until all installation and administration procedures are completed 3 Move the cursor by pressing Tab to move down the screen from field to field and enter yin the Packet Bus Activated field to indicate a TN778 circuit pack is installed This is the only field
246. erred device For installations not using primary protection 4 type protectors should always be used When the 3 type protector is already installed a separate sneak current protector is required The multi pair protector units and the off premises cabling must be locally engineered Connectorized multi pair protector units female 25 pair connector are recommended Table 5 11 shows the recommended protectors Table 5 11 Analog Line Circuit Protectors Protectors Primary Sneak Current Primary with heat coil Protectors 3B1A carbon 4B1C carbon 220029 Fuse 3B1E W 4B1E W SCP 1 wide gap gas tube wide gap gas tube 3018S 4C1S solid state solid state 1 The 3 type protectors should only be used if they are already part of the existing protection system A sneak current protector is always required when a 3 type primary protector is used 2 The 3 type protectors should only be used if they are already part of the existing protection system A sneak current protector is always required when a 3 type primary protector is used The maximum range of out of building analog telephones 500 2500 or 7100 types connected to an analog line circuit pack should be such that the maximum loop resistance does not exceed 1300 ohms The following voice terminals telephones cannot be installed in an exposed environment a 7300 type voice terminals connected to TN762 Hybrid Line circuit packs a Multi button Elect
247. ers the trough Mating Cross Aisle Risers to Old Cabinet Risers The new shielded ductwork is constructed so cross aisle risers can be attached to cabinet risers of the former design 1 Remove the shielded coupling from the old cabinet riser This assembly is illustrated in the older system s installation document 2 Replace the shielded coupling with a cross aisle riser Set the cross aisle riser C in Figure C 6 on the cabinet riser A Position the cross aisle riser so the two holes on the back wall line up with the holes on the back wall of the cabinet riser Bolt the two pieces together at the holes just described oldduct KLC 071796 Figure Notes 1 A 3 F 2 C 4 G Figure C 6 Mating Cross Aisle Risers to System 85 R2 Cabinet Risers 3 Assemble cross aisle ductwork as already described DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork Page C 12 Mating Shielded Ducts to Risers The new shielded ductwork is constructed so new cross aisle troughs can be attached to risers of the former design They fit outside of the older risers To attach the new shielded trough to a riser first set it under the trough on the riser and install the other side of the trough as already described Lift the trough as shown in Figure C 7 with the walls of the trough outside of the walls of the riser Hold a nut under the trough
248. erver Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Connector and Cable Diagrams Pinout Charts Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 145 Table 5 26 shows the pinouts for the TN2185 ISDN BRI 4 wire S Interface Table 5 26 TN2185 ISDNBRI 4 Wire S Interface Pinout Port Signal Cross ConnectPin Color Amphenol Pin Backplane Pin 1 TXT 1 1 W BL 26 102 TXR 1 2 BL W 01 002 PXT 1 3 W O 27 103 PXR 1 4 O W 02 003 2 TXT 2 5 W G 28 104 TXR 2 6 G W 03 004 PXT 2 7 W BR 29 105 PXR 2 8 BR W 04 005 3 TXT 3 9 W SL 30 106 TXR 3 10 SL W 05 006 PXT 3 11 R BL 31 107 PXR 3 12 BL R 06 007 4 TXT 4 13 R O 32 108 TXR 4 14 O R 07 008 PXT 4 15 R G 33 109 PXR 4 16 G R 08 009 5 TXT 5 17 R BR 34 110 TXR 5S 18 BR R 09 010 PXT 5 19 R SL 35 111 PXR 5 20 SL R 10 011 6 TXT 6 21 BK BL 36 112 TXR 6 22 BL BK 11 012 PXT 6 23 BK O 37 113 PXR 6 24 O BK 12 013 7 TXT 7 25 BK G 38 302 TXR 7 26 G BK 13 202 PXT 7 27 BK BR 39 303 PXR 7 28 BR BK 14 203 8 TXT 8 29 BK SL 40 304 TXR 8 30 SL BK 15 204 PXT 8 31 Y BL 41 305 PXR 8 32 BL Y 16 205 5 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Connector and Cable Diagrams Pinout Charts Page 5 146 Table 5 27 shows the pinouts for the TN2198
249. ested this information must be provided to the telephone company The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local telephone company gt NOTE REN is not required for some types of analog or digital facilities DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 About This Book Federal Communications Commission Statement Page xvii Means of Connection Connection of this equipment to the telephone network is shown in the following table U S only SOC REN Manufacturer s Port Identifier FIC Code A S Code Network Jacks Off On Premises Station OL13C 9 0F RJ2GX RJ21X RJ11C DID Trunk 02RV2 T 0 0B RJ2GX RJ21X CO Trunk 02GS2 0 3A RJ21X CO Trunk 02LS2 3 0A RJ21X Tie Trunk TL31M 9 0F RJ2GX 1 544 Digital Interface 04DU9 B C 6 0F RJ48C RJ48M 1 544 Digital Interface 04DU9 BN KN 6 0F RJ48C RJ48M 120A2 Channel Service Unit 04DU9 DN 6 0F RJ48C If the terminal equipment DEFINITY System causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that te
250. et 2 through 15 EPN 4 To other EPNs Figure 1 12 High Reliability CSS Connected with 1 Switch Node DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Fiber Optic Interconnect Cabling Page 1 33 Critical Reliability Figure 1 13 shows typical fiber optic cabling between cabinets The cable between port slots 1 and 2 on each switch node is a metallic cable H600 278 1 Connect the 2 groups of 1 to 15 cables between the PPN and each EPN in an alternating port slot order 20 3 19 4 18 5 and so forth 9 MMMM LUU NWY MU SM UUU AW CEH MUM S LMU SK cadfer1 KLC 063097 Q Figure Notes 1 Cabinet 1 PPN with 1 Duplex Switch 3 H600 278 Metallic Cable Mode 4 To other EPNs 2 Cabinet 2 through 16 EPN Figure 1 13 Critical Reliability CSS Connected with 1 Switch Node 2 Both connections from each EPN must go to the same slot number For example EPN cabinet 2 2A1 to 1E3 and cabinet 2 2B2 to 1D3 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Earthquake Protection Installation Pa
251. etwork Interface a N1654 DS1 Converter Release 6r Only a Off Premises Station Wiring n N oo a Off Premises or Out of Building Stations a m 3 Oo Q oO 5 O lt je 5 72 n Oo Cc 3 on je 5 a gt n n O O fed oO a 2 oO O 7 5 oO on cs ee o ri A a External Ringing lt i amp A a Queue Warning Indicator iri p s a a 1145B Power Supply sh on A a 1151A Power Supply q a N a BRI Terminating Resistor a1 O a Multi point Adapters m Add Circuit Packs a List of Circuit Packs rh A i a a DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Contents Page vi a Add the Fiber Optic Cable a Add CO FX WATS and PCOL a Add DID Trunks a Add Tie Trunks a Add DS1 Tie and OPS a Add Code Calling Access a Add Speech Synthesis a Add Pooled Modem a Add External Modem to EPN a Add External Modem to PPN a Add External Modem to TN1648B a Add Multiple Announcement Add ISDN PRI a Add Packet Bus to R si a Add CallVisor ASAI a Add ISDN BRI a Add PRI Over PACCON to R6si a CAMA E911 Installation a Connector and Cable Diagrams Pinout Charts n O oo a o a 2x w o oy _ ad a LR De _ k a IN E S oy i w
252. ew 7 11 16 inches 19 5 cm to right of the screw just installed Repeat Steps 3 4 and 5 If installing a vertical patch cord trough in the distribution field repeat Step 6 Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until all the terminal blocks and vertical patch cord troughs in the distribution field are installed Frame Mounting 110P Type Terminal Blocks The 900 pair 110P type terminal blocks and the associated patch cord troughs can also be mounted on a free standing floor mounted 1110A2 Apparatus Mounting Frame See DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Install Equipment and Cables Page 2 10 1781401 LJK 040896 Figure Notes 1 1110C1 Apparatus Mounting 4 88 5 Inches 225 cm 2 1110A2 Apparatus Mounting 5 43 5 Inches 110 5 cm 3 76 Inches 193 cm Figure 2 5 1110A2 and 1110C1 Apparatus Mountings Each 1110A2 provides the space to mount 5 terminal blocks patch cord troughs on each side of the frame A cable support structure apparatus mounting 1110C1 mounts directly on top of the 1110A2 and provides support for all cables routed to and from the frame DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Install Equipment and Cables Apparatus Mounting Frame Ordering Information
253. f Cabinet Group 9 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork Page C 17 Install AC Power Duct Refer to Figure C 12 and assemble the ductwork 1 O oa A O Hang AC power duct group 12 through 16 and 21 on back of shielded duct and anchor in place using one thread forming screw at each cabinet If required slide utility outlet assembly part of group 18 into the duct from the end Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each cabinet Interconnect ducts with couplings using four round head machine screws Insert 4 wire holders into each duct spaced evenly along duct If equipped with an AC outlet snap two group 18 raceway covers into place onto the AC power ducts If not equipped with an AC outlet snap a group 17 raceway cover into place onto the AC power ducts If required attach group 19 combination end cap by using two round head machine screws Assemble the ladder rack as shown in Figure C 13 on page C 19 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork Page C 18 Figure Notes 1 Raceway Cover Twist Lock Receptacle Thread Forming Screw Combination Endcap Conduit Knockout O Power Duct duct8 KLC 071796 7 Rear of Shielded Duct 8 Coupling 9 Typical Utility Outlet
254. fer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description for more information The following information describes general circuit pack administration information a Use the Circuit Packs form to administer circuit packs to carrier slots Install or administer the circuit packs or assigned using the Circuit Packs form before administering voice terminals attendant consoles or trunks b Each page of the form represents 1 carrier in the cabinet shown on the command line c Refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Planning and Configuration 555 230 601 for more information about circuit pack administration and port assignment records d For initial installation assign circuit packs to slots using the hardware configuration layout record from the factory or Customer Services Organization Do not arbitrarily assign circuit packs to slots e If the carrier type administered on the Cabinet Administration form does not match the physical hardware question marks may display in the Code fields f When a circuit pack in a slot differs from what has been administered on the form a displays between the Sfx and Name fields to indicate a conflict g For Release 6r the number of slot fields displayed represents administrable slots for the given carrier type DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier
255. for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add Tie Trunks Page 5 87 Add Tie Trunks Requirements Each tie trunk connects to 1 port of a 4 port TN760 or to an assortment of non United States tie trunk circuit packs Installation il Determine the port assignment of the trunk from Trunk Group form Port Number 3 A 02 01 Cabinet Carrier Slot Circuit Port Network or Single Carrier 2 Cabinet Install a TN760 or a non United States tie trunk circuit pack in the assigned carrier slot if an additional circuit pack is required For customer owned not leased tie trunk facilities such as campus environments TN760 circuit packs provide signaling capabilities beyond those specified by the industry wide E amp M standard Use Figure 5 41 Jand Table 5 180 choose the preferred signaling format set switches on the TN760 circuit pack and administer the port Administer forms listed under Tie Trunk Group in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add Tie Trunks Page 5 88 UNPROT tazi SMPLX SMPLX SMPLX SMPLX PROT oo oo oo oo PORT 4 PORT 3 PORT 2 PORT 1 E amp M E amp M E amp M E
256. g is completed a l O cable duct Provides the path for I O cables to the Main Distribution Frame MDF The I O cables originate at connectors on the rear of the cabinets and terminate on connectors at the MDF a AC power duct Provides the path for the AC wiring that powers the system This duct mounts to the rear of the shielded duct that runs across each cabinet Five group numbers provide various arrangements of receptacles necessary for different types of cabinets Knockouts are provided for 1 inch 2 54 cm 1 5 inch 3 81 cm or 2 inch 5 cm conduits that provide AC power connection at one end of each cabinet lineup Covers for the power duct should be stored until the AC wiring is completed Three methods are available for running I O cables from the I O ducts to the MDF 1 Using an overhead cable rack 2 Using cable duct groups 22 through 26 and 39 3 Using multiples of either group as required DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork Page C 2 Equipment room layout and expected growth determines which method to use Installation of an overhead rack is covered by Cable Racks 800 614 157 gt NOTE Install all screws in all appropriate places to comply with electromagnetic interference EMI requirements for shielding duct1 KLC 071796 Figure Notes 1 I O Cross Isle Trough 4 Front of Cabine
257. ge 1 34 Earthquake Protection Installation Install Concrete Floor Mounting T Position the cabinet in the exact position it is to occupy when the installation is complete Insert a pencil or marker through the holes previously occupied by the carriage bolts front and rear in the bottom of the cabinet and mark the floor directly beneath each hole Roll the cabinet out of the way and drill four 1 2 inch 1 27 cm diameter holes about 1 5 inches 3 8 cm deep at the locations marked in Step 2 Insert concrete floor anchors STARR part number 3425 into the holes 5 Roll the cabinet back into place and align the cabinet holes over the concrete floor anchors Adjust the leveling legs until the cabinet is level See Figure 1 14 gt NOTE If the system is supplied with cable ductwork the cabinets must be level from front to rear and from side to side They must be square with respect to each other to within 1 8 inch 0 3 cm Secure the cabinet to the floor with the 4 supplied 3 8 16 x 4 5 inch 11 4 cm bolts and four 3 8 inch flat washers Repeat this procedure for each cabinet to be installed Install Raised Computer Floor Mounting 1 Position the cabinet in the exact position it is to occupy when the installation is complete Insert a pencil or marker through the holes previously occupied by the carriage bolts front and rear in the bottom of the cabinets and mark the raised floor panels
258. gnments of the circuit packs to be added 2 Install the TN722B DS1 Tie Trunk the TN767C DS1 Interface or TN464C DS1 Interface circuit pack in assigned carrier slot 3 Replace an existing TN756 Tone Detector Generator circuit pack with a TN768 TN780 or a non United States TN419B Tone Clock b TN748B or a non United States TN420B Tone Detector Install Cables Install H600 307 cable from the cabinet to a Channel Service Unit CSU and install cables from the CSU to the MDF as required Power Up System 1 At each EPN set the main circuit breaker to ON 2 Atthe PPN set the main circuit breaker to ON 3 The system performs the level 4 rebooting process loading the system translations from the translation card or tape Rebooting takes 8 to 11 minutes 4 After the system reboot is finished and all trouble is cleared verify that the EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO This restores the system to the normal mode Enter Added Translations Administer forms listed under DS1 Tie Trunk Service in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add DS1 Tie and OPS Page 5 92 Save Translations 1 If the system is high or critical reliability enter status system 1 and press Enter to ver
259. gure Notes 1 Green Field 3 Pairs 2 1 Pair Jumpers 4 Purple Field Figure 2 14 3 Pair Modularity for Trunk Pairs for 3 Pair Tie Trunks Install Cables Between Cabinet and MDF 1 Install D rings on the wall between the cable slack manager and the terminal connecting blocks mounted on the MDF 2 Install a self adhesive port label on the back of each connector on the connector cable Labels should be positioned so they are not covered by the cabinet connector retainers 3 At the rear of the cabinet connect 1 end of the connector cable to the assigned connector 4 Route the cable down the rear of the cabinet through the cable slack manager and to the MDF 5 At the MDF connect the other end of the cable to the assigned terminal connecting block connector 6 Store the cable slack in the cable slack manager 7 Repeat Steps 2 through 6 until all cables are installed DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Cable Installation Page 2 25 Install Connector Cables Between Auxiliary Cabinet and MDF Auxiliary equipment that connects to the MDF can be mounted inside the Auxiliary cabinet The equipment connects to an ED 1E1443 10 Group 1 intraconnection panel mounted in the cabinet This intraconnection panel consists of a 110 type 100 pair wiring block Auxiliary equipment is connected to t
260. h an overall digital rate of 1 536 Mbps and an 8 kbps framing and synchronization channel make up the 1 544 Mbps transmission When a D channel is present it occupies channel 24 T1 facilities are also used in Japan and some Middle Eastern countries TAAS Trunk Answer from Any Station TABS Telemetry asynchronous block serial TAC Trunk access code tandem switch A switch within an electronic tandem network ETN that provides the logic to determine the best route for a network call possibly modifies the digits outpulsed and allows or denies certain calls to certain users tandem through The switched connection of an incoming trunk to an outgoing trunk without human intervention tandem tie trunk network TTTN A private network that interconnects several customer switching systems TC Technical consultant TCM Traveling class mark DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 48 TDM See time division multiplexing TDM TDR Time of day routing TEG Terminating extension group terminal A device that sends and receives data within a system See alsojadministration terminal tie trunk A telecommunications channel that directly connects two private switching systems time division multiplex TDM bus A bus that is time shared regularly by preallocating short time slots to each transmitter
261. hannel on each facility and the other facilities that share the D channels are configured without D channels NPA Numbering plan area NPE Network processing element NQC Number of queued calls NSE Night service extension NSU Network sharing unit null modem cable Special wiring of an RS 232 C cable such that a computer can talk to another computer or to a printer without a modem NXX Public network office code O OA Operator assisted occurrence Seelappearance DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 37 OCM Outbound Call Management offered load The traffic that would be generated by all the requests for service occurring within a monitored interval usually one hour ONS On premises station OPS Off premises station OPX Off premises extension OQT Oldest queued time OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act OSI Open Systems Interconnect OSS Operations Support System OSSI Operational Support System Interface OTDR Optical time domain reflectometer othersplit The work state that indicates that an agent is currently active on another split s call or in ACW for another split OTL Originating Test Line OTQ Outgoing trunk queuing outgoing gateway A PBX that routes an incoming call on a trunk administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B to
262. harger Install the shorting cable only when a battery charger is not installed DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect AC Power and Ground Page 1 15 psdfsht KLC 111296 Figure Notes 1 Shorting Cable H600 442 G1 If 2 J11 Battery Charger is Not Installed Figure 1 5 Shorting Cable Installation 1 Set the circuit breakers on the power distribution unit OFF See Figure 1 5 2 At the rear of the cabinet insert the shorting cable H600 442 G1 into J11 The cable is keyed so it can fit only 1 way Connect AC Power 1 Set the main circuit breakers on the power distribution unit OFF 2 Connect cabinet AC line cords to the AC power receptacles 3 Do not power up the system at this time DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect DC Power and Ground Page 1 16 Connect DC Power and Ground Power Distribution Unit J58890CH 1 Only Rectifier Modules and Battery Interface Unit Each rectifier module operates as an integral part of a complete power system with battery backup The modules operate in a redundant high reliability mode to provide 48 VDC at 850 Watts to a common power bus The Battery Interface Unit BIU controls the rectifier modules manages
263. he front of the power distribution unit The circuit breakers on the rear of the power distribution unit control the individual carriers See Figure 1 4 for the location of the carrier breakers 1 Set the main circuit breaker to OFF 2 Set the carrier circuit breakers to OFF DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect DC Power and Ground Page 1 21 7 Connect DC Power to PPN and EPN Cabinets 1 2 Be sure the main circuit breaker is OFF Measure and cut a piece of 6 AWG 40 16 mm wire long enough to reach from the DC Power Cabinet to the PPN cabinet Atthe DC Power Cabinet connect the 48 volt DC wire to the DC OUTPUT circuit breaker See Figure 1 7 Connect the 48 volt RTN return wire to the ground discharge bar Route the wires out of the cabinet through the hole in the lower rear cover and to the PPN cabinet Connect the 48 volt DC wire to the 48VDC terminal on the J58890CF Power Distribution Unit Connect the 48 volt RTN wire to the 48RTN terminal on the J58890CF Power Distribution Unit terminal block Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for each EPN and Auxiliary cabinet in the system 8 Connect DC Battery Cabinet to DC Power Cabinet A CAUTION When using battery backup each cabinet in the system must have a dedicated battery backup The battery backup p
264. he 110 type wiring block The wiring block is pre wired to four 25 pair female connectors mounted on the outside rear of the cabinet 1 Install D rings on the wall between the cable slack manager and the terminal connecting blocks mounted on the MDF Install a self sticking port label on the rear of each connector on the B25A connector cable See Figure 2 9 on page 2 17 gt NOTE Labels should be positioned so they will not be obscured by the cabinet connector retainers At the rear of the Auxiliary cabinet connect 1 end of the connector cable to the assigned connector Route the cable down the rear of the cabinet and through the cable slack manager to the MDF At the MDF connect the other end of the cable to the assigned terminal connecting block connector Store the excess cable in the cable slack manager Repeat Steps 2 through 6 until all cables are installed DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Install Coupled Bonding Conductor Page 2 26 Install Coupled Bonding Conductor The Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC connects to the single point ground block and runs adjacent to pairs in an associated telecommunications cable See Figure 2 15 The mutual coupling between the CBC and the wire pairs reduces potential differences in terminating equipment The conducto
265. he amount of traffic served by traffic sensitive facilities during a given interval CARR POW Carrier Port and Power Unit for AC Powered Systems CAS Centralized Attendant Service or Call Accounting System CCS or hundred call seconds A unit of call traffic Call traffic for a facility is scanned every 100 seconds If the facility is busy it is assumed to have been busy for the entire scan interval There are 3600 seconds per hour The Roman numeral for 100 is the capital letter C The abbreviation for call seconds is CS Therefore 100 call seconds is abbreviated CCS If a facility is busy for an entire hour then it is said to have been busy for 36 CCS See also Erlang DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 11 capability A request or indication of an operation For example Third Party Make Call is a request for setting up acall event reportis an indication that an event has occurred capability group Set of capabilities determined by switch administration that can be requested by an application Capability groups denote association types For example Call Control is a type of association that allows certain functions the ones in the capability group to be performed over this type of association Also referred to as administration groups or application service elements ASEs CA TSC Call Associated Tem
266. he printer control panel Power Alarm Line Form On Feed Feed 1781610 RBP 071096 Figure Notes 1 Power On Button 4 On Line Button 2 Alarm Button 5 Line Feed Button 3 Print Quality Button 6 Form Feed Button Figure B 1 Control Panel for 572 Printer 1 Load the printer with paper and turn the power off Callout 1 2 Simultaneously press and hold the Print Quality and On Line buttons 3 Press the Power On button Release all three buttons The printer is now in set up mode and it prints the following settings Form length Buzzer on off Lines per inch Letter quality or near letter quality Characters per inch If the printer is used with a management terminal CDR or as a Journal printer set the options as shown in Table B 2 If the printer is used as the system printer set the options as shown in Table B 3 on page B 7 4 Use Line Feed to step forward through the list of functions or use Form Feed to step backward 5 Press On Line This activates the menu for the function Use Line Feed and Form Feed to step through the options for the function 6 When a desired option is located press Print Quality Each time an option is set the setting is printed Repeat Step 4 for each option to be set 7 When finished press Print Quality The printer changes to normal mode DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 B Option Switch Settings
267. he screen displays the Date and Time screen See Screen 3 4 The cursor is positioned on the Day of the Week field set time Page d of 1 SPE Al DATE AND TIME DATE Day of the Week Monday Month March Day of the Month 10 Year 1997 TIME Hour 9 Second 25 Minute 1 WARNING Changing the date or time will impact BCMS CDR and MEASUREMENTS Screen 3 4 Typical Date and Time Screen 3 Type the day of the week in English Sunday through Saturday See Table 3 2 for English day of the week names Table 3 2 English Day of the Week Names Day Number Day Name 1 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday N QO or B W P Saturday DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Set Country Options Page 3 16 4 The cursor is positioned on the Month field Type the current month in English January through December See Table 3 3 for English month names After the month is entered press Tab to move to next field Table 3 3 English Month Names Month Number Month Name 1 January February March April May June July August O dODINIOD a AJOJN September October 4 oO November i N December 5 The cursor is positioned on the Day of the Month field Ty
268. i Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add PRI Over PACCON to R6si Page 5 126 Since the packet bus is required with PRI Over PACCON the TN778 Packet Control circuit pack should be added first If the system is not equipped with a packet bus see Add Packet Bus to R6si on page 5 113 If EPNs reside in the system replace every TN776 El circuit pack with a TN570 El to provide packet based communication between the PPN and each EPN Remove an existing TN756 Tone Detector Generator circuit pack and install the TN768 TN780 or TN419B Tone Clock circuit pack in assigned carrier slot if required 3 Determine port assignment of port circuit packs to be added 4 Install the TN464 circuit pack in assigned carrier slot as required For Install Cables T example Port Number 3 B 02 01 Cabinet Carrier Slot Circuit Port Network Install the TN748B or the non United States TN420B Tone Detector circuit packs as required Install cables from the cabinet to the MDF as required Power Up System 1 At each EPN set the main circuit breaker to ON 2 Atthe PPN set the main circuit breaker to ON 3 The system performs a level 4 reboot loading the system translations from the translation card or tape Rebooting takes several minutes After the system reboot is finished and all trouble is cleared verify the EMERGENCY TRANS
269. iber Interconnection Cable 100 Feet 30 48 m 407598374 Fiber Interconnection Cable 125 Feet 38 1 m 407598390 Fiber Interconnection Cable 150 Feet 45 7 m 407598408 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Optical Cross Connect Hardware Page A 6 Optical Cross Connect Hardware Optical cross connects consist of a preterminated lightguide shelf or Lightguide Interconnect Unit LIU with lightguide troughs A multi mode or single mode fiber optic cable connects the lightwave transceivers on the DEFINITY System to connector panels inside the shelf or LIU Circuits can be changed by moving the patch cord from 1 point on the connector panel to another Measuring Single Mode Power in the Field The data pattern on the link influences the optical power measurement The duty cycle that the transceiver is sending when the DEFINITY System is idle is a 30 on 1 and 70 off 0 data pattern This implies that the optical reading will be about 2 3dB less than the typical output power specification 8dBm Calculate all power budget analysis at 50 duty cycle for both transmitter output power and receiver sensitivity The following information is provided for field troubleshooting use only and is not intended for fiber budget analysis The power measurement is taken from the TX connector through the e
270. ich an agent is on an ACD call ACD work mode See work mode active notification association A link that is initiated by an adjunct allowing it to receive event reports for a specific switch entity such as an outgoing call active notification call A call for which event reports are sent over an active notification association communication channel to the adjunct Sometimes referred to as a monitored call active notification domain VDN or ACD split extension for which event notification has been requested ACU See Automatic calling unit ACU AD See Abbreviated Dialing AD ADAP AUDIX Data Acquisition Package ADC Seelanalog to digital converter ADC adjunct A processor that does one or more tasks for another processor and that is optional in the configuration of the other processor See also application adjunct control association A relationship initiated by an application via Third Party Make Call the Third Party Take Control or Domain Station Control capabilities to set up calls and control calls already in progress adjunct controlled call Call that can be controlled using an adjunct control association Call must have been originated via Third Party Make Call or Domain Station Control capabilities or must have been taken control of via Third Party Take Control or Domain Station Control capabilities DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrie
271. ify that the system is in the active standby mode 2 Enter save translation and press Enter This instructs the system to take all translation information in memory and write it to the translation card or tape 3 If the PPN contains a TN750 Announcement circuit pack enter list configuration software version and press Enter If Page 2 of this form shows that recorded announcements were saved these announcements can be restored using the restore announcements command Enter restore announcements and press Enter Enable Customer Options 1 Enter change system parameters customer options and press Enter 2 Use these forms to verify the customer options are properly set gt NOTE Inthe Basic Call Setup field if ISDN PRI was set to y before the upgrade be sure to set the field back to y Resolve Alarms Examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance R6vs si Contact INADS to Enable Customer Options and Verify Alarm Origination Be sure the system is part of the existing INADS database by calling the INADS Database Administrator at the Technical Service Center TSC Verify that INADS can dial into the system and that the system can dial out to INADS As part of the system registration process the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination and enables customer options DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue
272. ify that the system is in the active standby mode 2 Enter save translation and press Enter This instructs the system to write all translation information to the translation card or the tape Power Down the Control Carrier gt NOTE For a high or critical reliability system do not power down both control carriers at the same time This defeats the duplication feature of the system 1 Power down the control carrier and install the appropriate circuit packs See Table 5 22 Table 5 22 Circuit Pack Locations for Packet Bus in PPN Circuit Pack Carrier Quantity Slot TN778 Control Carrier A 2 PACKET CONT Control CarrierB 2 PACKET CONT TN570 Control Carrier A 1 or 2 EXPN INTFC 1 and 2 Control CarrierB 10r2 EXPN INTFC 1 and 2 TN771C Control Carrier A 1 Any Available Port Slot 1 Quantity of this pack should equal the number of EPNs 2 Required for critical reliability PPN Optional for digital trunk testing in high reliability PPN DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add Packet Bus to R6si Page 5 116 Table 5 23 Circuit Pack Locations for Packet Bus in Each EPN Circuit Pack Carrier Quantity Slot TN570 Expansion Control 1 or 2 EXPN INTFC 01 and 02 Carrier A Port Carrier B 1or2 EXPN INTFC 02 and 03 TN771C Expansion Contro
273. igure Notes 1 6 my crdf4pr CJL 102996 1 Equipment Room 6 258A Adapter 2 To Central Location for Terminals 1 through 6 7 D Inside Wire Cut Down 3 Blue Row on 110 Terminal Block a i 4 Purple Row on 110 Terminal Block 8 Information Outlet 5 To Port Connector on Cabinet Cabinet 1 2p vajaa Timina Carrier A Slot 03 Figure 2 27 Example 4 Pair Labeling to Information Outlet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Create a Provisioning Plan Page 2 49 Create a Provisioning Plan Determine an appropriate available port circuit on the system for each telephone trunk and peripheral connection needed and in addition plan for auxiliary power for Basic Rate Interface BRI and certain display sets Create a Port Assignment Record to include the following See Figure 2 25 Station or trunk type or feature service Building location floor room desk information outlet Extension number or trunk group and member number Port circuit location on the system for each endpoint cabinet carrier slot circuit Route from equipment room through equipment closets to each endpoint Auxiliary power supply if required DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Te
274. igure Notes 1 Flush Mounted Information Outlet 4 400B2 Adapter 2 Surface Mounted Information Outlet 5 To Telephone 3 To Individual Power Unit 6 Destination Service Access Point DSAP Power Cord Figure 5 3 400B2 Adapter Connecting to a Modular Plug CAUTION Do not use the 329A power unit for the attendant console Use an 1151A 1151A2 1145A or MSP 1 power unit Adjunct power can be provided from the equipment room or equipment closet with an 1145B power unit See 1145B Power Supply on page 5 45 Adjunct power can also be provided locally at the telephone or console with a 1151A or 1151A2 power unit See 1151A Power Supply jon page 5 54 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Analog Station or 2 Wire Digital Station Example Page 5 5 Analog Station or 2 Wire Digital Station Example This example is typical of the 2 wire digital stations 603E 84xx 94xx 302C 2 wire analog stations 500 2500 71xx analog CO trunks DID trunks and external alarms The wiring designations for this example are shown in Figure 5 4 Q T 2 lt 4 gt gt 28 7 3 R 3 lt lt lt _ _ _ gt gt _ 03 R 3 2500wire RBP 071996 Figure Notes 1 2500 Type Analog Station 2 TN2183 Analog Line Circuit Pack Position 1C01 Figure 5 4 2500 Type An
275. ilding For the 4C3S 75 protector there are a variety of 25 50 and 100 pair protector panels equipped with 110 type connecting blocks and or RJ21X connectors The ITW Linx Enhanced Protector mounts directly on connecting blocks and requires a separate ground bar The maximum range for out of building digital voice terminals is 3400 feet 1036 m when using 24 AWG 5 0 26 mm wire and 2200 feet 670 m when using 26 AWG 4 0 14 mm wire The range can be extended to 5000 feet 1524 m using 24 AWG 5 0 26 mm wire or 4000 feet 1219 m using 26 AWG 4 0 14 mm wire with the use of a Data Link Protector DLP The DLP is an isolating transformer used to remove phantom power on the system side and re introduce it on the terminal side When a protector is used the voice terminal must be locally powered by an external power supply or through the AC power cord provided with some of the 7400 type voice terminals The protector is installed on the equipment side of the protection in both buildings Protector and Data Link Protector Ordering Information Description Comcode 4C3S 75 Solid State with Heat Coil 105581086 ITW LINX Gas Tube Avalanche Suppress 406144907 ITW Linx Ground Bar used with above 901007120 ITW Linx Replacement Fuse 406304816 Data Link Protector 1 circuit 103972758 Data Link Protector 8 circuits 103972733 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installatio
276. in any slot in the Switch Node Carrier next to a TN573B Switch Node Interface circuit pack 2 On the backplane connect a 14 inch 35 56 cm Y cable from the TN1654 to the Switch Node Interface circuit pack See Figure 5 12 A caution The Y cable used with the TN1654 is different than the Y cable used with the TN574 These cables are NOT interchangeable 3 Connect an H600 348 Quad cable to the remaining end of the Y cable 4 Skip to Channel Service Unit Cabling Port Carrier to Switch Node Carrier When the TN1654 is located in the Port Carrier and the Switch Node Interface circuit pack is located in the Switch Node Carrier connect a 70 177 8 cm Y Cable between the 2 circuit packs caution The Y cable used with the TN1654 is different than the Y cable used with the TN574 These cables are NOT interchangeable 1 Connect an H600 348 Quad cable to the remaining end of the Y cable DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment TN1654 DS1 Converter Release 6r Only Page 5 27 Channel Service Unit Cabling Figure 5 13 shows a typical connection from the H600 348 Quad Cable to the CSU through the H600 307 Network Cable and to the network interface through the Smart Jacks The double headed cable plugs into the DS1 converter slot The qua
277. inets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment TN1654 DS1 Converter Release 6r Only Page 5 23 N1654 DS1 Converter Release 6r Only Set Circuit Pack Switches The configuration switches on the TN1654 must be set before the circuit pack is installed The TN1654 can be configured for either T1 or E1 operation All 4 facilities on the circuit pack are configured as a group It is not possible to have T1 E1 and E1 facilities supported on the same circuit pack at the same time facility line termination impedances of 120 Ohms for twisted pair and 75 Ohms for coax wiring are supported The T1 line impedance is fixed at 100 Ohms and the T1 framing is selectable for ESF Extended Super Frame or D4 for each facility Figure 5 11 shows the location of the switches Table 5 9 shows the switch setting positions and functions Table 5 9 TN1654 DS1 Converter Configuration Switches Switch Function Up Down 1 Type of Facility T1 E1 2 Span A Line Impedance E1 Only 120 Ohm 75 Ohm Span A Framing T1 Only ESF D4 3 Span B Line Impedance E1 Only 120 Ohm 75 Ohm Span B Framing T1 Only ESF D4 4 Span C Line Impedance E1 Only 120 Ohm 75 Ohm Span C Framing T1 Only ESF D4 5 Span D Line Impedance E1 Only 120 Ohm 75 Ohm Span D Framing T1 Only ESF D4 6 Force Fiber Data Stream Enabled Disabled Scrambling 1 Set the configuration switches on the TN1654 as req
278. ing locally provided coupling plates and 3 8 18 x 1 2 inch hex head bolts with nuts 5 Attach other end of cable rack to wall using locally provided hardware duct6 KLC 071796 Figure Notes 1 Cross Aisle Bracket 5 I O Trough 2 Coupling Plate 6 Use Only When Required 3 Cable Rack 7 To Wall 4 O Coupling Trough Figure C 10 Installation of I O Cable Rack Coupling to Rear of Cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork Page C 16 Install I O Cable Rack Riser Refer to Figure C 11 and assemble the ductwork 1 Attach angle bracket group 9 to I O trough using thread forming screws 2 Attach cross aisle bracket to angle bracket using thread forming screws Attach the angle bracket to the 6 hole face of the cross aisle bracket using three thread forming screws through the bottom holes 3 Attach I O coupling trough group 8 to cross aisle bracket using thread forming screws 4 Attach cable rack to coupling trough using locally provided coupling plates and 3 8 18 x 1 2 inch hex bolts and nuts 5 Attach other end of cable rack to wall using locally provided hardware suitable to type of wall duct7 KLC 071796 Figure Notes 1 I O Trough 5 I O Coupling Trough 2 Angle Bracket 6 Cross Aisle Bracket 3 Coupling Plate 7 Front of Cabinet 4 Cable Rack Figure C 11 Installation of I O Cable Rack Riser to End o
279. ion DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Fiber Optic Interconnect Cabling Page 1 30 Connect Fiber Optic Cables gt NOTE Always use the Cable Running List that accompanies the system when installing fiber optic cables The following procedure is a typical example of how to cable a system If the cabinets are close together the signal may go through a single directly connected fiber optic cable If the cabinets are far apart it may be easier to connect the cabinets through an LIU or fiber shelf For each fiber indicated in the fiber optic Cable Running List 1 Install a lightwave transceiver on the cabinet connector at the position in the FROM column in the running list Select a cable indicated by the CABLE CODE and LENGTH in the running list Connect 1 of the fibers to each connector on the lightwave transceivers just installed The fiber is numbered 1 or 2 The connector on the transceiver is labeled TX or RX Keep track of which fiber connects to which transceiver connector Label both ends of these cables Route the fiber optic cables from the transceiver out of the cabinet Secure the cables to the cable tie rack Keep the fiber optic cables clear of the heavier I O cables If the cabinet in the TO column in the running list is located remotely from the FROM cabinet connect to the
280. ion but its consequences are not immediate Problems might be impaired service to a few trunks or stations or interfering with one feature across the entire system a Warning Alarms Failures that cause no significant degradation of service or failures in equipment external to the system Warning alarms are not reported to the attendant console or INADS Alarms are communicated to the system users and technicians by entries in the alarm log and the lighting of LEDs located on the attendant console on all circuit packs and optionally on customer designated voice terminals Attendant Console LEDs The console has 2 red LEDs labeled ALM and ACK The ALM LED lights steadily when there is a major or minor alarm at the system cabinet The ACK LED lights steadily if the alarm has been successfully reported to INADS If the system is unable to report the alarm to INADS the LED flashes this signals the attendant to call INADS and report the alarm Terminal Alarm Notification Terminal Alarm Notification is an optional feature that displays several types of alarms on voice terminals with administered feature buttons or the attendant console A maximum of 10 digital and or hybrid voice terminals may be used When an alarm occurs the green status LED associated with the assigned button is in a steady state The LED may be turned off by pressing the button associated with the LED If the LED is off and the alarm has not been resolve
281. ion process the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination and enables the customer options A caution If you do not enable Alarm Origination when the customer has purchased a services contract the system cannot report any alarm to the TSC automatically causing the TSC to be unable to fulfill the services contract Save Translations 1 If the system is high or critical reliability enter status system 1 and press Enter to verify that the system is in the active standby mode 2 Enter save translation and press Enter This instructs the system to take all translation information in memory and write it to the translation card or tape 3 If the system contains a TN750 Announcement circuit pack enter list configuration software version and press Enter If Page 2 of this form shows that recorded announcements were saved these announcements can be restored using restore announcements and press Enter gt NOTE TN750C contains non volatile RAM and does not require the restore announcements command 4 Update backup tape if required Reboot the System 1 Behind the PPN set the circuit breaker to ON DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add PRI Over PACCON to R6si Page 5 129 2 The system performs a reset level 4 reboot loading translations from the tran
282. ipment music sources and so forth The distribution field contains 4 cross connect areas 1 The purple field port field terminates 25 pair cables from the system Each line circuit pack connects to one 25 pair row of the 110 type terminal block One 25 pair cable is required for each line circuit pack gt NOTE This is the case except for the 16 port analog circuit pack and the MET circuit pack The 16 port analog line circuit pack requires an adapter cable to connect from 1 connector on the system to 2 25 pair connectors on a 110 type terminal block Two MET circuit packs require a concentrator cable to connect from 2 connectors on the system to one 25 pair connector on a 110 type terminal block The yellow field auxiliary field terminates all 25 pair cables from the auxiliary cabinet and adjunct equipment cabinets The yellow field is located in the lower right hand corner of the distribution field The white field station field terminates the station wiring The white field indicates 3 pair station circuits 8 circuits per 25 pair cable routed through a satellite closet The blue field station field also terminates station wiring The blue field indicates 3 and or 4 pair station circuits 8 or 6 circuits respectively per 25 pair cable The fourth pair of the 4 pair station circuit provides adjunct power from the cross connect field on an as needed basis to terminals within 250 feet 76 m wire length of the MDF
283. ircuits are run from the satellite locations to the information outlets A list of voice and data terminals that can be connected to the system is provided in Table 2 4jon page 2 40 A list of administration terminals that can be connected to the system is provided in Table 2 5 2 5jon page 2 44 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room Page 2 34 4 Pair Station Circuits Four pair circuits can be run directly from an equipment room MDF to a 258A or BR2580A adapter as shown in Figure 2 19 The 4 pair station cables connect the adapter to the information outlets 1764797a CJL 031396 Figure Notes 1 Part of Main Distribution Frame MDF 8 B25A Cable 12 4 Pair Circuit 13 DIW Station Cable D Inside Wire Patch Cord or Cross Connect Jumpers 2 3 Pair Connecting Blocks 9 Connectorized Staggered 3 4 Pair Connecting Blocks Finger Multiple 25 Pair Cable 4 Purple Field 10 258A or BR2580A Adapter 5 Blue Field 11 Information Outlet 6 7 To System Cabinet Three Pair Modularity Figure 2 19 4 Pair Circuit Distribution and Connectivity DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Station Circuit Distri
284. ise building suitable for connection to the ground terminal in the riser closet and to the cabinet equipment single point ground terminal Approved floor grounds may include the following Building steel a The grounding conductor for the secondary side of the power transformer feeding the floor Metallic water pipes Power feed metallic conduit supplying panel boards on the floor Agrounding point specifically provided in the building for the purpose Ay WARNING If the approved ground or approved floor ground can only be accessed inside a dedicated power equipment room then connections to this ground should be made by a licensed electrician DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect Remote Power Off Cable and External Alarm Cable Page 1 25 Connect Remote Power Off Cable and External Alarm Cable Figure 1 9 shows the location of the Remote Power Off RPO cable The opposite end of the cable connects to the Emergency Power Off EPO switch located outside of the equipment room Carrier circuit breakers Connect RPO cable here J21 Connect external KY AM alarm cable here J18 lt G Pin 6 RPO Pin 2 RPO External psdf002 CJL 081596 alarm cable Figure 1 9 Remote Power Off Cable Connections Part 1 Even though the equipment room EPO switch disconnects main
285. istration terminals that can be connected to the system Table 2 5 Administration Terminals Administration Terminal Application 510D Remote administration 610D 513 610 615 715 BCT Management Terminal administration and 4410 4425 and VT220 general purpose 515 Business Communications Remote administration general purpose Terminal BCT 615 Management Terminal Management Terminal system administration and maintenance terminal 715 BCS 2900 715 BCS and 715 Management Terminal system BCS 2 Management Terminal administration and maintenance terminal 1 The keyboards and terminals are interchangeable when an adapter cable is used gt NOTE The 715 BCS 406803148 and 406803155 has a 6 pin mini DIN keyboard connector The 2900 715 BCS 4073113881 and 407313899 has a 6 pin RJ 11 keyboard jack located on the side of the terminal Label the Main Distribution Frame Figure 2 24 shows the graphic symbols used on labels for the system cross connections information outlets and cables The labels are color coded to identify system wiring Green To Central Office CO Purple To system ports a Yellow To auxiliary equipment and miscellaneous system leads Blue To information outlets a White From Main Distribution Frame to satellite locations 3 pair DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 M
286. it 847245768 pack or Switch Node Interface in another carrier 14 Inches 35 5 cm TN1654 to fiber optic transceiver 847245776 DC powered cabinets only This cable is for intercabinet cabling only 14 Inches 35 5 cm TN1654 to adjacent TN570C Expansion 847746641 Interface circuit pack gt NOTE The distinction between facility types is important when using TN1654 circuit packs The facility used to carry control channel messages between the pair of DS1 converter circuit packs and all packet traffic is known as the primary facility The facility used to backup and takeover for the primary facility in the event of primary facility failure is known as the secondary facility The TN1654 allows either facility A or B to be a primary channel The control channel is restricted to only the A or B facilities This permits full 24 channel access T1 or 31 channel access E1 for facilities C and D to support user traffic Install the Circuit Pack and Cabling E1 Only The E1 installation is similar to the T1 installation except the H600 348 Quad Cable and the Channel Service Unit are not used gt NOTE The H600 348 Quad Cable can be used on E1 120 Ohm installations 1 Install a Y cable between the DS1 Converter connector and the Expansion Interface connector See Figure 5 12 Also refer to Table 5 10 for the Y cable lengths and associated comcode numbers 2 Be sure to label the cables as they are instal
287. itch settings This section lists the settings required for the Comsphere external modems 572 printers Jand TN760 and TN464 Tie Trunk circuit packs Refer to the user s guide for each type of equipment for information on how to locate and set the option switches DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 B Option Switch Settings External Modem Option Settings Page B 2 External Modem Option Settings The COMSPHERE 3700 3800 and 3900 series recommended external modems may require option switch settings Refer to the documentation that accompanies each modem to set the options gt NOTE A locally obtained type approved external modem may be used Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for more information The Release 6 systems operate with the COMSPHERE modems set to the factory default settings The modem settings and descriptions are listed in Table B 1 Table B 1 Modem Connection Modem Fields Description Modem Name This field is 20 characters long and permits alphanumeric characters to provide a unique qualifier for a given modem such as INTEL RTS CTS Informs the modem that communication with the data source UART is Enabled driven with RTS CTS flow control The field name has a default of Q3 ina field 6 characters long This field is not case sensitive Default is upper case Asynchro
288. k receptacle left side viewed from rear 33 Ladder rack supported 86 or 88 5 inches 218 4 cm or 224 7 cm from floor 34 AC power duct with two 3 wire receptacles 250 VAC right side 35 AC power duct with one 3 wire receptacle 250 VAC right side 37 AC power duct with one 3 wire receptacle 30 A 208 VAC for CC 39 I O cross aisle ductwork 48 inch 109 2 cm aisle 41 Basic hardware for one cabinet 42 Right or left end plate for shielded ductwork 44 Front and rear end plate for shielded ductwork 51 Shielded cross aisle ductwork 78 Shielded cross aisle ductwork 48 inch 122 cm aisle Install the various cable ducts in the order shown in Table C 2 Figure C 2 shows an overhead view of a typical ductwork installation A WARNING To prevent damage to the cabinet circuitry or cables place cardboard or equivalent in the cable ducts to catch any metal filings that may fall from the self threading screws DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork Page C 5 Table C 2 Installation Sequence Step Group Remarks 1 41 Install basic ductwork on each cabinet 2 51 Install cross aisle shielded ductwork 3 10or26 Install I O cross aisle or cabinet to wall cable trough 22 25 Install I O cross aisle to wall trough duct
289. ks each of which is identified by a fiber number 5 Enter y or n in the field Is one endpoint remoted via DS1 Converter complex and press Enter 6 Enter the location of the TN570 and the TN574 or TN1654 circuit pack for both ENDPOINT 1 and ENDPOINT 2 7 Scroll to page 2 of the form Enter y as applicable in each Facility Installed field A B C and D 8 Inthe Bit Rate field enter either 1 544 T1 or 2 048 E1 9 Enter the idle code inthe Idle Code MSB 1 LSB 8 field The default value is 11101000 It is recommended that the default value be used unless it becomes absolutely necessary to change it The MSB means Most Significant Bit the LSB means Least Significant Bit DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Administer Fiber Links Release 6r Only Page 3 25 10 Inthe Line Coding field enter the line coding information This 11 information should match the line coding of the facility For T1 example line coding is b8zs For E1 example line coding is hdb3 gt NOTE If this data is not correct wideband errors multimedia call handling may occur For T1 sites refer to T1 Installations Only For E1 sites refer to E1 Installations Only T1 Installations Only a b The Framing Mode field is display only and shows the
290. l Some modems disable this timer allowing an outbound call to ring indefinitely Paradyne does not provide this capability because it is undesirable to have an outbound call attempt to ring indefinitely Therefore the initialization string must contain the following ASCII string to set the No Answer Timer to the maximum value 7 255 The internal modem must have this parameter disabled or set to at least 255 seconds This is a non administrable parameter For the modem connection this parameter is the first initialization string to be transmitted to the modem This field is visible on the administration form in display mode only The new field is set to S7 255 This hardcoded constant can be overridden for type approval applications specifically in the United Kingdom and other Western European nations by the use of the Misc Init Param field S7 255 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 B Option Switch Settings Printer Option Settings Page B 5 Printer Option Settings Printers can be used with a management terminal as journal printers for the hospitality feature and also as an output device for Call Detail Recording CDR A 572 printer can function as a CDR device system printer or journal printer The options are set with function keys rather than DIP switches Figure B 1 shows the arrangement of the function keys on t
291. l presses the start button split number The split s identity to the switch and BCMS split report A report that provides historical traffic information for internally measured splits split agent status report A report that provides real time status and measurement data for internally measured agents and the split to which they are assigned SSI Standard serial interface SSM Single site management SSV Station service ST3 Stratum 3 clock board staffed Indicates that an agent position is logged in A staffed agent functions in one of four work modes Auto In Manual In ACW or AUX Work STARLAN Star Based Local Area Network DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 46 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR An obsolete term now called CDR a switch feature that uses software and hardware to record call data See Call Detail Recording CDR standard serial interface SSI A communications protocol developed for use with 500 type business communications terminals BCTs and 400 series printers status lamp A green light that shows the status of a call appearance or a feature button by the state of the light lit flashing fluttering broken flutter or unlit stroke counts A method used by ACD agents to record up to nine customer defined events per call when CMS is active SVN
292. l 1 Any Available Port Slot Carrier A 1 Quantity of this pack should equal the number of EPNs 2 Required for critical reliability EPN Optional for digital trunk testing in high reliability EPN Power Up System 1 Power up the system 2 Enter change system parameters maintenance and press Enter Use this form to enable the packet bus 3 Perform tests Resolve Alarms 1 Examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6r Contact INADS to Enable Customer Options and Verify Alarm Origination Be sure the system is part of the existing INADS database by calling the INADS Database Administrator at the Technical Service Center TSC Verify that INADS can dial into the system and that the system can dial out to INADS As part of the system registration process the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination and enables customer options A caution If you do not enable Alarm Origination when the customer has purchased a services contract the system cannot report any alarm to the TSC automatically causing the TSC to be unable to fulfill the services contract DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add CallVisor ASAI Page 5 117 Add CallVisor ASAI Service Interruption 1
293. l reliability systems the standby SNC is located on a separate carrier and normally remains lit a Yellow LEDs on power units on standby carriers normally remain lit DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Page 5 1 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment The wiring procedures are the same for most telephones and other equipment This chapter provides wiring examples of these similar installation procedures These are examples only and actual wiring procedures may differ at each site Wiring pinouts for circuit packs mentioned in this chapter are in the tables at the end of this chapter Refer to Figure 5 1 for punch down information for common circuit packs The figure shows the colors of the punch downs and is best viewed from CD ROM or on line After installing the hardware the data for the system and telephone features is administered These procedures are provided in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 2 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 5 26290 AM 9PM GC te ee ie OC 6L St ZL 9L GSL vl EL StL Lt OL 6 8 Zz 9 G LA z L TRETIOO SRR RRGRRRR OER ER E08 e o PE
294. laration of Conformity The CE mark affixed to the DEFINITY equipment described in this book indicates that the equipment conforms to the following Euro pean Union EU Directives e Electromagnetic Compatibility 89 336 EEC e Low Voltage 73 23 EEC e Telecommunications Terminal Equipment TTE i CTR3 BRI and i CTR4 PRI For more information on standards compliance contact your local dis tributor Comments To comment on this document return the comment card at the front of the document Acknowledgment This document was prepared by Product Documentation Development Lucent Technologies Denver CO DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Contents Page iii Contents Contents iii About This Book a Organization a How to Comment on This Book a Related Books a How to Order Books a Trademarks a Standards Compliance a LASER Product a Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards a Where to Call for Technical Support a Anti Static Protection Security Issues a Federal Communications Commission Statement Install and Connect Cabinets a Unpack and Inspect Cabinets m Check Customer s Order a Correcting Shipping Errors a Install System Cabinets m Connect AC Power and Ground a Connect DC Power and Ground m Approved Grounds a Connect Remote Powe
295. larm Return V BR 49 Not Connected BR V 24 V S 50 INADS Tip S V 25 INADS Ring 1 Color designation is the main wire color followed by the color of the stripe 2 The following wire colors apply in Table 5 2 W White BL Blue O Orange G Green BR Brown S Slate Grey R Red BK Black Y Yellow V Violet 3 External alarm with signal incoming to system DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Auxiliary Connector Outputs Page 5 12 Table 5 3 provides port circuit pack and telephone pin designations Table 5 3 Port Circuit Pack and Telephone Pin Designations 8510T Basic 4 wire 2 wire Rate Interface Z3A1 amp Z3A2 302C 8403 302C 8403 8410 BRI with Asynchronous Pin on 8410 8411B D 8411B D 8434 adjunct Analog Data Units Modular 8434 603E 603E 9403 speaker Station ADU Data plug 9403 9434 9410 9434 phone Modem NT1 Modules 1 TXT TXT 2 TXR T TXR 3 PXT TXT R PXT 4 T PXR T 5 R PXT No R 6 PXR TXR Connection PXR 7 48VDC 48VDC 48VDC 4 pin 48VDC 8 GRD GRD GRD GRD modular jack T N2198 2 wire TN2181 2 wire TN2183 Basic digital 16 port TN556 Analog Rate Circuit TN754 4 wire TN2224 2 wire ISDN BRI line 16 Interface Pack digital 8 port digital 24 port Line port line TN726 Data
296. lation and press Enter This instructs the system to take all translation information in memory and write it to the translation memory card or the tape 3 If the system contains a TN750 Announcement circuit pack enter list configuration software version and press Enter If Page 2 of this form shows that recorded announcements were saved these announcements can be restored using restore announcements and press Enter 4 Update backup tape if necessary DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add Packet Bus to R6si Page 5 113 Add Packet Bus to R6si Standard Reliability R6si System Disable Alarm Origination 1 Enter change system parameters maintenance and press Enter 2 Setthe Alarm Origination Activated field to n A caution If you do not disable Alarm Origination the system may generate alarms resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets 3 For some releases of software disable Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification before submitting the form Save Translations 1 If the system is high or critical reliability enter status system 1 and press Enter to verify that the system is in the active standby mode 2 Enter save translation and press Enter This instructs the system to take all translation information in memory and write it to the translation card or tape
297. lays Command 2 Type status cabinet lt 1 44 gt and press Enter 3 Verify the screen displays test results similar to Screen 4 6 status cabinet 1 SPE Bi CABINET CONFIGURATION STATUS CABINET CONNECTIVITY STATUS Carrier PN SN Carrier Cabinet PN SN Connectivity Status Location Number Type Type Active Standby O1A PN 1 processor MCC PN 1 up up 01B PN 1 processor SN 1 B PNC up OIC PN 1 port SN 1 A PNC up 01D SN 1 dup sw node 01E SN 1 switch node CABINET EMERGENCY TRANSFER CABINET ALARM STATUS Emergency Select PN SN Mj Mn Wn Transfer Switch PN 1 0 0 35 01B auto SN 1 B PNC 0 0 0 01A auto SN 1 A PNC 0 0 Command Screen 4 6 Example System Status Report for All Cabinets 4 Note the MODE of SPE 1A and 1B 5 Type refresh spe and press Enter Command successfully completed should be displayed 6 Type reset system interchange and press Enter This causes the terminal to log off 7 Log in as craft again Remember to use the new password established for Craft 8 Note the MODE for SPE 1A and 1B should have changed from that noted in Step 4 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 4 Test the System Test Expansion Interface Circuit Packs Test Expansion Interface Circuit Packs 1 Verify the screen displays Command Issue 5 May 1998 Page 4 8 2 Type test board lt UUCCss gt where UUCCss is the cabinet carrier
298. le 4 Trunk Auxiliary Field Trough 5 Station Distribution Field 10 10 AWG 25 6 mm Wire to Coupled Bonding Conductor Figure 2 11 Cable Routing to Bottom Terminal Blocks Route Cables to Main Distribution Frame The following guidelines should be followed when routing cables from the cabinet to the MDF a Each port cable is connected at the cabinet and then routed along the front trough of the cable slack manager to the connecting terminal block where the cable is to be terminated Enough slack must be left at the cabinet end of the cable to allow for proper dressing of the cables DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Cable Installation Page 2 20 Route the cable from the cabinet to the wall Place the cable beside 1 of the rows of columns in the cable slack manager gt NOTE Retainers mounted on the columns keep the cable from protruding above the top of the base of the cable slack manager Determine the length of the cable required to reach from the cable slack manager to the assigned connecting terminal block The cable must be supported on the wall using D rings Cable slack is stored by coiling the cable around the columns in the cable slack manager The first run should always go across the full length of the 5 columns in the cable slack manager Connect the cable to th
299. le is indicated by its comcode number DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Making Changes at an LIU or Shelf Page A 17 Making Changes at an LIU or Shelf Circuit changes are made by moving the fiber optic patch cords to other couplings To Remove a Fiber Optic Patch Cord 1 Atthe LIU or shelf locate the correct patch cord and unplug it from the coupling 2 Carefully remove the cable from the LIU and from the trough gt NOTE Take care to ensure the patch cord is not bent beyond the minimum bend radius of 1 5 inches 3 8 cm 3 Trace the other end of the patch cord to its termination point and unplug it 4 Remove the label associated with the removed patch cord 5 Place plastic covers over the connectors to prevent dust or damage To Make a New Cross Connection 1 Atthe LIU or shelf locate the connector couplings associated with the circuit to be added 2 Select a patch cord of the appropriate length for the cross connection to be made Excess cord length causes congestion in the trough and may cause the cable to be damaged 3 Plug 1 end of the cord into the appropriate connector coupling 4 Route the patch cord through the LIU or shelf and into the vertical and horizontal troughs 5 Plug the other end of the patch cord into the appropriate connector coupling on the fiber optic tran
300. lease 6 Maintenance for R6vs si Contact INADS to Enable Customer Options and Verify Alarm Origination Be sure the system is part of the existing INADS database by calling the INADS Database Administrator at the Technical Service Center TSC Verify that INADS can dial into the system and that the system can dial out to INADS As part of the system registration process the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination and enables customer options A CAUTION If you do not enable Alarm Origination when the customer has purchased a services contract the system cannot report any alarm to the TSC automatically causing the TSC to be unable to fulfill the services contract DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add Packet Bus to R6si Page 5 115 High or Critical Reliability R6 si System Disable Alarm Origination 1 Enter change system parameters maintenance and press Enter 2 Setthe Alarm Origination Activated field ton A caution If you do not disable Alarm Origination the system may generate alarms resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets 3 For some releases of software disable Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification before submitting the form Save Translations 1 If the system is high or critical reliability enter status system 1 and press Enter to ver
301. led DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment TN1654 DS1 Converter Release 6r Only Page 5 29 E1 Interface Cabling Figure 5 14 shows typical E1 cabling to the network interface via the coaxial adapter cable The actual adapter may be different in appearance 0027_0 RBP 061896 Figure Notes 1 50 Pin Male Connector on Coaxial Adapter Cable 3 Connect to Quad Cable 2 Coaxial Adapter Cable With 8 BNC Connectors 4 Connect to E1 Network Figure 5 14 DS1 Converter Connections E1 Only 1 Connect a coaxial adapter cable to the remaining end of the Y cable The opposite end of this cable is wired to a coaxial adapter assembly 2 Plug a customer provided quad cable onto the 4 BNC connectors provided on the coaxial adapter 3 Connect the opposite end of the quad cable to the network interface DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Off Premises Station Wiring Page 5 30 Off Premises Station Wiring The cabling outside the building for off premises stations is provided by the local telephone company The off premises stations can appear on any of the RJ21X network interfaces provided for the Central Office CO trunks A caution Only an F
302. ll and Connect Cabinets Connect DC Power and Ground Page 1 20 3 DC Power Cabinet Approved Ground 1 Atthe DC Power Cabinet connect a 1 AWG 70 44 mm ground wire to the Ground Discharge Bar See Figure 1 7 2 Route the ground wire out of the cabinet and terminate it on the approved ground The approved ground must be identified with a grounding tag FORM 15657NR or equivalent See Approved Grounds jon page 1 23 4 Connect Main AC Supply to DC Power Cabinet 1 Have a qualified electrician connect AC power leads to the rectifiers in the DC Power Cabinet Each rectifier should have its own branch circuit Terminate the leads on the AC INPUT terminal block of each rectifier 2 Ensure the associated circuit breakers at the AC power panel are OFF 5 Connect Ground Wires for DC Powered Systems A CAUTION Do not connect any ground wires from an EPN cabinet to another EPN cabinet or to a PPN cabinet All ground wires must be terminated at the single point ground block at the main AC supply AC mains 1 Connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm wire to the PPN cabinet ground terminal block 2 Route the wire to the AC mains single point ground block and connect 3 Connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm wire to each EPN s cabinet ground terminal block 4 Route the wire s to the AC mains single point ground block and connect 6 Turn Circuit Breakers Off The main circuit breaker on a DC powered PPN EPN cabinet is located on t
303. llite configuration and access to and from the public network To a user outside the complex a main satellite configuration appears as one switch with one listed directory number LDN A tributary switch is connected to the main switch via tie trunks but has its own attendant positions and LDN maintenance Activities involved in keeping a telecommunications system in proper working condition the detection and isolation of software and hardware faults and automatic and manual recovery from these faults management terminal The terminal that is used by the system administrator to administer the switch The terminal may also be used to access the BCMS feature major alarm An indication of a failure that has caused critical degradation of service and requires immediate attention Major alarms are automatically displayed on LEDs on the attendant console and maintenance or alarming circuit pack logged to the alarm log and reported to a remote maintenance facility if applicable Manual In work mode One of four agent work modes the mode in which an agent is ready to process another call manually See Auto In Work mode for a contrast MAP Maintenance action process MAPD Multiapplication platform for DEFINITY MA UUI Message Associated User to User Signaling Mbps Megabits per second M Bus Memory bus Mbyte Megabyte MCC Multicarrier cabinet MCS Message Center Service DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release
304. mote interface formerly INADS and verify the alarm notification process Make a remote test from the remote interface to the DEFINITY System and a local test from the DEFINITY System to the remote interface In some countries this remote access interface is not allowed Contact your Lucent Technologies representative Remote Test 1 Call outside personnel who will be accessing the system remotely to perform administration maintenance and testing 2 Ask remote personnel to call system and login and display System Parameters Maintenance screen The login must be successful gt NOTE Product Identification on the System Parameters screen must match the Product Identification administered by the local technician 3 Have the remote personnel enter the test inads link command terminate the login and disconnect 4 Have the remote personnel check the appropriate trouble ticket The trouble ticket should show INADS n MINOR in the description field to indicate a minor off board alarm was reported to the remote personnel There may be more text in the description field if other resolved alarms were reported 5 Have the remote personnel make second call and login to the system and check the error log to verify no problems See DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6r for error log and error code information 6 Have the remote access personnel terminate logoff and disconnect DEFINITY Enter
305. mporary discontinuance of service may be required But if advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experienced with this equipment for repair or warranty information please contact the Technical Service Center at 1 800 242 2121 If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved It is recommended that repairs be performed by Lucent Technologies certified technicians The equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the telephone company Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information This equipment if it uses a telephone receiver is hearing aid compatible DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Unpa
306. munications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Equipment Room Hardware Page 2 1 Install Telecommunications Cabling Equipment Room Hardware SYSTIMAX 110 type hardware is used for the Main Distribution Frame MDF 110 type hardware is available in 2 basic types the 110A and 110P The 110A requires less wall space than the 110P The 110P includes horizontal and vertical cable troughs for managing cross connect cables The system connects to the MDF with the supplied B25A 25 pair cables Refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 Main Distribution Field Design 555 230 630 for more information Figure 2 1 shows the cross connections for common circuit packs Refer to the figure when cross connecting wire pairs to the MDF Issue 5 Z60E90 DTA ZJOOJPIM Se ve ce le Oc 6l 8L SL May 1998 Page 2 2 LAS 43 6 8 2 9 SG tv E L ZOZNL TETIFIILIILPTI Pfft ne PEC Rie Cer eee Pie eee eee eet See LEEe tet eee ee ee ee ee EET Dee BERET OETOCIOEFIOEI e ooer BETIEDIETIEDIEDIEPIETIET oe BRED REAZREDREAZR ED REDE ED OE OR VES REDRED OE 2 OE om mme Install Telecommunications Cabling Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Equipment Room Hardware DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 2
307. n and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Emergency Transfer Units and Associated Telephones Page 5 36 Emergency Transfer Units and Associated Telephones Emergency transfer capability is provided by a transfer unit mounted next to the trunk auxiliary field Analog telephones connected to the transfer panel can be used The 500 and 2500 type telephones can also be used as normal extensions Emergency transfer capability may be provided on analog Central Office CO and Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS trunks The 808A Emergency Transfer Panel provides emergency trunk bypass or power fail transfer for up to 5 incoming CO trunk loops to 5 selected station sets The 808A equipment s Ringer Equivalency Number REN is 1 0 Amp At the MDF the unit is controlled by a connection to a yellow terminal row connecting block in the trunk auxiliary field The unit is controlled by 48 VDC from the EM TRANS RELAY PWR terminals There are 7 EM TRANS RELAY PWR terminal pairs that allow powering of up to 7 transfer units Should power be restored to the relays while a call connected through the 808A is in progress the 808A maintains the connection until the user goes on hook Each 808A can handle up to 5 CO trunks DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and O
308. n the line is increased In general connect the terminal directly to the system with the shortest possible cable For maintenance purposes locate the terminal in the same equipment room as the system or in sight of the system gt NOTE The management terminal in Figure 3 1 is shown for illustration purposes only and does not represent a specific terminal type EEE BEGGE I Figure 3 1 Typical Management Terminal The following types of terminals can connect to a system 715BCS 2900 715 BCS 715 BCS 2 The following notes apply a This chapter emphasizes terminal installation in Release 6 and later systems a lf the terminal supports a DC powered system install a 116A Isolator comcode 106005242 Connect an optional printer using a locally obtained EIA cord See Appendix B Option Switch Settings for printer option switch settings DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Install Management Terminal Page 3 3 Unpack and Inspect 1 Unpack the terminal and inspect for damage Report all damage according to local requirements 2 Remove and retain the installation and usage instructions from the carton These instructions are needed to set up the terminal after it is installed 3 Set the terminal keyboard and all cables o
309. n used for the call is determined by these six digits Remote Operations Service Element ROSE A CCITT and ISO standard that defines a notation and services that support interactions between the various entities that make up a distributed application REN Ringer equivalency number reorder tone A tone to signal that at least one of the facilities such as a trunk or a digit transmitter needed for the call was not available report scheduler Software that is used in conjunction with the system printer to schedule the days of the week and time of day that the desired reports are to be printed RFP Request for proposal RHNPA See remote home numbering plan area code RHNPA RINL Remote indirect neighbor link RISC Reduced instruction set computer DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 43 RLT Release link trunk RMATS Remote Maintenance Administration and Traffic System RNX Route number index private network office code ROM See read only memory ROM RPN Routing plan number RS 232C A physical interface specified by the Electronic Industries Association EIA RS 232C transmits and receives asynchronous data at speeds of up to 19 2 kbps over cable distances of up to 50 feet RS 449 Recommended Standard 449 RSC Regional Support Center ROSE See Remote Operations Service El
310. nd tested 3 more steps must be completed 1 Install the telephones and other equipment See Chapter 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment 2 Administer the features telephones and other equipment according to customer data on the provisioning plan The data for system and telephone features can be administered using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description 3 After the system is administered test the telephones and other equipment using the procedures in Chapter 6 Test Telephones and Other Equipment gt NOTE It may be more efficient to install each hardware component administer it and test it before going on to install another component DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 4 Test the System LED Indicators Page 4 13 LED Indicators Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6r for detailed alarm and LED descriptions If a maintenance object begins to fail some periodic tests the system generates an alarm The system identifies 3 levels of alarms Major Alarms Failures that cause critical degradation of service and require immediate attention a Minor Alarms Failures that cause some degradation of service but do not cause a critical portion of the system to be inoperable This condition requires act
311. nection are customer supplied DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect External Alarm Cable Page 1 27 Connect External Alarm Cable 1 Plug the external alarm cable into the connector shown in 2 Route the opposite end of the cable to the MDF The alarm cable is connected to the MDF in Chapter 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Connect AC Power to Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet The clock cabinet requires a 120 VAC 15 Amp receptacle The green wire ground provided by the receptacle is sufficient The clock cabinet does not require a ground connection back to the single point ground Check Commercial Power and Connect AC Power Before powering up the system check the AC power using a KS 20599 digital voltmeter DVM or equivalent 1 Set the DVM to the 250 volt range 2 Carefully measure the voltage between the hot and neutral side of the receptacle The neutral wire is white the hot wire is black 3 Verify the meter reads 106 to 128 VAC If not have a qualified electrician correct the problem 4 Measure the voltage between the neutral and ground side of the receptacle The ground wire is green 5 Verify the meter reads 0 VAC If not have a qualified electrician correct the problem 6 Set all cabinet power modules OFF Plug the AC power cable into the receptacle
312. nformation to provide BCMS reports write operation The process of putting information onto a storage medium such as a hard disk WSA Waiting session accept WSS Wireless Subscriber System Z ZCS Zero Code Suppression DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Index Page IN 1 Index a Numerics 103A wall jack 3 6 1110A2 Apparatus Mounting Frame 2 9 1110C1 cable support 2 10 1145B power supply 5 45 1146B T Cable 5 49 1146B power distribution unit 5 48 5 52 1147B battery 5 48 1148B battery 5 48 1149B battery 5 48 1151A loop range 5 56 1151A Power Supply 5 54 5 55 1151A2 Power Supply 5 54 5 55 2 5 amp hour batteries 5 45 2 5 Amp Hour battery 5 48 26B1 Selector Console 5 16 2 wire digital station wiring example 5 5 300A single mode transceiver A 3 367A adapter 5 62 5 Amp Hour battery 5 48 572 printer B 5 7400 Series Data Module 1 4 8 Amp Hour battery 5 48 909A B Universal Coupler 1 4 9823A multi mode transceiver A 3 A 1 9823B multi mode transceiver A 3 A 1 oO oO A AC power ground wiring AC 1 8 to 1 10 grounding 1 8 single phase 1 6 three phase 1 6 AC powered system 3 7 activate the system 3 7 adapter 258A 2 30 356A 2 31 400B2 5 4 451A 2 29 BR2580A 2 30 ZD8AJ 2 32 adding ci
313. nge Description Issue 1 555 230 476 Gives a high level overview of what is new in DEFNITY ECS Release 6 Describes the hardware and software enhancements and lists the problem corrections for this release DEFINITY ECS Release 6 System Description Pocket Reference Issue 2 555 230 211 Provides hardware descriptions system parameters listing of hardware required to use features system configurations and environmental requirements This compact reference combines and replaces Release 6 System Description and Specifications and Release 6 Pocket Reference DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Administration and Feature Description Issue 3 555 230 522 Provides descriptions of system features Also provides step by step procedures for preparing the screens that are required to implement the features functions and services of the system Includes the applications and benefits feature interactions administration requirements hardware requirements and procedures for voice terminal data module and trunk group administration DEFINITY System s Little Instruction Book Issue 3 555 230 727 Provides step by step procedures for performing basic switch administration tasks Includes managing phones managing features generating reports enhancing system security and troubleshooting DEFINITY ECS Release 5 System Monitoring and Reporting Issue 4 555 230 511 Provides detailed descriptions of the measurement status security and r
314. nications Cabling Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration PORT ASSIGNMENT RECORD Issue 5 May 1998 Page 2 46 CARRIER Page al Extension Bldg Voice Voice eet Number Fir Terminal Terminal Slot _ Port Jack Old New Rm Type Color Adjunct Module Power User Name Use 01 02 03 04 Ce a EE FS PS Fe PE 06 07 08 of To T To To T T T J J 10 11 Slot 12 ig9 of ft E ee 14 Type 16 zo So T T To Too To T S S 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 To be completed by installation technician 1764787 PDH 071596 Figure 2 25 Port Assignment Record Form When satellite locations are provided enter the satellite letter designation A through F and the jack appearance in the equipment room on the form Also enter the floor designation and or building designation if appropriate For 1 point administration this entry is all that is required Labeling The white label identifying the terminal block row associated with circuits 17 to 24 connects to an identically labeled terminal block row at the satellite closet See Figure 2 26 This is always the case for either 1 point or 2 point administration DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Q
315. nications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment List of Circuit Packs Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 68 Table 5 16 Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules Continued Apparatus Code Name Type TN788B Multimedia Voice Conditioner Service TN789 Radio Controller Control TN790 Processor Control TN791 Guest Line Category B Control TN793 Analog Line 24 Port 2 Wire Port TN794 Network Control Packet Interface Net Pkt Control TN796B Processor Control TN798 Processor Control TN799 Control LAN Interface Port TN1648 B System Access Maintenance Control TN800 Multi Application Platform for DEFINITY MAPD Port TN801 Multi Application Platform for DEFINITY MAPD Port TN802 Multi Application Platform for DEFINITY MAPD Port TN1650B Memory Control TN1654 DS1 Converter T1 24 Channel E1 32 Channel Port TN1655 Packet Interface Control TN1656 Tape Drive Control TN1657 Disk Drive Control TN2135 Analog Line Port TN2136 Digital Line 2 Wire DCP Port TN2138 Central Office Trunk Port TN2139 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN2140 B Tie Trunk Port TN2144 Analog Line Port TN2146 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port T N2147 C Central Office Trunk Port TN2149 Analog Line Port TN2180 Analog Line Port Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 In
316. nications on a bearer B channel LINL Local indirect neighbor link local area network LAN A networking arrangement designed for a limited geographical area Generally a LAN is limited in range to a maximum of 6 2 miles and provides high speed carrier service with low error rates Common configurations include daisy chain star including circuit switched ring and bus logical link The communications path between a processor and a BRI terminal loop start trunk A trunk on which after establishing a connection with a distant switching system for an outgoing call the system waits for a signal on the loop formed by the trunk leads before sending the digits of the called number LSU Local storage unit LWC Leave Word Calling M MAC Medium access DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 31 MADU Modular asynchronous data unit main distribution frame MDF A device that mounts to the wall inside the system equipment room The MDF provides a connection point from outside telephone lines to the PBX switch and to the inside telephone stations main satellite tributary A private network configuration that can either stand alone or access an ETN A main switch provides interconnection via tie trunks with one or more subtending switches called satellites all attendant positions for the main sate
317. nometers Fiber Type 50 or 62 5 9823A 850 nm Multi mode 50 or 62 5 9823B 1300 nm Multi mode 8 3 9 0 300A 1300 nm Single mode DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables LASER Product Page A 2 LASER Product The DEFINITY ECS may contain a Class 1 LASER device if single mode fiber optic cable is connected to a remote Expansion Port Network EPN The LASER device operates within the following parameters a Maximum Power Output 5dBm a Wavelength 1310 nm Mode Field Diameter 8 8 microns CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT IEC 825 1993 A CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for more information Fiber Optic Requirements If estimated fiber losses are suspected of exceeding loss limits due to excessive length splices and so forth perform OTDR Optical Time Domain Reflectometer or Optical Power Meter tests to ensure a successful installation of a remote EPN fiber link The requirements that determine the maximum fiber optic cabling distances are The mean loss and the length of the outside plant fiber cable The mean loss and the length of fiber cable shipped with the cabinet including any fiber riser cable The mean loss of an ST connector
318. not parties on the call PBX Private branch exchange PC See personal computer PC PCM See pulse code modulation PCM PCOL Personal central office line PCOLG Personal central office line group PCS Permanent switched calls PDM See processor data module PDM PDS Premises Distribution System PE Processing element PEC Price element code PEI Processor element interchange personal computer PC A personally controllable microcomputer DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Glossary and Abbreviations PGATE Packet gateway PGN Partitioned group number PI Processor interface PIB Processor interface board pickup group Issue 5 May 1998 Page GL 39 A group of individuals authorized to answer any call directed to an extension within the group PIDB Product image database PKTINT Packet interface PL Private line PLS Premises Lightwave System PMS Property Management System PN Port network PNA Private network access POE Processor occupancy evaluation POP Point of presence port A data or voice transmission access point on a device that is used for communicating with other devices port carrier A carrier in a multicarrier cabinet or a single carrier cabinet containing port circuit packs power units and service circuits Also called a port cabinet in a single carrier cabinet
319. not enable Alarm Origination when the customer has purchased a services contract the system cannot report any alarm to the TSC automatically causing the TSC to be unable to fulfill the services contract DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add CallVisor ASAI Page 5 120 Save Translations 1 If the system is high or critical reliability enter status system 1 and press Enter to verify that the system is in the active standby mode 2 Enter save translation and press Enter This instructs the system to take all translation information in memory and write it to the translation card or tape 3 If the system contains a TN750 Announcement circuit pack enter list configuration software version and press Enter If Page 2 of this form shows that recorded announcements were saved restore these announcements using restore announcements and press Enter 4 Update backup tape if required DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add ISDN BRI Page 5 121 Add ISDN BRI Service Interruption 1 Since if the packet bus is being added the addition of ISDN BRI requires a service interruption notify the customer in advance as to when the addition will
320. nouncement 1 Select test telephone with console permission enabled 2 Dial the access code followed by the integrated announcement extension number Dial tone is heard 3 Dial 1 A short burst of tone is heard and recording begins Speak the announcement into the telephone 4 Dial or hang up Recording stops and dial tone is heard Playback Announcement 1 Dial access code followed by the integrated announcement extension number Dial tone is heard 2 Dial 2 The announcement is heard and dial tone is heard at completion of announcement Delete Announcement 1 Dial access code followed by the integrated announcement extension number Dial tone is heard 2 Dial 3 A confirmation tone is heard and announcement is deleted DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 6 Test Telephones and Other Equipment Test Music on Hold Page 6 4 Test Music on Hold Verify music is provided to a held party during any hold interval Test Emergency Transfer Put system in emergency transfer mode and make call using emergency transfer telephone There may be up to 4 Emergency Transfer switches depending on the system configuration The switch is located on the Processor circuit pack s in the Processor Port Network PPN Control Carrier Test Remote Access Interface Test the communication link between the system and the re
321. nous Configures modem as an asynchronous communications device The Data Mode field name has a default value of amp M0 amp Q0 in a field 8 characters long This field is not case sensitive Default is upper case DTE Adjusts the speed of the data source DTE UART to the outgoing Auto Data modem to modem data rate At maximum this speed is 9600 baud It is Speed not desirable to have the serial data fill the modem buffer faster than the outgoing data rate since data compression is disabled The field name has a blank default value in a field of 6 characters The Lucent products use the command S90 1 to enable this functionality while the Intel product uses the command J1 to enable similar functionality This field is not case sensitive Default is upper case Disable Data Turns off the default data compression algorithms in use by most Compression modems The field has a blank field of 6 characters as default The AT commands that control this are supported by similar commands however these commands do not operate in the same manner The Intel modems require HO CO0 to disable V 42bis amp MNP Class 5 data compression algorithms The Paradyne products only use CO to disable both algorithms This field is not case sensitive Default is upper case Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 B Option Switch Settings
322. ns Cabling Voice and Data Terminals Page 2 43 Table 2 4 Voice and Data Terminals Continued Station Type Type ADJLK Voice ADX8D ADX16A ADX16D ASAI CP9530 DIG800 K2500 MDC9000 MDWws000 PC VMI4 Voice VMIFD4 VMISA4 vRU VRUFD VRUSA WCBRI 105TL 1 Includes music on hold recorded announcement and loudspeaker paging 2 The radio controller supports 24 simultaneous calls and 2 wireless fixed bases 3 Needs ASAI interface and ASAI prop adjunct links turned on in system parameters customer options 4 Turn on mode code in system parameters customer options 5 Needs DTMF turned on in system parameters customer options The following notes apply to the button and data module records in Table 2 4 a Any DCP station except 8400 series can add a 7400B requiring 1 data module record Adata module can be added to a 7403D or 7405D requiring 1 data module record A data module ADM T can be added to a 7505D 7506D or 7507D requiring 1 data module record An ISDN BRI endpoint record is required for each distinct ISDN BRI endpoint Thus each voice only data only or voice data endpoint uses 1 of these records DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Label the Main Distribution Frame Page 2 44 Administration Terminals Table 2 5 lists the admin
323. ns Page 1 of 21 SPE Al SYSTEM PARAMETERS COUNTRY OPTIONS Companding Mode Mu Law Base Tone Generator Set 440Hz PBX dial Tone 440Hz Secondary dial Tone Digital Loss Plan Analog Ringing Cadence Analog Line Transmission 3 Set Layer 1 timer TI to 30 seconds Enhanced 84xx Display Character Set ae i te Ia 13 TONE DETECTION PARAMETERS Tone Detection Mode 6 Interdigit Pause short Screen 3 2 Typical System Parameters Country Options Screen 3 The default companding mode is u Law If the country uses A Law companding type A Law 4 Press Enter when this information is correct Other items eventually need to be entered on this screen but this is all that must be done to turn the red alarm LEDs off Refer to Table 3 1 for a list of the country codes DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Set Country Options Page 3 13 Table 3 1 Country Codes Country Code Country Code USA 1 France 12 Australia 2 Germany 13 Japan 3 Czechoslovakia 14 Italy 4 Russia 15 The Netherlands 5 Argentina 16 Singapore 6 Greece 17 Mexico 7 China 18 Belgium 8 Hong Kong 19 Saudi Arabia 9 Thailand 20 United Kingdom 10 Macedonia 21 Spain 11 5 If all red LEDs do not go off reseat unplug and reinsert any purple labeled circuit packs displaying red LEDs A
324. nsole Operations Issue 3 555 230 700 Provides operating instructions for the attendant console Included are descriptions of the console control keys and functions call handling procedures basic system troubleshooting information and routine maintenance procedures DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Console Operations Quick Reference Issue 2 555 230 890 Provides operating instructions for the attendant console Included are descriptions of the console control keys and functions call handling basic system troubleshooting information and routine maintenance procedures This document is available in the following languages English German DE Dutch NL Brazilian Portuguese PTB European French FR Colombian Spanish SPL and Japanese JA To order append the language suffix to the document number for example 555 230 894DE for German No suffix is needed for the English version Hospitality An Introduction to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Hospitality Services Issue 1 555 230 021 Provides an overview of the features available for use by the lodging and health industries to improve their property management and to provide assistance to their employees and clients Included are brief definitions of many of the system features descriptions of the hardware planning considerations and list of the system capabilities This documentation also applies to Release 6 DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Hospitality Operations Issu
325. nstallation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add PRI Over PACCON to R6si Page 5 130 Contact INADS to Enable Customer Options and Verify Alarm Origination 1 Be sure the system is part of the existing INADS database by calling the INADS Database Administrator at the Technical Service Center TSC Verify that INADS can dial into the system and that the system can dial out to INADS As part of the system registration process the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination and enables the customer options A caution If you do not enable Alarm Origination when the customer has purchased a services contract the system cannot report any alarm to the TSC automatically causing the TSC to be unable to fulfill the services contract 2 Logoff and log back in as craft DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment CAMA E911 Installation Page 5 131 CAMA E911 Installation Configuration The CAMA E911 feature will only work on DEFINITY ECS if TN429C CO circuit packs or later suffix is used Port Networks PNs that include TN429C circuit packs used to interface to CAMA trunks may require some CPTR resources to be either TN744D V2 or TN2182B circuit packs since TTR CPTR or General Purpose Tone Receiver GPTR resources
326. nt Add the Fiber Optic Cable Page 5 76 Icda3fop RPY 021198 Figure 5 32 Remove the Fan Cover Install the Pass thru Kit 1 Snap the SC SC fiber optic adapter on the pass thru tool See Figure 5 33 Use the beige adapter even if single mode fiber is being installed The SC SC adapter is better suited for cable routing in the next steps gt NOTE If single mode fiber is being installed the beige adapter will be replaced with a blue adapter later in this section DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add the Fiber Optic Cable Page 5 77 dafocoup RPY 062497 Figure Notes 1 Pass thru Tool 2 SC SC Fiber Optic Adapter Figure 5 33 Fiber Optic Adapter and Pass Thru Tool 2 Slide the tool to the rear of the cabinet See Figure 5 34 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add the Fiber Optic Cable Page 5 78 Icda2fop RPY 021098 Figure 5 34 Insert the Pass thru T
327. nter For security reasons the password does not display as itis typed The system verifies a valid login and password name were entered If an invalid login or password name was entered the screen displays login incorrect In this case repeat the procedure using the correct login and matching password If the system recognizes the login and password name the screen displays the software version Verify the screen display is similar to Terminal Type 513 715 4410 4425 VT220 513 Type the number of the management terminal and press Enter Verify the screen displays Command gt NOTE The following sections describe some of the procedures used to access and change certain options These sections are not intended to replace or modify the instructions provided in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Set Country Options Page 3 12 Set Country Options Certain country options need to be set to turn red failure indication LEDs off 1 Verify the screen displays Command 2 Type change system parameters country options and press Enter A screen similar to Screen 3 2 is displayed on the terminal The cursor is set on the Companding Mode line change system parameters country optio
328. nterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Cable Installation Page 2 18 Cable Routing Guidelines General The following guidelines should be used when installing the equipment room cabling Following these guidelines will maximize use of the cable slack managers and make future cabling additions and changes easier Figure 2 10 and Figure 2 11 show typical cable routing from the cabinet to the top and bottom of the MDF respectively 1758424b MMR 052996 Figure Notes 1 Main Distribution Frame 6 Cable Slack Manager Number 2 2 AC Power Cord AC Powered 7 Cable Slack Manager Number 3 Cabinets Only 8 System Cabinet s 9 To Building Cables 10 10 AWG 25 6 mm Wire to 5 Station Distribution Field Coupled Bonding Conductor 3 Cable Slack Manager Number 1 4 Trunk Auxiliary Field Figure 2 10 Cable Routing to Top Terminal Blocks DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Cable Installation Page 2 19 o r758432b MMR 052996 Figure Notes 1 Main Distribution Frame 6 Cable Slack Manager Number 2 2 AC Power Cord AC Powered 7 Cable Slack Manager Number 3 Cabinets Only 8 System Cabinet s Ae CADIE AE Manager Number 9 Building Cables Through Cab
329. nterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment CAMA E911 Installation Page 5 134 Table 5 24 Compatibility Tone Clock TTR CPTR and GPTR Circuit Packs Continued Compatibility with CAMA Circuit Trunks in Pack Description Same PN Application Notes TN780 Tone Clock Not Affected Used in the Tone clock only U S infre no TTR CPTR quently for functionality Typ stratum 3 clock ically found with ing andusedin TN748 circuit many other packs in the U S countries Use TN7744DV2 instead of TN748 with CAMA TN2182 Tone Clock Compatible Used globally Tone clock plus 8 TN2182B Call Classifier GPTR call classi Detector fication ports Use TN2182B if CAMA feature is to be supported Hardware Setup 1 Insert the TN429C CO circuit pack in any available port slot 2 Wire the TN429C to the MDF the trunk from the CO Refer to the pinouts in Table 5 34 Administration Setup 1 At the prompt type add trunk next and press Enter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment CAMA E911 Installation Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 135 a TRUNK GROUP Busy Threshold 99 TRUNK PARAMETERS Trunk Type wink start Outgoing Dial Type rimf Trunk Termina
330. ntial differences in terminating equipment The conductor consists of a 10 AWG 25 6 mm wire terminated at the CBC ground terminal bar at the Main Distribution Frame MDF 1 2 3 At the DC Power Cabinet connect a 10 AWG 25 6 mm ground wire to the Ground Discharge Bar See Figure 1 7 Route the 10 AWG 25 6 mm ground wire to the CBC ground terminal bar at the MDF Be sure a minimum of 12 inches 30 5 cm spacing is maintained between the CBC and other power and ground leads Tie wrap the ground wire to the inside wiring cable gt NOTE The ground wires are connected to the CBC as instructed in Chapter 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling 2 Connect DC Battery and Power Cabinet Grounds T 3 Measure and cut a 6 AWG 40 16 mm wire comcode 846110971 long enough to reach between the ground connection terminal in the DC Battery Cabinet and the Ground Discharge Bar in the DC Power Cabinet See Crimp terminal lugs on each end of the wire Terminal lugs are furnished as part of D 181895 Kit of Parts comcode 105434559 At the DC Power Cabinet connect the wire to the Ground Discharge Bar 4 Route the wire through 1 of the holes in the side of the cabinets and terminate it on the Ground Connection Terminal in the DC Battery Cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Insta
331. ntire fiber link re to the RX connector on the opposite end of the link remote EPN Refer to Figure A 2 for a typical fiber route 1 Remove the fiber cable from the RX connector at the local 300A Attach the power meter to the fiber cable Note the reading Reconnect the RX cable Repeat the test at the RX connector at the remote 300A Note the reading Reconnect the RX cable Using Figure A 1 determine the type of in line attenuator required for each direction in the tested fiber link gt NOTE Using the maximum power budget of 17dB in any fiber link may cause problems if the fiber plant is damaged and additional connectors or splices are added Maintain a margin of at least 1dB 2dB is the industry standard O oo fF WO DY DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Optical Cross Connect Hardware Page A 7 When to Use Single Mode Fiber Attenuators For 300A operation single mode fiber loss must be between 10dB and 17dB at 1300 to 1310 nm Since saturation may occur if distances are short attenuators may be required if the total loss on the fiber link is less than 10dB Perform an OTDR or Optical Power Meter test to determine specific requirements Typically fiber distances of 9 miles 14 km or less require an in line attenuator Using Figure A 1 find the line that most closely matches th
332. nto the equipment room table Install a 715 BCS Terminal 1 Plug the keyboard cable into the 6 pin mini DIN jack on the rear of the terminal See Callout 2 in on page 3 4 2 Plug the supplied 25 pin Data Terminal Equipment DTE cable into the P2 port center connector on the rear of the terminal Install a 2900 715 BCS Terminal 1 Plug the keyboard cable into the 6 pin RJ 11 jack on the left side of the terminal An adapter cable is available to convert a 6 pin mini DIN jack to an RJ 11 jack to allow a 715 BCS keyboard to be used comcode 847489895 or 847489903 2 Plug the supplied 25 pin Data Terminal Equipment DTE cable into the P2 port right side connector See Callout 4 in Figure 3 2 on page 3 4 Install a 715 BCS 2 Terminal 1 Plug the keyboard cable into the modular keyboard jack on the rear of the terminal See Callout 5 in Figure 3 2 This is a unique cable and must be connected to the 715 BCS 2 only 2 Plug the supplied 25 pin Data Terminal Equipment DTE cable H600 426 into the COM1 port right side connector DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Install Management Terminal Page 3 4 Q p ee ee m O 09000000000000 OO 0o0o00000000000 oo 0000000000000 O o o P2 DTE P1 DCE P1 DCE P2 DTE AUX PORT MAIN PORT ro 0000000000000 oo 00000000000
333. ntral interface between the processor port network and expansion port networks in a CSS connected system central office CO The location housing telephone switching equipment that provides local telephone service and access to toll facilities for long distance calling central office CO codes The first three digits of a 7 digit public network telephone number in the United States central office CO trunk A telecommunications channel that provides access from the system to the public network through the local CO CEPT1 European Conference of Postal and Telecommunications Rate 1 channel 1 A circuit switched call 2 A communications path for transmitting voice and data 3 In wideband all of the time slots contiguous or noncontiguous necessary to support a call Example an HO channel uses six 64 kbps time slots 4 A DSO on a T1 or E1 facility not specifically associated with a logical circuit switched call analogous to a single trunk channel negotiation The process by which the channel offered in the Channel Identification Information Element CIIE in the SETUP message is negotiated to be another channel acceptable to the switch that receives the SETUP message and ultimately to the switch that sent the SETUP Negotiation is attempted only if the CIIE is encoded as Preferred Channel negotiation is not attempted for wideband calls CI Clock input circuit 1 An arrangement of electrical elements through which electric curr
334. o disable auto answer 7 Disconnect the RS 232 cable from the terminal and connect it to the TERMINAL connector on the rear of the system cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add External Modem to TN1648B Page 5 96 Add External Modem to TN1648B Use a type approved external modem Unpack and Inspect 1 Verify the equipment received See Figure 5 44 Actual equipment may vary in appearance and may ship in separate packages 2 See Table 5 19 for a list of part comcodes indakit2 RPY 021898 Figure Notes 1 Pass thru Tool 4 Cable Tie Mount 2 Panel Adapter Bracket 5 Cable Tie 3 Cable Assembly Figure 5 44 Pass Thru Kit Equipment DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add External Modem to TN1648B Page 5 97 Table 5 19 Quantity Description Comcode 1 Pass thru Tool 847978715 Panel Adapter Bracket 4s wren nnnne nae Cable Assembly 2 10 Cable Ties 407814672 Cable Tie Mounts 403053150 Cabinet Preparation 1 Open the front door gt NOTE Administration may be required before removing the circuit pack in the following step Determine which slot will contain
335. ocol UUI User to user information Issue 5 May 1998 Page GL 50 V VAR Value added reseller VDN See vector directory number VDN vector directory number VDN An extension that provides access to the Vectoring feature on the switch Vectoring allows a customer to specify the treatment of incoming calls based on the dialed number vector controlled split A hunt group or ACD split administered with the vector field enabled Access to such a split is possible only by dialing a VDN extension VIS Voice Information System VLSI Very large scale integration VM Voltmeter VNI Virtual nodepoint identifier voice terminal A single line or multiappearance telephone Ww WATS See Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 51 WCC World Class Core WCR World Class Routing WCTD World Class Tone Detection WFB Wireless fixed base Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS A service in the United States that allows calls to certain areas for a flat rate charge based on expected usage wideband A circuit switched call at a data rate greater than 64 kbps A circuit switched call on a single T1 or E1 facility with a bandwidth between 128 and 1536 T1 or 1984 E1 kbps in multiples of 64 kbps HO H11 H12 and N x DSO calls a
336. of DS1 converter circuit packs and the associated T1 E1 facilities digital terminal data module DTDM An integrated or adjunct data module that shares with a digital telephone the same physical port for connection to a communications system The function of a DTDM is similar to that of a PDM and MPDM in that it converts RS 232C signals to DCP signals digital to analog converter DAC A device that converts data in digital form to the corresponding analog signals See also analog to digital converter ADC digital transmission A mode of transmission in which information to be transmitted is first converted to digital form and then transmitted as a serial stream of pulses DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 18 digital trunk A circuit that carries digital voice and or digital data in a telecommunications channel DIOD Direct Inward and Outward Dialing direct agent A feature accessed only via ASAI that allows a call to be placed in a split queue but routed only to a specific agent in that split The call receives normal ACD call treatment for example announcements and is measured as an ACD call while ensuring that a particular agent answers Direct Extension Selection DXS A feature on an attendant console that allows an attendant direct access to voice terminals by pressing a group select button an
337. on DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 About This Book Federal Communications Commission Statement Page xvi Federal Communications Commission Statement Part 68 Statement Part 68 Answer Supervision Signaling Allowing this equipment to be operated in a manner that does not provide proper answer supervision signaling is in violation of Part 68 rules This equipment returns answer supervision signals to the public switched network when Answered by the called station Answered by the attendant Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE user This equipment returns answer supervision signals on all DID calls forwarded back to the public switched telephone network Permissible exceptions are Acall is unanswered A busy tone is received m A reorder tone is received Lucent Technologies attests that this registered equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of access codes Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990 This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment If requ
338. on Do not block or cover these openings Do not exceed recommended environmental temperatures Operate these products only from the type of power source indicated on the product labels DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment 1145B Power Supply Page 5 53 The power unit is equipped with a 3 wire grounding type plug a plug having a third grounding pin This plug will only fit into a grounding type power outlet This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet contact an electrician to replace the outlet Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug Do not allow anything to rest on or spill into the products a To reduce risk of fire and electrical shock do not overload power outlets Never push objects of any kind through the power supply or distribution unit slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock a To reduce risk of electric shock do not disassemble these products Return them for repair when needed Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the products are subsequently used Power down the power unit see label on power unit on how to do this and refer servicing und
339. ool A CAUTION Avoid bending fiber optic cables to a radius smaller than 1 5 inches 3 8 cm to prevent mechanical stress on the cables A CAUTION During the actual installation of fiber optic components use either all beige or all blue adapters Beige denotes multimode fiber and blue denotes single mode fiber Do not mix beige with blue 3 Attach the supplied fiber optic cable to the adapter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add the Fiber Optic Cable Page 5 79 4 Pull the tool with adapter and cable attached out through the front of the cabinet See Figure 5 35 5 From the rear route the fiber optic cable through the opening vacated by the I O cable connector 6 If necessary remove the fiber adapter from the tool and plug the fiber optic cable into the SC SC single mode or ST SC multimode adapter See Figure 5 36 Check the house cabling before selecting a coupling to use 7 From the front of the I O connector adapter bracket with fiber cable snap the coupling into the supplied I O connector adapter bracket 8 Snap the I O connector adapter bracket into the I O connector opening Attach the outside fiber plant to the I O connector on the rear of the cabinet
340. or DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment 1151A Power Supply Page 5 56 Connect the 1151A or 1151A2 Power Supplies The 1151A is a standard no battery backup power supply unit The 1151A2 isa battery backup version of the 1151A Either power supply can support 1 telephone with or without an adjunct The maximum loop range is 250 feet 76 meters Two modular jacks are used Power is provided on the PHONE jack pins 7 and 8 and respectively The PHONE and LINE jacks are 8 pin female non keyed 657 type jacks that can accept D4 D6 and D8 modular plug cables Figure 5 22 shows an 1151A Power Supply The 1151A2 looks similar pwr_sup1 CJL 051496 Figure 5 22 Typical 1151A Power Supply Front DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment BRI Terminating Resistor Page 5 57 BRI Terminating Resistor The resistors balance the cable plant between the receiver and the transmitter on the interface When using the TN2198 ISDN BRI 2 Wire U Interface circuit pack an NT1 is required A terminating resistor is always required near the terminal when the BRI S type interface circuit pack TN556 BRI 4 Wire S NT Line circuit pack is used see 5ESS Switch In
341. or AUDIX System errors If the AUDIX remained in the cabinet but power was removed from the cabinet 1 Power up the cabinet The AUDIX reboots automatically 2 Check for AUDIX System errors If the AUDIX remained in the cabinet and the cabinet was not powered down 1 Atthe AUDIX console hold the crti key and enter cc Enter 5 at the prompt In about 2 minutes the AUDIX boots up When the system initialization is complete log in as craft Check for AUDIX System errors gt OO PY DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 4 Test the System Page 4 1 Test the System The following tests provide verification of the TDM bus cables and terminators and fiber optic inter cabinet cables If a FAIL result code is seen or other problems are indicated check these cables If problems continue refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6r or DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs si gt NOTE Refer to LED Indicators on page 4 13 for information regarding the LED status indicators for the different circuit packs 1 The status of the system should be reviewed first Test the tone clock TDM bus and duplication link in the PPN Test the Switch Node carrier Release 6r only gt OU N Test Expansion Interface circuit packs tone clock circuit pack
342. or Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Cleaning Fiber Optic Cables Page A 16 Rule 5 Ensure fiber optic cables are not pressed against any sheet metal edges by subsequently installed cables Rule 6 If the fiber link is duplicated route the fiber via a separate geographical path if possible This way if the standard fiber link is cut or damaged the duplicated fiber remains in service Cleaning Fiber Optic Cables The use of isopropyl alcohol is recommended to properly clean fiber optic cables Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for more information 1 Moisten a lint free cloth with isopropyl alcohol 2 Gently wipe the ceramic ferrule with the cloth Be sure to wipe the entire length of the ferrule and the ferrule tip 3 Dry the ferrule with air 4 If the connector is not being used immediately cover the connector with the dust cap Labels for Fiber Optic Cables Cable Labels Cable labels with adhesive backing are installed on each end of a fiber optic cable Each label displays the following information The numbers of the cabinets carriers and slots connected by the cable a Information on the cable itself such as cable comcode number and how it is used Cross Connect Labels The label used with cross connect fiber optic cables shows the cabinet carrier and slot numbers of the source of the cable It also indicates that the cable goes to the LIU The type of cab
343. order of their arrival to await connection to an attendant to an answering group or to an idle trunk Calls are automatically connected in first in first out sequence R RAM See DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 42 random access memory RAM A storage arrangement whereby information can be retrieved at a speed independent of the location of the stored information RBS Robbed bit signaling RC Radio controller RCL Restricted call list read only memory ROM A storage arrangement primarily for information retrieval applications recall dial tone Tones signalling that the system has completed a function such as holding a call and is ready to accept dialing redirection criteria Information administered for each voice terminal s coverage path that determines when an incoming call is redirected to coverage Redirection on No Answer An optional feature that redirects an unanswered ringing ACD call after an administered number of rings The call is then redirected back to the agent remote home numbering plan area code RHNPA A foreign numbering plan area code that is treated as a home area code by the Automatic Route Selection ARS feature Calls can be allowed or denied based on the area code and the dialed CO code rather than just the area code If the call is allowed the ARS patter
344. ot Used 17 Not Used 43 Not Used 18 Not Used 44 Not Used 19 Not Used 45 Not Used 20 Not Used 46 Not Used 21 Not Used 47 Not Used 22 Not Used 48 Not Used 23 Not Used 49 Not Used 24 Not Used 50 Not Used 25 Not Used gt NOTE RS 232 alarms RXD DTR DSR TXD RS 232 GRD and RTS are not supported on the BU3200A Battery Interface Unit DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Connect Power Distribution Unit External Alarm Wires Page 5 21 1 2 Choose an alarm to connect such as Battery Interface Failure Choose the port circuit pack to use and its carrier and slot number from Table 5 3 For example TN2183 Analog Line Cabinet 1 Carrier C Slot 1 3 Choose a port circuit on the port circuit pack for example Port 3 4 Install cross connect jumpers to connect the named pins from the alarm wires to the appropriate pins on the port circuit pack gt NOTE It is recommended that the RFA ACF and BIF alarm leads be connected to the major alarm device and the BOD alarm leads be connected to the minor alarm device Connect the major and minor alarm devices to the appropriate cross connect pins on the MDF Administer the alarms using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server
345. ources Power Input AC power distribution J58890CE 1 and J58890CE 2 Multi Carrier Cabinet Single phase 120 VAC with neutral Single phase 240 VAC with neutral or single phase of 3 phase 208 VAC with neutral 120 VAC 60 Hz NEMA 5 50R 208 240 VAC 60 Hz NEMA L14 30R AC power distribution J58890CH 1 Multi Carrier Cabinet Single Phase 176 264 VAC 200 240 Volts 50 60 Hz NEMA L6 30R Installations outside the United States require a receptacle suitable for use in the country of installation gt NOTE The type of power required is shown on the cabinet s rear door DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect AC Power and Ground Page 1 8 CAUTION The equipment room AC power and ground wiring must be performed by a qualified electrician Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 System Description Pocket Reference for site requirement information CAUTION The power circuit must be dedicated to the system and must not be shared with other equipment and must not be controlled by a wall switch The AC receptacle should not be located under the MDF CAUTION System grounding must comply with the general rules for grounding contained in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code NEC National Fire Protection Agency NFPA 70 or the ap
346. ower cannot be shared between cabinets Set the main circuit breaker on the DC Battery Cabinet and the DC Power Cabinet to OFF Measure and cut a 6 AWG 40 16 mm wire long enough to reach from the DC Battery Cabinet s 48 Volt DC terminal to a DC OUTPUT circuit breaker on the DC Power Cabinet Atthe DC Battery Cabinet connect the 48 volt DC wire to the 48 VDC connector Connect the 48 volt RTN wire to the ground connection terminal Route the wires out of the cabinet through the hole in the lower rear cover and to the DC Power Cabinet Atthe DC Power Cabinet terminate the 48 volt DC wire on a DC OUTPUT circuit breaker Terminate the 48 volt RTN return wire on the ground discharge bar DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect DC Power and Ground Page 1 22 Mixed AC DC Power and Ground Figure 1 8 shows a power and ground layout for a mixed AC DC powered cabinet configuration in the same equipment room with the PPN being DC powered and the EPN being AC powered If a second EPN is part of the system use the same basic connections shown in Figure 1 8 1 0 AWG 50 mm up to 50 feet 15 2 m or engineered for less than 0 5 voltage drop per conductor Approved To ground AC power source PPN EPN cabinet cabinet AC power cord AC power distribution singl
347. p card and replace it with the original card Label the backup card with the date and time of the backup and store it in a secure place Save Translations Release 6r To copy the current system translations onto both disks 1 2 Enter the save translation command Verify the save completes to both disks and returns a result code of 0 zero Add Translations 1 Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description to add new terminals Enter the save translation command to merge these translations with the contents of disk or flash memory If a standard reliability Release 6r system is installed enter the backup disk incremental command If a high or critical reliability Release 6r system is installed enter the backup disk incremental both command DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Installation Completion Page 3 31 Installation Completion 1 The system must now be tested for proper operation See Chapter 4 Test the System 2 After completion of the system tests install the telephones and other equipment See Chapter 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment 3 Administer the system by adding the customer data to match the wiring telephones and other equipment See DEFINI
348. page 2 23 and Figure 2 14 ure 2 14jon page 2 24 show trunk pairs connected to the cabinet with jumper wires to establish 3 pair modularity 12345678 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 4 7 101316 19 22 1 4 7 1013 16 19 22 1 4 7 1013 16 19 22 r758425b MMR 031496 Figure Notes 1 Green Field 3 Pairs 2 1 Pair Jumpers 4 Purple Field Figure 2 13 3 Pair Modularity for Trunk Pairs for 1 Pair Trunks To connect the trunk pairs to the purple field 1 Connect B25A cables between the network interface and the sneak fuse panels See Figure 2 13 2 Connect A25D B25A cables from the sneak fuse panels to the 110 type terminal block type connecting block connectors in the green field 3 Connect 1 pair patch cords jumper wires from each 110 type terminal block row in the green field to the 110 type terminal block rows in the purple field for 1 pair Central Office CO trunks or in Figure 2 14 on page 2 24 for 3 pair tie trunks DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Cable Installation Page 2 24 123 45 67 8 9 101112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 123 45 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1234567 8 9101112 1758537b MMR 031496 Fi
349. pe the day of month 1 through 31 and press Tab to move to the next field 6 The cursor is positioned on the Year field Type the current year and press TAB to move to the next field 7 The cursor is positioned on the Hour field Type the current hour for a 24 hour clock Press Tab to move to the next field 8 The cursor is positioned on the Minute field Type current minute 0 through 59 Seconds cannot be set 9 Press Enter when the information is correct 10 Type display time and press Enter to verify date time data DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Circuit Pack Administration Page 3 17 Circuit Pack Administration After the equipment is installed including circuit packs the circuit packs must be administered Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description for more information The following information describes general administration information Use the Circuit Packs form to administer circuit packs to carrier slots The circuit packs must be installed or assigned using the Circuit Packs form before administering voice terminals attendant consoles or trunks Each page of the form represents 1 carrier in the cabinet shown on the command line For Release 6si all carriers and slots appear even if they are not in
350. plicable electric code in the country containing the equipment For more information refer to Approved Grounds jon page 1 23 Connect Ground to AC Powered System J58890CE Grounding is relatively simple for an AC powered system Basically the cabinets connect to the single point ground terminal block located at either the AC load center or to a separate single point ground block wired to the AC load center or optional AC protector cabinet The approved ground wire must be a green or green with yellow stripe 6 AWG 40 16 mm copper stranded wire Bond all approved grounds at the single point ground to form a single grounding electrode system AC Load Center is 50 Feet 15 2 m or Less from Cabinet 1 Atthe bottom rear of the PPN cabinet connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm CABINET GROUND wire to the cabinet ground terminal block See Figure 1 1 2 Route the CABINET GROUND wire to the single point ground block at the AC load center and connect 3 At the bottom rear of the first EPN cabinet if provided connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm CABINET GROUND wire to the cabinet ground terminal block 4 Route the CABINET GROUND wire to the single point ground block at the AC load center and connect DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect AC Power and Ground Page 1 9 gt NOTE If th
351. porary Signaling Connection cause value A value is returned in response to requests or in event reports when a denial or unexpected condition occurs ASAI cause values fall into two coding standards Coding Standard 0 includes any cause values that are part of AT amp T and CCITT ISDN specifications Coding standard 3 includes any other ASAI cause values This document uses a notation for cause value where the coding standard for the cause is given first then a slash then the cause value Example CS0 100 is coding standard 0 cause value 100 CBC Call by call or coupled bonding conductor CC Country code CCIS Common Channel Interoffice Signaling CCITT CCITT Comitte Consultatif International Telephonique et Telegraphique now called International Telecommunications Union ITU See International Telecommunications Union ITU CCMS Control Channel Message Set ccs See CCS or hundred call seconds CCSA Common Control Switching Arrangement CDM Channel division multiplexing CDOS Customer dialed and operator serviced CDR See Call Detail Recording CDR CDRP Call Detail Record Poller CDRR Call Detail Recording and Reporting CDRU See Call Detail Recording utility CDRU DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 12 CEM Channel expansion multiplexing center stage switch CSS The ce
352. port of a TN754 TN413 or TN2136 Digital Line circuit pack and a port of either an 8 port TN742 TN769 or TN467 or a 16 port TN746B TN468B TN2135 TN2144 or TN2149 Analog Line circuit pack for each conversion resource provided 1 Determine the port assignment of the circuit pack to be added if required 2 Install the appropriate circuit pack in assigned carrier slot if required 3 Administer the forms listed under Modem Pooling in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add External Modem to EPN Page 5 94 Add External Modem to EPN U S Robotics Model 839 External Modem MME TIM ED cydfepnm KLC 100397 Figure Notes 1 U S Robotics External Modem 3 Expansion Port Network 2 RS 232 Cable Figure 5 42 Connect External Modem to EPN 1 Connect an RS 232 cable to the modem See Figure 5 42 gt NOTE In the following steps a PC with Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 may be substituted for the dumb terminal Use the Hyperterminal terminal emulation application 2 Connect the opposite end of the RS 232 cable to a dumb terminal 3 Set the dumb terminal to full duplex mode 4 Enter AT amp N6 to set the
353. prise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 6 Test Telephones and Other Equipment Test Telephones and Other Equipment Issue 5 May 1998 Page 6 1 This chapter describes how to test the telephones and other equipment The following tests are included in this chapter 1 Is est 302C Attendant Console est Selector Console est External Ringing A ol A fe D D D td O o est Queue Warning Indicator est Integrated Announcement est Music on Hold est Emergency Transfer 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Test Remote Access Interface formerly INADS 0 10 est Basic Rate Interface BRI 11 Test Duplication Option Processing Element Interchange 12 Test Terminating Trunk Transmission 13 Test Stratum 3 Clock The following tests are acceptance tests and provide some assurance the system will perform properly after installation and administration If problems occur or more extensive tests are required refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6r or to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs si DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 6 Test Telephones and Other Equipment Make Test Calls Page 6 2 Make Test Calls Make 2 calls from 1 telephone to another telephon
354. prise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 6 Test Telephones and Other Equipment Test Basic Rate Interface Page 6 5 Local Test 1 Log in and enter the test inads link command Request remote access personnel to verify a trouble ticket was created Check error log to verify no problems gt A OU N Log off the system Test Basic Rate Interface Check for normal voice telephone function dial tone ability to make and receive calls Check for the correct Service Profile Identifier SPID on a display telephone and the management terminal Test Duplication Option Processing Element Interchange The process of the standby Processing Element PE taking over for the active PE is referred to as a PE Interchange This interchange should not be performed immediately after powering up the system Wait a few minutes to allow the system to complete its internal tests The system default is PE_B after powering up the system so the active PE should be the B processor for this test and the interchange should make PE_A the active PE Verify the system can successfully perform a PE interchange 1 Atthe management terminal verify the screen displays PE_B in the upper right corner 2 Enter check status command Verify PE_B is in the standby mode If it is proceed to Step 4 If itis not proceed to Step 3 3 Enter refresh spr standby command 4
355. r provided The alarm device must not exceed a rating of more than 30 VAC RMS or 60 VDC at 0 75 Amp 1 Connect an external alarm output through pins 48 and 23 of the AUX connector See Table 5 6 2 Note which device connects to which alarm and give this information to your Lucent Technologies representative for troubleshooting purposes Table 5 6 Alarm Output at AUX Connector Color AUX Connector Violet Green EXTALMA Pin 48 Alarm Output Green Violet EXTALMB Pin 23 Ground Alarm Output DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Connect External Alarm Indicators Page 5 18 Emergency Transfer and Auxiliary Power Connect emergency transfer power and auxiliary power as shown in Table 5 7 Auxiliary power includes power to an attendant console or adjunct device Table 5 7 Emergency Transfer and Auxiliary Power Color AUX Connector Black Green XFER48 Emergency Transfer Pin 36 Green Black Ground Pin 11 Black Slate ACC48A Adjunct 48 VDC Pin 19 Slate Black Ground Pin 44 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Issue 5 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Connect Power Distribution Unit External Alarm Wires Page 5 19 Connect Power Distribution Unit External
356. r Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 3 adjunct controlled split An ACD split that is administered to be under adjunct control Agents logged into such splits must do all telephony work ACD login logout and changes of work mode through the adjunct except for auto available adjunct controlled splits whose agents may not log in out or change work mode adjunct monitored call An adjunct controlled call active notification call or call that provides event reporting over a domain control association Adjunct Switch Application Interface ASAI A recommendation for interfacing adjuncts and communications systems based on the CCITT Q 932 specification for layer 3 ADM Asynchronous data module administer To access and change parameters associated with the services or features of a system Administered Connection AC A feature that allows the switch to automatically establish and maintain end to end connections between access endpoints trunks and or data endpoints data modules administration group See administration terminal A terminal that is used to administer and maintain a system See also terminal Administration Without Hardware AWOH A feature that allows administration of ports without associated terminals or other hardware ADU Seejasynchronous data unit ADU AE See access endpoint after call work ACW mode A mode in which agents are unavailable to receive ACD calls Agent
357. r Off Cable and External Alarm Cable a Connect External Alarm Cable m Connect AC Power to Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet a Connect DC Power and Ground to Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet a Fiber Optic Interconnect Cabling a Earthquake Protection Installation 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling a Equipment Room Hardware a Main Distribution Frame a Installation Requirements DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Contents Page iv a Install Equipment and Cables a Install Cable Slack Managers a Install Sneak Fuse Panels a Cable Installation a Install Coupled Bonding Conductor a Station Wiring Design a Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room a Layout m Voice and Data Terminals a Label the Main Distribution Frame a Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration rd j AJA oO 0 a Create a Provisioning Plan 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System a Install Management Terminal Activate the System m Screens and Commands a System Administration a Set Country Options a Circuit Pack Administration w e IN a Set System Maintenance Parameters a Administer System Configurations Release 6r a Administer Fiber Links Release 6r Only a Reboot High Reliability System
358. r Support Organization NEC National Engineering Center NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer s Association NETCON Network control circuit pack network A series of points nodes or stations connected by communications channels network specific facility NSF An information element in an ISDN PRI message that specifies which public network service is used NSF applies only when Call by Call Service Selection is used to access a public network service network interface A common boundary between two systems in an interconnected group of systems DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 36 NFAS See Nonfacility associated signaling NFAS NI Network interface NID Network Inward Dialing NM Network management NN National number node A switching or control point for a network Nodes are either tandem they receive signals and pass them on or terminal they originate or terminate a transmission path Nonfacility associated signaling NFAS A method that allows multiple T1 and or E1 facilities to share a single D channel to form an ISDN PRI If D channel backup is not used one facility is configured with a D channel and the other facilities that share the D channel are configured without D channels If D channel backup is used two facilities are configured to have D channels one D c
359. r consists of a 10 AWG 25 6 mm wire tie wrapped to the inside wiring cable and terminated at the CBC terminal bar at the MDF Maintain a minimum of 12 inches 30 5 cm spacing between the CBC and other power and ground leads The 10 AWG 25 6 mm wire must be long enough to reach the telecommunications cables at the rear of the system cabinets follow these cables to the MDF and to terminate at the CBC 1 Cut a 10 AWG 25 6 mm wire long enough to reach from the system s single point ground block or DC power cabinet ground discharge bar to the MDF CBC block 2 Connect 1 end of the 10 AWG 25 6 mm2 wire to the single point ground block or ground discharge bar 3 Route the wire next to the 25 pair cables connecting to the trunk auxiliary purple field 4 Tie wrap the 10 AWG 25 6 mm wire to the 25 pair cables 5 Connect the 10 AWG 25 6 mm wire to the MDF CBC ground block 6 Repeat the above steps for each CBC ground wire DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Install Coupled Bonding Conductor Page 2 27 cbc_gnd_1 PDH 062696 Figure Notes 1 25 Pair Tip amp Ring Cables to 8 To Network Cabinets Cabinets 9 Battery Plant Ground Discharge Bar 2 Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC for Single Point Ground Tarina Block 10 Cross
360. r toa processor interface data terminal equipment DTE Equipment consisting of the endpoints in a connection over a data circuit In a connection between a data terminal and host the terminal the host and their associated modems or data modules make up the DTE dB Decibel DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 16 dBA Decibels in reference to amperes dBrnC Decibels above reference noise with C filter DC Direct current DCE Data communications equipment D channel backup Type of backup used with Non Facility Associated Signaling NFAS A primary D channel provides signaling for an NFAS D channel group two or more PRI facilities A second D channel on a separate PRI facility of the NFAS D channel group is designated as backup for the D channel Failure of the primary D channel causes automatic transfer of call control signaling to the backup D channel The backup becomes the primary D channel When the failed channel returns to service it becomes the backup D channel DCO Digital central office DCP Digital Communications Protocol DCS Distributed Communications System DDC Direct Department Calling DDD Direct Distance Dialing delay dial trunk A trunk that allows dialing directly into a communications system digits are received as they are dialed denying a request Sending a
361. ransmission is not regular characters typed at a keyboard Also called asynchronous transmission See also synchronous data transmission asynchronous data unit ADU A device that allows direct connection between RS 232C equipment and a digital switch asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM A packet like switching technology in which data is transmitted in fixed size 53 byte cells ATM provides high speed access for data communication in LAN campus and WAN environments ATB See All trunks busy ATB ATD See Attention dial ATD attendant A person at a console who provides personalized service for incoming callers and voice services users by performing switching and signaling operations See alsojattendant console DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 6 ATM Seelasynchronous Transfer Mode ATM attendant console The workstation used by an attendant The attendant console allows the attendant to originate a call answer an incoming call transfer a call to another extension or trunk put a call on hold and remove a call from hold Attendants using the console can also manage and monitor some system operations Also called console See alsojattendant Attention dial ATD Acommand in the Hayes modem command set for asynchronous modems Audio Information Exchange AUDIX A fully integrated voice
362. rcuit pack the following warning message appears WARNING This restore announcement command will overwrite the existing announcements on the specified board After 5 minutes with no alterations to the announcements the TN750C automatically copies the announcements from the Voice RAM to the internal flash memory The yellow LED on the front of the TN750C flashes You can only save the announcement contents of 1 circuit pack to mass storage at a time For the contents of every circuit pack save to separate translation cards Label each card to match the circuit pack saved to it TN750 and TN750B Announcement Circuit Packs gt NOTE The following save and restore procedures are only necessary for TN750 and TN750B announcement circuit packs The recorded announcements in the system can be saved on the mass storage system by entering the save announcements spe active spe standby command These commands should only be used after business hours or when the system is operating during a low usage period The system takes about 40 minutes to transfer the recorded announcements from the announcement circuit pack to the mass storage system During this time period the management terminal cannot be used to administer the system until the transfer finishes however all other administration terminals if provided are allowed to perform administration procedures The recorded announcements in the system can be restored to system memory from th
363. rcuit packs 4 15 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Index LEDs con t maintenance test circuit packs 4 16 standby components 4 16 switch node interface 4 15 tone clock circuit packs 4 16 lightguide connector panel A 12 lightguide distribution shelf A 9 Lightguide Interconnect Unit see LIU lightguide shelf fiber optic A 6 list configuration all command 4 3 list configuration command 4 12 LIU A 6 log in procedure 3 11 log in to system 3 11 loop range 1151A 5 56 Issue 5 May 1998 Page IN 9 M M25A cable 3 6 Macedonia country code 3 13 main circuit breaker 1 20 Main Distribution Frame 2 1 maintenance test circuit pack LEDs 4 16 major alarm contact 5 17 major alarms 4 13 management terminal commands introduction 3 10 management terminal installation 3 2 to 3 7 Mexico country code 3 13 minor alarms 4 13 Model 15A Announcement System 1 5 modem external switch settings B 2 modem pooled 5 93 month names table of English 3 16 Mu Law companding 3 12 multi mode fiber optic transceiver A 3 multi mode transceiver A 15 multipoint figure 5 63 music on hold test procedure 6 4 N National Electrical Code grounding rules 1 8 Netherlands country code 3 13 DEFINITY Enterprise Communication
364. rcuit packs 5 64 CO trunk 5 85 5 89 code calling access 5 93 DID trunk 5 86 DS1 tie trunk 5 89 FX trunk 5 85 5 89 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Index adding con t ISDN PRI over PACCON 5 124 OPS trunk 5 89 PCOL trunk 5 85 pooled modem 5 93 PRI over PACCON 5 124 speech synthesis 5 93 tie trunk 5 87 WATS trunk 5 85 5 89 adjunct power 5 4 alarm connections 5 17 relay contact 5 17 wiring example 5 5 alarms categories 4 13 levels 4 13 log of 3 13 Terminal Alarm Notification 4 13 warning 4 13 A Law companding 3 12 analog station 2 wire 5 5 wiring example 5 5 analog tie trunk wiring example 5 6 announcement delete procedure 6 3 integrated test procedure 6 3 playback procedure 6 3 record procedure 6 3 APP connector information 5 143 5 153 to 5 155 D 1 approved floor grounds 1 24 approved ground 1 23 approved grounds 1 8 Argentina country code 3 13 attendant console 5 3 302C1 5 3 example wiring 5 3 maximum cabling distance 5 3 test procedure 6 2 attendant console LEDs 4 13 attenuators single mode A 7 Audichron H9040 Wake Up Announcement System 1 4 AUDIX important caution about powering down 3 13 Australia country code 3 13 Auxiliary cabinet AC to DC power supply 1 4 Auxiliary cabinet DC connector block 1 4 Auxiliary cabinet fuse panel
365. re endpoints and none of these circuit packs are capable of interfacing both 26B1 Selector Console 1 2 3 Connect the supplied 3 foot 0 9 m D8AC cable to the modular jack on the bottom of the 26B1 Selector Console Route the cable to the attendant console and connect to the DXS BLF jack Attach labels according to the attendant console form Administer the console using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Connect External Alarm Indicators Page 5 17 Connect External Alarm Indicators Alarm Input Alarms can be generated on adjunct equipment sent to the DEFINITY System and recorded and reported as external alarms A typical major alarm inputis from an Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS 1 Connect 1 major and 1 minor alarm input pair to the trunk auxiliary field from the AUX connector See Table 5 5 Table 5 5 Alarm Inputs at AUX Connector Color AUX Connector White Blue AP1 Pin 26 Major Alarm Input Blue White Ground Pin 1 White Orange AP2 Pin 27 Minor Alarm Input Orange White Ground Pin 2 Alarm Output The system provides a relay contact that can operate a customer provided alarm such as a light or bell The circuitry and power source are custome
366. re Center Troughs 2 Cable Slack Manager 5 Cabinet Trough for Port Cables 3 Cable Clamp Figure 2 6 Cable Routing Through Cable Slack Manager DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Install Sneak Fuse Panels Page 2 13 Cable clamps are required in installations with cable slack managers At the rear of the cabinets install 2 cable clamps using the screws provided These clamps hold the 25 pair input output or MDF cables in place Figure 2 6 shows cable clamp placement and cable routing Install Sneak Fuse Panels Sneak current protection is required between the incoming RJ21X or RU2GX network interface and the system for both trunk and off premise circuit packs The Model 507B sneak current fuse panel or equivalent is recommended for sneak current protection See Figure 2 7 The panel contains two 25 pair connectors fuse removal tool and fifty 220029 Sneak Fuses and 2 spares B25A connector cables connect the network interface to the sneak fuse panel Also 157B connecting blocks equipped with SCP 110 protectors can be used for sneak current protection Table 2 1 Sneak Fuse Panel Ordering Information Description Comcode 157B Connecting Block 403613003 SCP 110 Protector 406948976 507B Sneak Current Fuse Panel 107435091 220029 Sneak Current Fuse 407216316 gt NOTE
367. re wideband wideband access endpoint Access endpoints extended with wideband switching to include wideband access endpoints A wideband access endpoint consists of one or more contiguous DSOs on a line side T1 or E1 facility and has an extension The Administered Connections feature provides call control for calls originating from wideband access endpoints wink start tie trunk A trunk with which after making a connection with a distant switching system for an outgoing call the system waits for a momentary signal wink before sending the digits of the called number Similarly on an incoming call the system sends the wink signal when ready to receive digits work mode One of four states Auto In Manual In ACW AUX Work that an ACD agent can be in Upon logging in an agent enters AUX Work mode To become available to receive ACD calls the agent enters Auto In or Manual In mode To do work associated with a completed ACD call an agent enters ACW mode work state An ACD agent may be a member of up to three different splits Each ACD agent continuously exhibits a work state for every split of which it is a member Valid work states are Avail Unstaffed AUX Work ACW ACD answering an ACD call ExtIn ExtOut and OtherSpl An agent s work state for a particular split may change for a variety of reasons example when a call is answered or abandoned or the agent changes work modes The BCMS feature monitors work states and uses this i
368. red as an SNI its corresponding endpoint on the B PNC side is determined if switch nodes are paired in the cabinet form prior to this administration and displayed However administration of the duplicate B PNC link is not enforced until duplication is in full operation Duplication Related System Parameters Form An additional field appears to enable operation of PNC duplication Enter the change system parameters customer options command On Page 2 of the form set the PNC Duplication field to y Press Enter Enter the change system parameters duplication command Change the Enable operation of PNC duplication field to y Press Enter 3 Enter the status pnc command Verify the Duplicated field is yes 4 Enter the list fiber command All administered fiber connections display If a previously used fiber link is to be reused enter the add fiber lt number gt command If this is a new fiber link enter add fiber next DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Administer Fiber Links Release 6r Only Page 3 27 6 The Fiber Link Administration form appears On Page 1 enter the Board 11 12 13 15 Location for ENDPOINT 1 and ENDPOINT 2 This is the cabinet carrier and slot that identifies the physical location of an SNI or El circuit pack that is the first
369. rforming the following step 12 Replace the fan cover See Figure 5 38 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add the Fiber Optic Cable Page 5 82 Icda5fop RPY 021398 Figure 5 38 Replace the Fan Cover DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add the Fiber Optic Cable Page 5 83 13 Connect the fiber cable to the angled connector on the front of the circuit pack See Figure 5 39 scdafo_4 RPY 081997 Figure 5 39 Connect Fiber Cable to Circuit Pack 14 Dress the cable using the supplied cable ties and cable tie mounts See Figure 5 40 gt NOTE Dress the fiber optic cable straight down the front of the circuit pack Do not allow the cable to cross in front of another circuit pack DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and
370. rify that PNC Active is up and that the Service State is in A Span LED on the front of the DS1 Converter circuit pack must be on for each active facility administered For example if Facility A and Facility B are administered then the top 2 Span LEDs on the circuit pack must be on yellow The yellow LEDs are on only if no problems were encountered during the administration of hardware Span LEDs associated with non administered facilities C and D in this example should be off Perform a test call if desired Administer Fiber Links on Duplex Systems The PNC Duplication feature is enabled on the System Parameters Customer Options form and Operation of Duplication is enabled on the Duplication Related System Parameters form All non duplicated SNIs to SNI fiber links are automatically duplicated When PNC Duplication is enabled on the System Parameters Customer Options form the following administration forms change Cabinet Form Additional fields appear to allow administration of switch nodes to A PNC and B PNC sides of the CSS The B PNC is the duplicated hardware for the A PNC Either the A PNC or the B PNC can provide full customized service B PNC cannot be used in a simplex PNC configuration Pairing of switch nodes is also defined here Fiber Link Administration Form Additional fields appear to allow administration of fiber links on the B PNC side of the CSS If an endpoint on the A PNC side is administe
371. rise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Attendant Console Page 5 16 Attendant Console 1 4 Install the attendant console and connect the modular cord to the information outlet Install labels per the attendant console form and display module form assignments Install a TN754B or TN413 Digital Line circuit pack in the assigned carrier slot if an additional circuit pack is required Administer forms listed under Attendant Console in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description Hard Wire Bridging Analog type hard wire bridging is not allowed for 4 wire only DCP endpoints This is because hard wire bridging has no way of combining the digital output of 2 bridged DCP sets Also bridged endpoints cause an added load that degrades the DCP signal 2 wire DCP interfaces require twice the spectrum of 4 wire interfaces A CAUTION Bridging or paralleling these endpoints can cause electrical damage to the consoles or cause the circuit pack to remove power from the consoles Dual Wiring of Two Wire and Four Wire Endpoints A 2 wire and 4 wire endpoint cannot be simultaneously wired to the same equipment location in an MDF even though they connect to differently colored wire pairs The system uses separate circuit packs to interface 2 and 4 wi
372. rmation exchange The exchange of data between users of two different systems such as the switch and a host computer over a LAN Information Systems Network ISN A WAN and LAN with an open architecture combining host computers minicomputers word processors storage devices PCs high speed printers and nonintelligent terminals into a single packet switching system INS ISDN Network Service inside call A call placed from one telephone to another within the local communications system Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN A public or private network that provides end to end digital communications for all services to which users have access by a limited set of standard multipurpose user network interfaces defined by the CCITT Through internationally accepted standard interfaces ISDN provides digital circuit switched or packet switched communications within the network and links to other ISDNs to provide national and international digital communications See also Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface ISDN BRI and Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface ISDN PRI Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface ISDN BRI The interface between a communications system and terminal that includes two 64 kbps B channels for transmitting voice or data and one 16 kbps D channel for transmitting associated B channel call control and out of band signaling information ISDN BRI also incl
373. rminal and Activate System Page 3 1 Install Management Terminal and Activate System This chapter contains procedures for installing the management terminal and bringing the system up to a no red LEDs state This chapter details how to a install Management Termina a Activate the System m Power Up the System m Screens and Commands f stem Administration E ioe et Country Options a Q hange Craft Password m Set Date and Time 7 dminister System Configurations Release 6r dminister Fiber Links Release 6r Onl a m Set System Maintenance Parameters E ioe ave Translations iti DEFINITY AUDIX Power Procedures a Register the System a gt P ped Ep i A caution To prevent unnecessary trouble tickets do not enable the system alarms Alarm Origination feature before completing all installation and administration procedures This chapter describes basic system start up procedures only and is not intended to identify all system alarms or error conditions DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Install Management Terminal Page 3 2 Install Management Terminal Locate the management terminal within 50 feet 15 2 m of the system It may be necessary to reduce the maximum distance limitation if higher gauge wire is used or if the capacitive load o
374. ronic Telephone MET sets connected to TN735 MET Line circuit packs Analog telephones connected TN746 Analog Line circuit packs DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Off Premises or Out of Building Stations Page 5 34 Protector Ordering Information Description Comcode 3B1A Carbon Block 102381779 3B1E W Wide Gap Gas Tube 104410147 3C1S Solid State 105514756 4B1C Carbon Block with Heat Coil 102904893 4B1E W Wide Gap Gas Tube w Heat Coil 104401856 4C1S Solid State with Heat Coil 104386545 SCP 110 Sneak Current Protector 406948976 220029 Fuse sneak current protector 407216316 Digital Out of Building Voice Terminals Protection is required at both building entrances for digital out of building voice terminals There are 2 different types of protectors that can be used to protect digital voice terminals and digital line circuit packs in an out of building environment The 2 enhanced protectors to use are the 4C3S 75 and the ITW Linx These units provide primary and sneak current protection For sneak current protection the 4C3S 75 is equipped with a heat coil and the ITW Linx is equipped with replaceable fuses The 4C3S 75 may only be used with Vintage 14 or newer TN754 circuit packs The 4C3S 75 can be used on all vintages of the TN754B circuit packs Th
375. rrier C slot 02 port 05 3 Install cross connect jumpers to wire the pins on the terminal to the pins on the port circuit pack See Figure 5 2 This example is for the TN754B Digital Line circuit pack TXT 1 lt gt gt 39 TXT5 TXR 2 lt lt lt gt gt 14 TXR5 PXT 3 lt lt gt gt 40 PXT5 PXR 6 lt lt lt gt 15 pxRs gt O amp gt gt gt 302cwire RBP 040596 Figure Notes 1 302C Attendant Console 3 48 VDC From Adjunct Power 2 TN754B Digital Line Circuit Pack 4 Ground From Adjunct Power Figure 5 2 302C to TN754B Wiring Ax CAUTION Do not use the 329A power unit for the attendant console Use an 1151A 1151A2 1145A or MSP 1 power unit DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Page 5 4 Connect Adjunct Power The attendant console requires 48 VDC adjunct power from pins 7 and 8 of the information outlet Only 3 consoles can be powered by the cabinet from the AUX connector Power the primary console from the cabinet so it has the same power failure backup as the system 1 For terminals needing adjunct power wire 48 VDC and ground to appropriate pins on the terminal See Figure 5 3 Use the 400B2 adapter when connecting local 48 VDC power to a modular plug h E r749428 KLC 060396 F
376. rsal standards for data communications including ISDN ITU members are from telecommunications companies and organizations around the world SeelalsoBX 25 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 28 International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee See lnternational Telecommunications Union ITU interflow The ability for calls to forward to other splits on the same PBX or a different PBX using the Call Forward All Calls feature intraflow The ability for calls to redirect to other splits on the same PBX on a conditional or unconditional basis using call coverage busy don t answer or all criteria internal measurements BCMS measurements that are made by the system ACD measurements that are made external to the system via External CMS are referred to as external measurements in use lamp A red light on a multiappearance voice terminal that lights to show which call appearance will be selected when the handset is lifted or which call appearance is active when a user is off hook INWATS Inward Wide Area Telephone Service IO Information outlet ISDN See lntegrated Services Digital Network ISDN ISDN Gateway IG A feature allowing integration of the switch and a host based telemarketing application via a link to a gateway adjunct The gateway adjunct is a 3B based product that notifies
377. s TDM buses and duplication in the EPNs Circuit pack positions are usually given by cabinet carrier and slot They may also be given by port The term cabinet refers to 1 Multi Carrier Cabinet making up 1 port network A port network is defined as a group of cabinets connected together with one TDM bus DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 4 Test the System Check System Status for Each Cabinet Page 4 2 Check System Status for Each Cabinet 1 Verify the terminal screen displays Command 2 Type status cabinet lt 1 44 gt and press Enter 3 Verify the screen displays system status screens similar to Screen 4 1 status cabinet 1 SPE B CABINET CONFIGURATION STATUS CABINET CONNECTIVITY STATUS Carrier PN SN Carrier Cabinet PN SN Connectivity Status Location Number Type Type Active Standby 01A PN 1 processor MCC PN 1 up up 01B PN 1 processor SN 1 B PNC up OIC PN 1 port SN 1 A PNC up 01D SN 1 dup sw node 01E SN 1 switch node CABINET EMERGENCY TRANSFER CABINET ALARM STATUS Emergency Select PN SN Mj Mn Wn Transfer Switch PN 1 0 0 35 01B auto SN 1 B PNC 0 0 0 01A auto SN 1 A PNC 0 0 0 Command Screen 4 1 Example System Status Screen for Cabinet 1 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 4 Test the System Check Circuit Pack Configuration Ch
378. s Connect Hardware Page A 10 100A and 200A Lightguide Equipment Optical interconnects consist of LIUs without a trough between them Incoming and outgoing cables connect directly to each other This arrangement makes circuit changes more difficult but reduces optical losses Optical cross connect and interconnect fields are made up of the following a 100A or 200A LIU a 10A Lightguide Coupling Panel a C2000A 2 Connector Coupling Multi Mode or C3000A 2 Connector Coupling Single Mode a 1A4 Lightguide Trough a 1A6 Lightguide Trough a Fiber Interconnect Cable Multi Mode or Single Mode Lightguide Interconnect Units The 100A LIU consists of a cabinet with retainer rings to hold slack fiber cables mounting cutouts for two 10A lightguide connector panels and a door with circuit labels on each side See Figure A 4 The 100A provides up to 12 terminations The 200A Lightguide Interconnect Unit LIU can terminate up to 24 fiber connections These fiber connections can be either single mode or multi mode Lightguide Troughs Two types of troughs are used with optical cross connect hardware The vertical trough secures single fiber optic jumpers routed between LIU columns and the horizontal trough is used at the bottom of an LIU column to store cable slack DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Optical Cros
379. s Connect Hardware Page A 11 cabinet CJL 031896 Figure Notes 1 100A Lightguide Interconnect Unit LIU 3 Circuit Labels 2 Retainer Rings Figure A 4 100A Lightguide Interconnection Unit DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Optical Cross Connect Hardware Page A 12 10A and 1000ST Lightguide Coupling Panel The 10A Lightguide Coupling Panel mounts in the cutouts of a 100A LIU and a 200A LIU A 100A LIU requires 2 coupling panels A 200A requires 4 coupling panels Each panel can hold 6 connector couplings A connection to an ST coupler is shown in Figure A 5 gt NOTE If you are not viewing this book on CD ROM the fiber cable shown in Figure A 5 is yellow denoting single mode fiber The 1000ST Lightguide Coupling Panel mounts in the cutouts of a 400A LIU A 400A LIU requires 8 coupling panels Each coupling panel can hold 6 connector couplings fodtent LJK 041797 Figure A 5 10A and 1000ST Lightguide Connector Coupling The C2000A 2 Connector Coupling joins multi mode fiber optic cables equipped with ST connectors It has a threaded midsection that allows it to be secured to the 10A or 1000ST Lightguide Coupling Panel The C3000A 2 Connector Coupling joins single mode fiber optic cables equipped with ST connectors It has a
380. s Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Index night ringing test procedure 6 3 NT1 network interface 5 57 NT1 wiring 5 12 Issue 5 May 1998 Page IN 10 O off premises stations 5 30 OPS adding 5 89 optical circuit changes A 17 optical connector couplings A 12 optical power measurement A 6 Optical Time Domain Reflectometer OTDR A 2 option switch settings data module B 1 outputs cable for control carrier 5 10 P pass thru kit 5 70 5 99 pass thru tool 5 77 5 102 password 3 11 changing 3 14 craft changing 3 14 requirements for valid 3 14 PCOL trunk adding 5 85 pin designations 5 143 auxiliary equipment 5 143 5 153 to 5 155 D 1 circuit packs 5 143 5 153 to 5 155 D 1 telephones 5 12 pinout information port circuit pack 5 12 telephones 5 12 TN2185 ISDN BRI 5 145 pinouts 5 143 auxiliary 5 153 to 5 155 circuit packs 5 153 to 5 155 playback announcement test procedure 6 3 Poland country code 3 13 pooled modem adding 5 93 port board and telephone pin designations 5 12 port circuit pack pin designations 5 12 port network definition 4 1 4 8 4 10 power single phase 240VAC 1 6 power down AUDIX procedure 3 32 power supply 1145B 48V 5 45 1146B 48V 5 45 1151A 48V 5 54 1151A2 48V 5 54 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release
381. s and Other Equipment Emergency Transfer Units and Associated Telephones Page 5 41 13 Check the system for transfer operation as follows Place the test switch switch 12 in the ACTIVATED position The power LED should be OFF Verify there is dial tone on all emergency transfer sets If all of the above conditions are not met replace the panel The 808A connect to the MDF with a B25A cable Figure 5 18 shows the connections at the trunk auxiliary field for a telephone used only for emergency transfer 25 ne 2822 EEm a me HAm ERE COCOA Coo sss Tc TK Le ST Tc TK LC Lc st TC TK LC st Tc LC ST T 1M 1m 2M 2m 3M 3m 3w abe T ALARM MONITORS EM ERA RELAY PWR SOE EEO 5 r758580b MMR 042996 i Figure Notes 1 To Network Interface Circuitry 3 To Blue or White Station Distribution Field 2 To TN747 or Equivalent CO 4 To Power Transfer Unit Tunk Circuit Pack 5 To Control Carrier AUX Connector Figure 5 18 Connections for Telephone Used for Emergency Transfer DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Emergency Transfer Units and Associated Telephones Page 5 42 Figure 5 19 shows the connections at the trunk auxiliary field for a telephone u
382. s enter the ACW mode to perform ACD related activities such as filling out a form after an ACD call AG ASAI Gateway agent A person who receives Calls directed to a split A member of an ACD hunt group or ACD split Also called an ACD agent agent report A report that provides historical traffic information for internally measured agents AIM Asynchronous interface module AIOD Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 4 ALBO Automatic Line Build Out All trunks busy ATB The state in which no trunks are available for call handling ALM ACK Alarm acknowledge American Standard Code for Information Interchange SeelASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange AMW Automatic Message Waiting AN Analog analog The representation of information by continuously variable physical quantities such as amplitude frequency and phase See alsojdigital analog data Data that is transmitted over a digital facility in analog PCM form The data must pass through a modem either at both ends or at a modem pool at the distant end analog telephone A telephone that receives acoustic voice signals and sends analog electrical signals along the telephone line Analog telephones are usually served by a single wire pair tip and ring The model 2500 tel
383. s procedures and information for hardware installation upgrades and initial testing of compact single carrier cabinets The Release 5 version of this document applies to Release 6 as well DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets Issue 4 555 230 112 Provides procedures and information for hardware installation and initial testing of multi carrier cabinets DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 E References Basic DEFINITY ECS Documents Page E 4 DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Installation and Test for Compact Modular Cabinets Issue 2 555 230 128 Provides procedures and information for hardware installation and initial testing of compact modular cabinets DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Installation for Adjuncts and Peripherals Issue 3 555 230 125 Provides procedures and information for hardware installation and initial testing of ECS adjunct and peripheral systems and equipment DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Upgrades and Additions for R6r Issue 4 555 230 121 Provides procedures for an installation technician to convert an existing Generic 3 Version 4 DEFINITY Communications System to DEFINITY ECS and from DEFINITY ECS Release 5 to DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Included are upgrade considerations lists of required hardware and step by step upgrade procedures Also included are procedures to add control carriers
384. s shown in Table B 4 Also a TELESEER CDR 94A Local Storage Unit LSU or Customer Premises Equipment CPE can be used as the output receiving device Administration procedures for CDR equipment are provided in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description Table B 4 572 Printer Used with Management Terminal CDR or Journal Printer Function Function Name Menu Menu Status 01 FORM LENGTH 09 11 02 LPI 01 6 03 CPI 01 10 04 LQ or NLQ 01 LQ 05 BUZZER 01 ON 06 FONT 02 FONTCART 07 RESOLUTION 01 144 11 BUFFER 02 N LINE 13 PW ON MODE 01 ON LINE 14 DIRECTION 01 B1 DIR 1 15 BUFF FULL 02 LF CR 16 P E 01 ACTIVE 17 AUTO CARRIAGE RETURN CR 01 CR LF 18 ZERO 01 0 22 AUTO LINE FEED 01 CR ONLY Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 B Option Switch Settings Call Detail Recording Option Settings Page B 9 Table B 4 572 Printer Used with Management Terminal CDR or Journal Printer Continued Function Function Name Menu Menu Status 31 1 SKIP 01 OFF 32 CHAR SET GO GL 02 USA 33 CHAR SET G1 GR 01 UK 34 CHAR SET G2 03 GE 35 CHAR SET G3 07 LINE DRAWING 81 OFF LINE STATE 01 ALL RECEIVE 82 DSR 02 OFF 83 REQUEST TO SEND RTS TIMING 01 RTS 84 CD 02
385. s that are made by the External CMS adjunct extension A 1 to 5 digit number by which calls are routed through a communications system or with a Uniform Dial Plan UDP or main satellite dialing plan through a private network external call A connection between a communications system user and a party on the public network or on another communications system in a private network DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 23 F FAC Feature Access Code facility A telecommunications transmission pathway and associated equipment facility associated signaling FAS Signaling for which a D channel carries signaling only for those channels on the same physical interface FAS Facility associated signaling FAT Facility access trunk FAX Facsimile FCC Federal Communications Commission FEAC Forced Entry of Account Codes feature A specifically defined function or service provided by the system feature button A labeled button on a telephone or attendant console used to access a specific feature FEP Front end processor FIC Facility interface codes fiber optics A technology using materials that transmit ultrawideband electromagnetic light frequency ranges for high capacity carrier systems fixed A trunk allocation term In the fixed allocation scheme the time slots necessary to suppor
386. sceiver on the DEFINITY System 6 Label the cable for the circuit added 7 Test the circuit using the test fiber link commands in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6r DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Routing Fiber Optic Cables Page A 18 To Make a New Interconnection 1 At the LIU locate the cable to be moved and unplug it from the coupling 2 Carefully unwind the cable from around the retainer rings remembering the minimum bend radius 3 If it is necessary to remove the cable from the LIU carefully guide it through the split rings in the LIU 4 Locate the appropriate connection on the other side of the interconnect field and carefully route the cable through the split rings of the LIU 5 Carefully unwind the cable from the retainer rings remembering the minimum bend radius 6 Plug the cable into the appropriate connector coupling 7 Label the cable for the changed circuit 8 Test the circuit using the test fiber link commands in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6r Routing Fiber Optic Cables Cable Slack Managers or Raised Floors When using either cable slack managers or raised floors route the fiber cable to the outside of the carriers behind the rear connector panel and cable troughs Do not route fiber in the
387. se 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 34 MSA Message servicing adjunct MSG Message service MSL Material stocking location MSM Modular System Management MSS Mass storage system MSSNET Mass storage network control MT Management terminal MTDM Modular trunk data module MTP Maintenance tape processor MTT Multitasking terminal multiappearance voice terminal A terminal equipped with several call appearance buttons for the same extension allowing the user to handle more than one call on that same extension at the same time Multicarrier cabinet A structure that holds one to five carriers See alsojsingle carrier cabinet Multifrequency Compelled MFC Release 2 R2 signaling A signal consisting of two frequency components such that when a signal is transmitted from a switch another signal acknowledging the transmitted signal is received by the switch R2 designates signaling used in the United States and in countries outside the United States multiplexer A device used to combine a number of individual channels into a single common bit stream for transmission multiplexing A process whereby a transmission facility is divided into two or more channels either by splitting the frequency band into a number of narrower bands or by dividing the transmission channel into successive time slots See also time division multiplexing TDM
388. sed for emergency transfer as well as a normal extension a i 4 Q ST e appe B B m 3 B Bm 4 Bm S B B im 6 ES X ii 8 I m TC TK LC st Tc TK Lc st 1M 1m 2M 2m 3M 3m 3w oN CALLA ehetett ALARM MONITORS EM TRANS RELAY PWR ACC PWR Lelle elak el eale eaea ea ee ee eee N Q v r758582b MMR 042996 Figure Notes 1 To Network Interface Facility 4 To TN747 or Equivalent Central EN Office Trunk Circuit Pack 2 To Blue or White Station Distribution Field 5 To Power Transfer Unit 3 To TN742 TN746B or TN769 or 6 To Control Carrier AUX Equivalent Analog Line Circuit Pack Connector Figure 5 19 Connections for Telephone Used for Emergency Transfer and as Normal Extension DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Emergency Transfer Units and Associated Telephones Page 5 43 Install Telephone for Power Transfer Unit Trunk Auxiliary Field Telephone Used Only for Emergency Transfer i Connect a pair of wires between the 48V and GRD terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block and the EM TRANS RELAY PWR terminal See Figure 5 18 Connect CO
389. side cable troughs used for the B25A cables However since the B25A cables route out of the bottom of the trough loop slack fiber at the top of the trough Protect cables routed between cabinets with a fiber protector cover When routing fiber to a cabinet that is not adjacent route the fiber back into and under the top of the intermediate cabinet Fiber optic cable requires connection to an LIU or shelf for connection to remote cabinets or for connection to the outside fiber plant In some systems it may be necessary to run fiber with the I O cables such as in the cable slack manager or under a raised floor In these cases protect the fiber by running it in a dedicated area if possible In any situation where the fiber optic cable must be run with other cabling protect it by first running it through flexible conduit Overhead Ductwork With overhead ductwork route the fiber cable to the outside of the carriers along the cable troughs and into the shielded ductwork Do not route fiber in the side cable troughs that are used for the B25A cables Use the shielded ductwork to manage slack fiber at the top of the cabinet DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 B Option Switch Settings Page B 1 Option Switch Settings Some of the interface units used between the Multi Carrier Cabinets and other types of equipment require specific option sw
390. sion archangel EA The EAL carries control messages from the SPE to the EA and to port circuit packs in an expansion port network expansion control cabinet See expansion control carrier expansion control carrier A carrier in a multicarrier cabinet that contains extra port circuit packs and a maintenance interface Also called expansion control cabinet in a single carrier cabinet expansion interface EI A port circuit pack in a port network that provides the interface between a PN s TDM bus packet bus and a fiber optic link The El carries circuit switched data packet switched data network control timing control and DS1 control In addition an El in an expansion port network communicates with the master maintenance circuit pack to provide the EPN s environmental and alarm status to the switch processing element expansion port network EPN A port network PN that is connected to the TDM bus and packet bus of a processor port network PPN Control is achieved by indirect connection of the EPN to the PPN via a port network link PNL See also port network PN extension in Extension In Extln is the work state agents go into when they answer receive a non ACD call If the agent is in Manual In or Auto In and receives an extension in call it is recorded by CMS as an AUX In call extension out The work state that agents go into when they place originate a non ACD call external measurements Those ACD measurement
391. slation card Rebooting requires 8 to 11 minutes 3 Login at the login prompt on the management terminal and set the time to ensure that the system is booted properly 4 Enter list configuration software version and press Enter to compare the version number of the software program displayed on the terminal with the TN790 version number written on a label on the TN790 s faceplate If the version numbers are not the same change the version number on the TN790 label so that they agree gt NOTE Certain forms have changed for Release 6 Upgraded translations may appear on a different form fields may shift within a form or the names assigned to particular fields may change Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Transition Reference and DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description and make the necessary changes Enable Customer Options 1 Enter change system parameters customer options and press Enter 2 Use these forms to verify the customer options are properly set gt NOTE If the customer was using Supplementary Services Protocol b or d on an ISDN PRI trunk group before the upgrade set the Basic Call Setup field to y Resolve Alarms 1 Examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6r DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 I
392. sociated with busy telephone light 4 Press Direct Extension Selection DXS button for the desired extension Audible ringing tone is heard in the earpiece on attendant console 5 On attendant console press Release Audible ringing tone is silenced DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 6 Test Telephones and Other Equipment Test External Ringing Page 6 3 Test External Ringing Make a test call to the attendant console to verify ringing device sounds when the Night lamp on console is lighted If ringing device has not been installed by customer connect spare telephone to information outlet reserved for ringing device and make test call Test Queue Warning Indicator Make atest call to an extension associated with a Uniform Call Distribution UCD or Direct Department Calling DDC group and verify the queue warning indicator lamp lights If the queue warning indicator has not been installed by customer connect a spare telephone to the information outlet reserved for queue warning indicator and make a test call Test Integrated Announcement The TN750 B C Announcement circuit pack provides the ability to store messages The messages can be recorded from telephones on or off premises and have flexible message lengths The telephone selected as the test telephone must have a class of service COS with console permission enabled Record An
393. stallation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment List of Circuit Packs Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 69 Table 5 16 Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules Continued Apparatus Code Name Type TN2181 Digital Line 2 Wire DCP Port TN2182 B Tone Clock Tone Detector and Call Classifier Control TN2183 Analog Line Port TN2184 DIOD Trunk Port TN2185 ISDN BRI 4 Wire S T TE Interface Port TN2198 ISDN BRI 2 Wire U Interface Port TN2199 Central Office Trunk Port TN2202 Ring Generator Power TN2207 DS1 Interface T1 24 Channel E1 32 Channel Port TN2209 Tie Trunk Port TN2210 Tone Generator Service TN2214 Digital Line 24 Port 2 Wire DCP Category B Port TN2215 Analog Line 16 Port 2 Wire Category B Port TN2224 Digital Line 24 Port 2 Wire DCP Port TN2238 ATM Trunk Interface Port TN2301 Survivable Remote Switch Switch TN2464 DS1 Interface T1 24 Channel E1 32 Channel Port TN2793 Analog Line 24 Port Category B Port DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add the Fiber Optic Cable Page 5 70 Add the Fiber Optic Cable This chapter details the installation of the fiber optic cable using the DEFINITY fiber optic pass thru kit for multicarrier cabinets MCC only This kit comcod
394. stem to DEFINITY ECS Release 5 DEFINITY ECS Release 6 CallVisor ASAI Planning Guide Issue 4 555 230 222 Provides procedures and directions for the account team and customer personnel for effectively planning and implementing the CallVisor Adjunct Switch Application Interface ASAI PBX Host environment The CallVisor ASAI is a communications interface that allows adjunct processors to access switch features and to control switch calls It is implemented using an Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Basic Rate Interface BRI Hardware and software requirements are included DEFINITY ECS Release 6 CallVisor ASAI Protocol Reference Issue 7 555 230 221 Provides detailed layer 3 protocol information regarding the CallVisor Adjunct Switch Application Interface ASAI for the systems and is intended for the library or driver programmer of an adjunct processor to create the library of commands used by the applications programmers Describes the ISDN message facility information elements and information elements DEFINITY ECS Release 6 CallVisor ASAI Technical Reference Issue 7 555 230 220 Provides detailed information regarding the CallVisor Adjunct Switch Application Interface ASAI for the systems and is intended for the application designer responsible for building and or programming custom applications and features DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carri
395. stered trademark of Audichron Company Music Mate is a registered trademark of Harris Corporation a Pag ePac is a registered trademark of Harris Corporation Dracon Division SHOCKWATCH is a registered trademark of Media Recovery Incorporated m Styrofoam is a registered trademark of Styrofoam Corporation a TILTWATCH is a registered trademark of Media Recovery Incorporated VELCRO is a registered trademark of VELCRO U S A Incorporated Zone Mate is a registered trademark of Harris Corporation DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 About This Book Standards Compliance Page xii Standards Compliance The equipment presented in this book complies with the following as appropriate ITU T Formerly CCITT ECMA ETSI IPNS DPNSS National ISDN 1 National ISDN 2 ISO 9000 ANSI FCC Part 15 and Part 68 EN55022 EN50081 EN50082 CISPR22 Australia AS3548 AS NZ3548 Australia TS 001 AS NZS3260 IEC 825 IEC 950 UL 1459 UL 1950 CSA C22 2 Number 225 Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for more information DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 About This Book LASER Product Page xiii LASER Product The DEFINITY ECS may contain a Class 1 LASER device if single mode fiber optic cable is connected to a
396. switch node carriers port carriers circuit packs auxiliary cabinets and other equipment DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Upgrades and Additions for R6vs si Issue 4 555 230 120 Provides procedures for an installation technician to convert an existing DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Version 4 to DEFINITY ECS and from DEFINITY ECS Release 5 to DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Included are upgrade considerations lists of required hardware and step by step upgrade procedures Also included are procedures to add control carriers switch node carriers port carriers circuit packs auxiliary cabinets and other equipment DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Maintenance for R6r Issue 2 555 230 126 Provides detailed descriptions of the procedures for monitoring testing troubleshooting and maintaining the R6r ECS Included are maintenance commands step by step trouble clearing procedures the procedures for using all tests and explanations of the system s error codes DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Maintenance for R6vs si Issue 2 555 204 127 Provides detailed descriptions of the procedures for monitoring testing troubleshooting and maintaining the R6vs si ECS Included are maintenance commands step by step trouble clearing procedures the procedures for using all tests and explanations of the system s error codes DEFINITY ECS Release 6 Maintenance for R6csi Compact Modular Cabinets Issue 2 555 204 129 DEFINITY Enterprise Communi
397. system and external to the system The communications system itself consists of a digital computer software storage device and carriers with special hardware to perform the connections A communications system provides voice and data communications services including access to public and private networks for telephones and data terminals on a customer s premises See also switch confirmation tone A tone confirming that feature activation deactivation or cancellation has been accepted connectivity The connection of disparate devices within a single system console See attendant console contiguous Adjacent DSOs within one T1 or E1 facility or adjacent TDM or fiber time slots The first and last TDM bus DSO or fiber time slots are not considered contiguous no wraparound For an E1 facility with a D channel DSOs 15 and 17 are considered contiguous control cabinet See control carrier control carrier A carrier in a multi carrier cabinet that contains the SPE circuit packs and unlike an R5r control carrier port circuit packs Also called control cabinet in a single carrier cabinet See also switch processing element SPE controlled station A station that is monitored and controlled via a domain control association COR See Class of Restriction COR COS See Class of Service COS DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 199
398. t a wideband call are contiguous and the first time slot is constrained to certain starting points flexible A trunk allocation term In the flexible allocation scheme the time slots of a wideband call can occupy noncontiguous positions within a single T1 or E1 facility floating A trunk allocation term In the floating allocation scheme the time slots of a wideband call are contiguous but the position of the first time slot is not fixed FNPA Foreign Numbering Plan Area DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 24 foreign exchange FX A CO other than the one providing local access to the public telephone network foreign exchange trunk A telecommunications channel that directly connects the system to a CO other than its local CO foreign numbering plan area code FNPAC An area code other than the local area code that must be dialed to call outside the local geographical area FRL Facilities Restriction Level FX Foreign exchange G G3 MA Generic 3 Management Applications G3 MT Generic 3 Management Terminal G3r Generic 3 RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer generalized route selection GRS An enhancement to Automatic Alternate Routing Automatic Route Selection AAR ARS that performs routing based on call attributes such as Bearer Capability Classes BCCs in addition to the ad
399. t exceed a rating of 30 VAC RMS or 60 VDC at 0 75 Amps See Table 5 2 for the pinouts for an external alarm A 25 pair connector labeled AUX is provided on the rear of the control carrier Connect a cable to this connector and route to a connecting block on the trunk auxiliary field Table 5 2 Auxiliary Lead Appearances at AUX Connector Color Pin Number AUX Connector Outputs W BL 26 Major BL W 1 W O 27 Minors O W 2 W G 28 G W 3 GRD W BR 29 BR W 4 GRD W S 30 S W 5 GRD R BL 31 BL R 6 GRD R O 32 O R 7 GRD R G 33 Not Connected G R 8 R BR 34 Not Connected BR R 9 R S 35 Not Connected S R 10 Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Auxiliary Connector Outputs Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 11 Table 5 2 Auxiliary Lead Appearances at AUX Connector Continued Color Pin Number AUX Connector Outputs BK BL 36 48 Emergency BL BK 11 GND Tranefer BK O 37 48 O BK 12 GND Relay BK G 38 48 Power G BK 13 GND N BK BR 39 48 BR BK 14 GND BK S 40 48 S BK 15 GND Y BL 41 48 BL Y 16 GND Y O 42 48 O Y 17 GND Y G 43 Not Connected G Y 18 Y BR 44 GND AUX Power BR Y 19 48 Y S 45 GND S Y 20 48 V BL 46 GND BL V 21 48 V O 47 Not Connected O V 22 V G 48 Ext Alarm A G V 23 Ext A
400. t of circuit packs to be added 2 Install the appropriate circuit pack in assigned cabinet slot as required For example Port Number 3 B 02 01 Circuit Cabinet Carrier Slot Port Network 3 The TN778 Packet Control circuit pack and the TN556 or TN2198 ISDN BRI circuit pack are required Add the TN778 Packet Control circuit pack first If an EPN is present a TN570 Expansion Interface circuit pack is required 4 The packet bus is required with BRI If the system is not equipped with a packet bus see Add Packet Bus to R6si jon page 5 113 Install Cables 1 Install cables from cabinet to the MDF as required gt NOTE BRI requires a 12 port backplane cable terminator breakout connector Connect this terminator to the 25 pair cable This is different from the 8 port connector used for DCP Power Up System 1 At each EPN set the main circuit breaker to ON 2 Atthe PPN set the main circuit breaker to ON 3 The system performs a level 4 reboot loading the system translations from the translation card or tape Rebooting takes several minutes 4 After the system reboot is finished and all trouble is cleared verify the EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONTROL switch is set to AUTO This restores the system to the normal mode Enter Added Translations 1 Administer the required translation data using the forms listed under 7500D voice terminals and 8500 voice terminals in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications
401. t pack PEC 63243 1 BLD2 circuit pack PEC 63246 1 remote record module The BLD1 circuit pack provides 8 channels with up to 20 seconds of recording time on each channel The BLD2 circuit pack provides 8 channels with up to 40 seconds of recording time on each channel Each chassis can be populated with any combination of 2 BLD circuit packs The Model 15A Announcement System is FCC registered and does not require a voice coupler 2 If earthquake protection is required skip to Earthquake Protection installation stallation on page 1 34 Install and Position Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet Check the location of the AC power receptacle The receptacle must be ona separately fused circuit that is not controlled by a wall switch It must be located within 10 feet 3 m of the cabinet and should be located outside the MDF area 1 Position the clock cabinet in the designated location 2 If earthquake protection is required skip to Earthquake Protection instalation stallation on page 1 34 3 If earthquake protection is not required level the cabinets and adjust and lock the cabinet stabilizing bolts to keep the cabinet from moving DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect AC Power and Ground Page 1 6 Connect AC Power and Ground Power Requirements Table 1 2 shows
402. tall Cross Aisle to Wall Trough Refer to Figure C 9 to assemble the ductwork 1 Install wall mounting bracket to designated location Hardware to mount bracket should be determined according to wall type and should be locally provided 2 Use thread forming screws to attach the 3 hole face of the angle bracket to the I O trough 3 Attach the angle bracket to the 6 hole face of the cross aisle bracket using three 10 24 X 3 4 inch screws connected to nuts and washers through the bottom holes 4 Attach the I O cable duct to the cross aisle bracket using the thread forming screws Attach the other end of the I O duct to the wall mounting using 10 24 X 3 4 inch screws nuts and washers 4 ductS KLC 071796 Figure Notes 1 Angle Bracket 4 V O Cable Duct 2 I O Trough 5 Wall Mounting Bracket 3 Cross Aisle Bracket 6 Front of Cabinet Figure C 9 Installation of I O Cross Aisle to Wall Trough DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork Page C 15 Install I O Cable Rack Coupling 1 Attach I O trough to top of cabinet using thread forming screws See Figure C 10 2 Attach cross aisle bracket to I O trough using thread forming screws through the top three holes on the bracket s 6 hole face 3 Attach I O coupling trough to cross aisle bracket using thread forming screws 4 Attach cable rack to coupling trough us
403. te locations must be easily accessible and contain AC powered receptacles Adapter Requirements One 258A BR2580A adapter is required for each 25 pair station cable containing 4 pair station circuits One 356A adapter is required for each 25 pair station cable containing 3 pair station circuits Hardware Requirements Hardware requirements are the same as for the equipment room Sizing 4 Pair Station Cables Use the scale of the floor plan to determine the approximate length of the station cables required per the standard SYSTIMAX wiring concepts Sizing 25 Pair and Multiple 25 Pair Station Cables Use the scale of the floor plan to determine the approximate length of each 25 pair station cable The cables must be selected and properly sized to make maximum use of the hardware at the equipment room or satellite location Use 25 pair B25A cables to connect adapters directly to the MDF or satellite location Staggered finger cables equipped with factory installed 25 pair connectors at both ends should be used when multiple 25 pair cables are used DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Voice and Data Terminals Page 2 40 between the equipment room or satellite location and the adapters B25A cables are required at the equipment room or satellite location to connect the staggered finger cables to the 110 type
404. te the wires through the clip provided on the unit If a red LED is on see Reset LEDs on Power Distribution Unit Mark lead destinations on the label next to each connector Also mark the Unit Number and Connectivity information on the label Reset LEDs on Power Distribution Unit A red LED next to any of the 32 power output connectors indicates a short circuit in the building wiring or the terminal equipment To reset the LED 1 2 Disconnect the terminal equipment from the wall jack If the LED goes off the terminal equipment is faulty and must be replaced If the LED is still lit find and repair the short circuit in the building wiring Reconnect the terminal equipment to the wall jack and re test terminal equipment operation Ay WARNING Important Safety Instructions follow When operating this equipment basic safety precautions must be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and personal injury including the following Read and understand all instructions Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces For continued back up protection and battery reliability replace batteries every 4 years Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the products Clean products only with a dry rag Do not use this product near water For mounting security follow all installation instructions when mounting product Openings on top and bottom of power unit are provided for ventilati
405. tegrated Services Digital Network Customer Premises Planning Guide 533 700 100 The resistor is built into the NT1 and can be 1 of 3 values depending on the configuration and the distance from the NT1 to the ISDN terminal The resistor value is controlled from the NT1 A terminating resistor adapter may be needed near the terminal and can be placed in the satellite closet or work location gt NOTE The 440A4 terminating resistor and 110RA1 12 terminating resistor block are UL listed Most new installations are the 110RA1 12 terminating resistor block The following installation instructions should be observed a Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm a Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations a Never touch uninsulated wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface a Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment BRI Terminating Resistor Page 5 58 Terminating Resistor Adapter Figure 5 23 shows an 8 pin 440A4 terminating resistor adapter The adapter is 3 inches 7 6 cm long with an 8 wide plug at 1 end a short cord and an 8 wide jack at the opposite end 7o D D p
406. tem can be dialed into and that the system can dial out to INADS As part of the system registration process the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm Origination Have the serial number of the system and the software version number available at the time of the call DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 A Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Page A 1 Connecting Fiber Optic Cables Signals between cabinets are carried by fiber optic cables The electronic signals at 1 cabinet must be converted into optical signals These optical signals are converted back into electronic signals at another cabinet The fiber optic cables from the DEFINITY System route to a Lightguide Interconnect Unit LIU connect to the outside fiber plant and then connect to the remote DEFINITY System via an LIU Two types of fiber optic cables are used on DEFINITY Systems multi mode and single mode See Table A 1 Multi mode fiber uses LEDs as its light source and is less expensive than single mode fiber There are 2 common types of multi mode fiber 62 5 micron core 50 0 micron core a Single mode fiber is more expensive than multi mode because it uses LASER light as its light source Single mode fiber typically uses the 8 10 micron core fiber Table A 1 Fiber Optic Reference Operating Fiber Core Transceiver Wavelength Size Model Na
407. tem with an EPN replace every TN776 El circuit pack in the system with a TN570 El circuit pack The TN570s allow packet based communication between the PPN and each EPN in the system DS1 E1 Interface Circuit Packs Like ISDN PRI using a TN765 Processor Interface a TN464C or later DS1 E1 circuit pack is required to assign a European 32 port E1 interface PRI Over PACCON Versus PRI Over Processor Interface For simpler call processing Release 6 administration does not allow packet interface and processor interface circuit packs to control ISDN PRI calls for the same system at the same time Therefore during a PRI Over PACCON addition replace every TN767C DS1 circuit pack used to provide a D channel signaling for ISDN PRI with a TN464F DS1 circuit pack This frees up PI circuits to control other important links such as DCS CMS and AUDIX In an R6si system with Non Facility Associated Signaling a TN767C DS1 circuit pack may still provide B channels for a PRI Over PACCON link as long as each controlling D channel for the link primary and optional backup resides on a TN464F DS1 circuit pack DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add PRI Over PACCON to R6si Page 5 125 Service Interruption 1 Since the addition of PRI Over PACCON requires a service interruption notify the customer in adv
408. terminal blocks Use the following information to determine the cable size cable pairs required for either 3 pair or 4 pair circuits Note the length and size on the floor plan to aid in the ordering and installation of the station cables 3 Pair Station Cable Circuits To determine the size of station cables containing 3 pair circuits multiply the number of 3 pair circuits required at the satellite location by 3 5 Then using the minimum size cable requirement round up the cable size requirement to the next highest available cable bundle size This will provide additional pairs for growth and compensate for every twenty fifth pair in a cable that is not used 4 Pair Station Cable Circuits To determine the size of station cables containing 4 pair circuits find out how many information outlets are served by the equipment room MDF or satellite location MDF Multiply the number of information outlets by 4 Then using the minimum size cable requirement round up the cable size requirement to the next highest available cable bundle size gt NOTE This formula may not compensate for the unused twenty fifth pair in all cases If not it must be allowed for Voice and Data Terminals The system can connect to all DTE terminals and have RS 232 or EIA 232 or DCP interfaces Table 2 4 lists some of the terminals that can connect to the system Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for more information Table 2 4 Voice and
409. the batteries and reports the status of system power The BIU provides the Remote Power Off RPO option and battery alarm interfaces for internal and external alarms pedfrec KLC 101196 Figure Notes 1 Install Battery Interface Unit into Slot 1 4 Test Points 2 Install Rectifier Modules into Slots 2 5 5 Main Circuit Breakers 3 Rectifier Module 3 in Slot 4 Figure 1 6 Rectifier Module Installation DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect DC Power and Ground Page 1 17 1 Install the BU3200A Battery Interface Unit comcode 107781502 in the first slot of the power distribution unit See Figure 1 6 gt NOTE The BIU and the rectifier modules are keyed and can only install 1 way 2 Install the first 2 RMO850HA100 Rectifier Modules comcode 107793796 into the second and third slots of the power distribution unit 3 If 2 to 3 carriers are installed in the system install a third rectifier module N 1 4 lf 4 to 5 carriers are installed in the system install a fourth rectifier module 5 The fifth rectifier module slot is reserved for future system growth Connect Power 1 Have a qualified electrician connect and route wires from the AC load center to the dedicated electrical outlet for the power distribution unit Connect PPN Cabinet Ground 1 Connect 1 end of a 10 AWG 25
410. the 25 pair cables that connect directly to the system The main equipment room main distribution frame and the associated cabling to the system and or 8 pin information outlets modular wall jacks Testing of the completed installation DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 About This Book Organization Page ix This issue replaces all previous issues of DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 Installation and Test 555 204 104 gt NOTE This book is being modified for international translation This means some illustrations contain numbers instead of descriptive text In the future all illustrations will contain numbers Organization This book contains the following chapters Chapter 1 Install and Connect Cabinets How to install the cabinets connect power and connect the cabinets together Chapter 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling How to install cabling between the system and the Main Distribution Frame Chapter 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System How to install the management terminal and how to activate and initialize the system Chapter 4 Test the System How to initially test the system Chapter 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment How to install and wire telephones and other equipment to the system Chapt
411. the System Test TDM for each EPN Page 4 9 Test TDM for each EPN 1 Verify the screen displays Command 2 Type test tdm port network 2 and press Enter 3 Verify a test results screen similar to Screen 4 8 is displayed test tdm port network 2 SPE A TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code PN 02A TDM BUS 294 PASS PN 02A TDM BUS 296 ABORT 1005 PN 02A TDM BUS 297 PASS PN 02B TDM BUS 294 PASS PN 02B TDM BUS 296 PASS PN 02B TDM BUS 297 ABORT 1005 Command successfully completed Command Screen 4 8 Example Test Results for TDM Port Network 2 4 If result is FAIL for any test check the connectors of the TDM bus cables in PPN 2 5 Repeat these steps for each EPN to check the TDM bus cables DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 4 Test the System Test Tone Clock for each EPN Page 4 10 Test Tone Clock for each EPN 1 Verify the screen displays Command 2 Type test tone clock 2A where 2A is the cabinet and carrier number for one of the Tone Clocks installed and press Enter gt NOTE Circuit pack positions are usually given by cabinet carrier and slot They may also be given by port The term cabinet refers to 1 Multi Carrier Cabinet making up one port network A port network is defined as a group of cabinets connected together with 1 TDM bus If any result is FAIL check the associat
412. the equipment room and site satellite locations or adapters Use an A25D cable male to male between the equipment room and satellite closet Use a B25A cable between the equipment room and site closet or adapter Multiple 25 pair station cable Use between the equipment room and site satellite locations or adapters This cable consists of individually sheathed 25 pair cables with a factory installed 25 pair connector on each end Use a male to female cable to connect between the equipment room and site location or adapter Use a male to male cable to connect between the equipment room and satellite location Staggered finger cables are recommended for all multiple 25 pair station cables and are available in both double ended and single ended types DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Station Wiring Design Page 2 29 Single modular plug ended 4 pair station cable Use this cable between adapters and information outlets that require push on connections It can also be used when 4 pair station cables are field terminated on the 110 type terminal blocks in the equipment room or satellite closet and modularly connected to information outlets The station cables are available in the following lengths 10 feet 3 05 m 25 feet 7 62 m 50 feet 15 24 m 75 feet 22 86 m 100 feet 30 5 m
413. the new circuit pack Remove the circuit pack or the apparatus blank from this slot 3 Install the new circuit pack 4 From the front remove the fan cover See Figure 5 45 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add External Modem to TN1648B Page 5 98 Icda3fop RPY 021198 Figure 5 45 Remove the Fan Cover DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add External Modem to TN1648B Page 5 99 Install the Pass thru Kit 1 Open the rear door 2 Choose one of the following a f mounting the cable assembly to a cabinet with a cutout in the rear panel attach it as shown in Figure 5 46 Then proceed to step 4 a f mounting the cable assembly to a cabinet without a cutout in the rear panel attach the panel adapter bracket as shown in Figure 5 47 Then proceed to step 3 lal prda0005 RPY 021298 Figure 5 46 Insert the Cable Assembly through the Rear Panel DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1
414. the power requirements Table 1 2 DEFINITY System Power Requirements Maximum DEFINITY UL Rating Label Power Capacity Vac In lac In Max W In BTU Hr 208 24 3245 11071 26 240 21 3276 11177 71 120 40 3120 10645 44 J58890CE 1 J58890CE 2 and J58890CH 1 The following procedures apply to the AC powered PPN and EPN cabinets Either of the following power sources can supply 60 Hz power to the AC load in Release 5 and later systems a Single phase 4 wire 120 240 VAC supplying 240 VAC This source has 2 hot wires 1 ground wire and 1 neutral wire J58890CE mw 3 phase 4 wire 120 208 VAC supplying 208 VAC This source has 2 hot wires 1 ground wire and 1 neutral wire J58890CE a Single phase 3 wire 208 or 240 VAC This source has 2 hot wires and 1 ground wire J58890CH Either of the following power sources can supply 50 Hz power to the AC load in Release 5 and later systems a Non United States 4 wire Y 220 380 VAC This source has 3 hot wires 1 neutral wire and 1 ground wire a Non United States Delta 3 wire 220 or 240 VAC This source has 3 wires DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Connect AC Power and Ground Page 1 7 Table 1 3 describes the power sources and required AC input power Table 1 3 AC Power Sources and Plug Type Power Distribution Unit Power S
415. the product exhibits a distinct change in performance Ifthe product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment 1151A Power Supply Page 5 55 The 1151Aand 1151A2 Power Supplies The 1151A and 1151A2 Power Supplies can be used to supply local power to ISDN T 65xx 75xx 84xx and 85xx series voice terminals connected to a system and to the DCP 7444 voice terminal or 302C Attendant Console that need auxiliary power for its display The unit can supply power to adjunct equipment such as S201A and CS201A speakerphones or a 500A Headset Adapter attached to any currently manufactured analog DCP or ISDN T voice terminal equipped with an adjunct jack A caution The power supply can be used only with telecommunications equipment indoors and in a controlled environment The power supply has a single output of 48 VDC 0 4 Amps and can operate from either a 120 VAC 60 Hz power source 105 to 129 VAC or a 220 230 240 VAC 50 Hz power source 198 to 264 VAC Input voltage selection is automatic The output capacity is 19 2 Watts The power supply can be placed on a flat surface such as a desk For wall mounting keyhole slots are provided on the bottom of the chassis A CAUTION Do not locate the unit within 6 inches 15 2 cm of the flo
416. ther Equipment Emergency Transfer Units and Associated Telephones Page 5 37 808A Emergency Transfer Panel Figure 5 17 shows a typical 808A Emergency Transfer Panel The 808A is connected to the MDF with a B25A or A25B cable The following procedures are provided as a typical installation example EMERGENCY TRANSFER PANEL TRUNK TEST SWITCHES CIRCUIT TRUNK OPTION C1 Loop GROUND Cos 2 START START i 3 BOTH SWITCHES MUST BE THROWN TO ACTIVATE NORMAL ACTIVATED OPERATION led808a LJK 040896 Figure Notes 1 808A Emergency Transfer Panel 3 Trunk Identification Label 2 Circuit Start Selection Switches 4 25 Pair Male Connector Figure 5 17 808A Emergency Transfer Panel DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Emergency Transfer Units and Associated Telephones Page 5 38 gt NOTE 6 Install the 808A in a location that can be accessed only by authorized personnel In addition the location must meet standard environmental considerations such as temperature humidity and so forth Install the panel on any mounting frame in either a vertical or horizontal position The housing has ears for screw mounting and cutouts for snap mounting the unit in an 89 type mounting bracket Verify dial ton
417. thorized use of com mon carrier telecommunication services or facilities accessed through or connected to it Lucent Technologies will not be responsible for any charges that result from such unauthorized use Lucent Technologies Fraud Intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical support or assistance call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 Federal Communications Commission Statement Part 15 Class A Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide rea sonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interfer ence to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a resi dential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Part 68 Network Registration Number This equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of the FCC Rules It is identi fied by FCC registration number AS593M 13283 MF E Refer to Federal Communications Commission Statement in About This Book for more information
418. tion re Page 1 of 11 Group Number 1 Group Type cama CDR Reports y Group Name cama Trunk Group E911 COR 1 TN 1 TAC 701 Direction outgoing Outgoing Display y CESID I Digits Sent 0 a Screen 5 1 CAMA Trunk Group form page 1 OG nee oe 2S On Trunk Group screen page 1 inthe Group Type field enter cama Inthe Group Name field enter the desired name Inthe Tac field enter the desired trunk access code Inthe Outgoing Display field enter y Inthe CESID I Digits Sent field enter the number directed by the Central Office CO or the Public Safety Answering Point PSAP 7 Scroll to page 3 of the form a TRUNK GROUP ADMINISTRABLE TIMERS Ss Page 3 of 11 Outgoing Disconnect msec 400 Cama Outgoing Dial Guard msec 75 Outgoing Glare Guard msec 1000 Cama Wink Start Time msec 5000 Outgoing End of Dial sec 1 Outgoing Seizure Response sec 4 Disconnect Signal Error sec 30 D Screen 5 2 Administrable Timers form page 3 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment CAMA E911 Installation Page 5 136 8 On the Administrable Timers screen page 3 you may need to adjust these fields according to your CO Scroll to page 5 J Page 5 of re TRUNK GROUP Administered Members min max 1 2 GROUP MEMBER ASSIGN
419. ts 1 Loosen do not remove the four bolts holding the dust cover to the cable access hole in the top of the cabinet a plate KLC 071696 Figure C 3 Dust Cover Removal 2 Remove the dust cover by sliding it in the direction shown by the arrow in Figure C 3 Move the dust cover until it clears the bolts 3 Set the cabinet riser A in Figure C 4 with its base in place of the dust cover just removed The four slots in its base should be just behind the bolts and the heads of the two middle bolts should have cleared the holes provided for them Push the riser forward to seat the bolts in the four slots in the base of the riser Then tighten the bolts DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork Page C 8 ductcip KLC 071796 Figure Notes 1 A 2 B 3 C Figure C 4 Assembly of Intercabinet Shielded Ducts 4 Install risers on any other cabinets that require shielded duct connections 5 Seta shielded trough B between two cabinet risers A Push down on the trough so the slots in the ends of the trough engage the ears at the corners of the risers The walls of the trough go inside the walls of the risers and outside of the ears of the risers 6 Seat the bottom of the shielded trough on the support walls of the two cabinet risers that it connects Attach the trough to each riser with a self tapping s
420. ts 2 Shielded Intercabinet Duct 5 I O Ducts to Cross Connect Field 3 AC Power Cable Duct Figure C 1 Typical Layout of Assembled Ductwork DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork Page C 3 Installation This ductwork consists of ED 1E465 group numbers facia paneling to cover the I O ducts is assembled from ED 1E464 The group numbers match those in the Customer Service Document CSD and floor plan layout Inventory the materials received and mark a copy of the floor plan with the location of each group number to be installed Hardware used to assemble each item is packaged with the individual groups Table C 1 shows the available group numbers and a brief description of each group Some ducts are equipped with covers which should be stored until all cabling is completed When storing tag the covers with their associated group numbers for ease in identification Table C 1 ED 1E465 Group Numbers and Descriptions Group Description 6 Rear or front end plate for I O ductwork 8 I O cable rack coupling to rear of cabinet 9 I O cable rack riser to side of cabinet 10 I O cross aisle ductwork 12 AC power duct 13 AC power duct with one 3 wire twist lock receptacle right side 14 AC power duct with one 3 wire twist lock receptacle left side 15 AC power d
421. ts Page 5 149 Table 5 30 DS1 Interface Cable H600 348 50 Pin 15 Pin Pin Color Designation Pin Color Designation Plug 04 38 W BL LI High 11 W BL LI High 13 BL W LI 03 BL W LI 39 W O LO 09 W O LO 14 O W LO High 01 O W LO High Plug 03 41 W G LI High 11 W G LI High 16 G W LI 03 G W LI 42 W BR LO 09 W BR LO 17 BR W LO High 01 BR W LO High Plug 02 44 W SL LI High 11 W SL LI High 19 SL W LI 03 SL W LI 45 R BL LO 09 R BL LO 20 BL R LO High 01 BL R LO High Plug 01 47 R O LI High 11 R O LI High 22 O R LI 03 O R LI 48 R G LO 09 R G LO 23 G R LO High 01 G R LO High DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Connector and Cable Diagrams Pinout Charts Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 150 Table 5 31 TN1654 Lead Designations Pin Color Designation Pin Color Designation 26 W BL 5E 01 BL W 5E 27 W O GRD 02 O W XMITDAT 28 W G GRD 03 G W GRD 29 W BR XMITDAT 04 BR W RCVDAT 30 W SL GRD 05 SL W GRD 31 R BL RCVDAT 06 BL R GRD 32 R O 5E 07 O R 5E 33 R G CCSYNC 08 G R CDSYNC 34 R BR C2DCDATA 09 BR R C2DDDATA 35 R SL CASYNG 10 SL R CBSYNC 36 BK BL D2CDATA 11 BL BK ISCLOCK 37 BK O CCPRES 12 O BK CDPRES 38 BK G LID 13 G BK LID 39 BK BR LOD 14 BR BK LOD 40 BK SL CCRESET 15 SL BK CDRESET 41 Y BL LIC 16 B
422. tween the modem and the Central Office The field has a default of T for tone dialing Pulse dialing is indicated by P The field length should be 3 characters long This field is concatenated with the dial string This field is not case sensitive Default is upper case Adjustable Make Break Ratio This field controls the make break ratios of pulses and DTMF dialing The Intel product information has support for different make break options for pulse dialing only Intel uses amp PO to select a ratio of 39 make and 61 break for communication within the United States and Canada The option amp P1 sets a ratio of 33 make and 67 break for the United Kingdom and Hong Kong This field has a blank default and a 5 character long entry This field is not case sensitive Default is upper case Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 B Option Switch Settings External Modem Option Settings Page B 4 Table B 1 Modem Fields Continued Modem Connection Description Dial This field has a default of D in a field 3 characters long This field Command denotes the dialing command of the modem This is a standard command This field is not case sensitive Default is upper case No Answer Most external modems provide a timer that abandons any outbound data Time Out call after a predetermined interva
423. uct The DEFINITY ECS may contain a Class 1 LASER device if single mode fiber optic cable is connected to a remote Expansion Port Network EPN The LASER device operates within the following parameters a Maximum Power Output 5dBm a Wavelength 1310 nm a Mode Field Diameter 8 8 microns CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT IEC 825 1993 A caution Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure Contact your Lucent Technologies representative for more information Cabinet Preparation 1 Open the front door gt NOTE Administration may be required before removing the circuit pack in the following step DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add the Fiber Optic Cable Page 5 73 2 Determine which slot 1 or 2 will contain the new fiber optic circuit pack Remove the circuit pack or the blanking plate from this slot gt NOTE If a circuit pack is removed from the required slot it must be installed into a different slot in the cabinet All translations associated with this circuit pack must also be moved Remove the circuit pack or the blanking plate from the slot next to the slot determined in step 2 Two consecutive open slots are required to install the fiber optic adapter gt NOTE If a cir
424. uct with two 3 wire twist lock receptacles right side 16 AC power duct with four 3 wire twist lock receptacles left side 17 Raceway cover 18 Raceway cover with utility outlet 19 AC power duct combination end 21 AC power duct with one 4 wire twist lock receptacle right side 22 I O duct side of cabinet to wall 43 inch 109 2 cm aisle 23 I O duct side of cabinet to wall over one cabinet 24 I O duct side of cabinet to wall over two cabinets 25 I O duct side of cabinets to wall over three cabinets 26 I O duct rear of cabinet to wall 43 inch 109 2 cm aisle 27 Transition between older DIMENSION system type cabinet and new DEFINITY system cabinets for shielded cable ducts Continued on next page DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 C Cable Ductwork Table C 1 Page C 4 ED 1E465 Group Numbers and Descriptions Continued Group Description 28 Transition between older DIMENSION system type cabinet and new DEFINITY system cabinets for I O cables 29 Shielded duct assembly transition from the front of a System 85 R1 cabinet to the rear of a DEFINITY cabinet 30 I O duct transition assembly for cross aisle System 85 R1 lineup to bridge a DEFINITY lineup 31 Shielded duct assembly transition from rear of a System 85 R1 to front of a DEFINITY cabinet 32 AC power with a 4 wire twist loc
425. udes 48 kbps for transmitting framing and D channel contention information for a total interface speed of 192 kbps ISDN BRI serves ISDN terminals and digital terminals fitted with ISDN terminal adapters See also Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN andintegrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface ISDN PRI Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface ISDN PRI The interface between multiple communications systems that in North America includes 24 64 kbps channels corresponding to the North American digital signal level 1 DS1 standard rate of 1 544 Mbps The most common arrangement of channels in ISDN PRI is 23 64 kbps B channels for transmitting voice and data and 1 64 kbps D channel for transmitting associated B channel call control and out of band signaling information With nonfacility associated signaling NFAS ISDN PRI can include 24 B channels and no D channel See alsolntegrated Services Digital Network ISDN andIntegrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface ISDN BRI intercept tone An tone that indicates a dialing error or denial of the service requested interface A common boundary between two systems or pieces of equipment internal call A connection between two users within a system International Telecommunications Union ITU Formerly known as International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee CCITT ITU is an international organization that sets unive
426. uipment The Auxiliary cabinet allows for carrier 23 inch 58 4 cm rack or panel mounting of hardware The following equipment is furnished with the cabinet Fuse panel Distributes 48 VDC power to fused cabinet circuits Power receptacle strip Provides switched and unswitched 120 VAC receptacles DC connector block Required when Auxiliary cabinet is powered by an external DC source AC to DC power supply Converts AC power provided by the AC power strip switched outlet to the required DC voltage Install equipment inside the cabinet as specified in the CSD The following optional equipment can be installed Audichron H9040 Wake Up Announcement System 909A B Universal Coupler 7400 Series Data Modules Z77A Multiple Data Mounting Fan Assembly Requires 120 volt AC power COMSPHERE 3000 series modems External Channel Service Unit CSU 1 is required for each T1 carrier link PagePac Paging System 3 models are available All PagePac models require 120 VAC power DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 1 Install and Connect Cabinets Install System Cabinets Page 1 5 Model 15A Announcement System See Table 1 1 for PEC codes Table 1 1 Model 15A Announcement Equipment PEC Code Description PEC 63240 1 chassis and 1 BLD1 circuit pack PEC 63241 1 BLD1 circuit pack PEC 63242 1 chassis and 1 BLD2 circui
427. uired per site 2 Set Switch 6 down disabled DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment TN1654 DS1 Converter Release 6r Only Page 5 24 o o o 12 20 50 10 10 Az 20 oO n D se DEN 0015_0 RBP 052396 Figure 5 11 DS1 Converter Circuit Pack Switches 1 Set Switch 1 down for E1 facilities All subsequent facility switch settings Switches 2 5 reflect E1 impedance on each of the 4 facilities For example If Switch 1 is down and Switch 2 is up Span A Line Impedance of 120 Ohms is selected If Switch 1 is down and Switch 2 is down SpanA Line Impedance of 75 Ohms is selected 2 Set Switch 1 up for T1 facilities All subsequent facility switch settings Switches 2 5 reflect T1 framing on each of the 4 facilities For example If Switch 1 is up and Switch 2 is up ESF framing is selected If Switch 1 is up and Switch 2 is down D4 framing is selected 3 Set Switch 6 to the down disabled position Switch 6 may not be present or active on all TN1654 DS1 Converter circuit packs DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment TN1654 DS1 Converter Release 6r Only Page 5 25 Install the Circuit Pack and Cabling T1 Only The
428. uit pack codes are enclosed in square brackets For information about connecting and administering non United States circuit packs refer to the Application Notes in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment List of Circuit Packs List of Circuit Packs Issue 5 May 1998 Page 5 65 Table 5 16 lists the circuit packs sorted by apparatus code including circuit packs used in non United States installations For more information on the circuit packs and other equipment refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 System Description Pocket Reference Table 5 16 Circuit Packs and Circuit Modules Apparatus Code Name Type 631DA1 AC Power Unit Power 631DB1 AC Power Unit Power 644A1 DC Power Unit Power 645B1 DC Power Unit Power 649A DC Power Unit Power 650A AC Power Unit Power 676B DC Power Supply Power 982LS Current Limiter Power CFY1B Current Limiter Power CPP1 Memory Expansion Control ED 1E546 DEFINITY AUDIX R3 System Port Assembly TN2169 TN2170 TN566 TN567 ED 1E546 Call Visor ASAI over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway R1 Port Assembly TN2208 TN2170 J58890MA 1 CallVisor over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway R2 Port Assembly TN
429. umber 26 Inthe FRL field enter 0 gt NOTE For the following step if the Central Office CO wants KP11ST as the dialed digit string then leave blank If the CO wants KP911ST then insert a 9 inthe Inserted Digits field 27 Administer the Inserted Digits field if needed and press Enter 28 Atthe prompt type change route pattern lt number gt the route pattern to be changed in the example above the route pattern is 12 and press Enter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment CAMA E911 Installation Page 5 140 7 Page 1 of D Pattern Number 12 Grp FRL NPA Pfx Hop Toll No Del Inserted IXC No Mrk Imt List Digits Digits Leia 0 1 user 2 user 3i user 4 user BS user 6 user BCC VALUE TSC CA TSC ITC BCIE Service Feature Numbering LAR 01234W Request Format l1 yyyyyn y none both ept outwats bnd BAND ___ none 2 yvyyyyn a rest next 3 yyyyyn n rest rehu 4 yyyyyn n rest none 5i y yy yym rest none M yyyyyn n rest a Screen 5 7 Route Pattern form Page 1 29 30 31 32 On the Route Pattern screen in Grp No field type the CAMA trunk group number and press Enter In the FRL field type 0 gt NOTE For the following step if the Central Office CO wants KP911ST as the dialed digit string then lea
430. unication between the radio controller circuit pack and up to two wireless fixed bases I3 Interface A proprietary interface used for the DEFINITY Wireless Business System for the cell antenna units Each wireless fixed base can communicate to up to four cell antenna units IAS Inter PBX Attendant Service ICC Intercabinet cable or intercarrier cable ICD Inbound Call Director ICDOS International Customer Dialed Operator Service ICHT Incoming call handling table ICI Incoming call identifier ICM Inbound Call Management IDDD International Direct Distance Dialing IDF Intermediate distribution frame IE Information element immediate start tie trunk A trunk on which after making a connection with a distant switching system for an outgoing call the system waits a nominal 65 ms before sending the digits of the called number This allows time for the distant system to prepare to receive digits On an incoming call the system has less than 65 ms to prepare to receive the digits IMT Intermachine trunk in Inch INADS Initialization and Administration System incoming gateway A PBX that routes an incoming call on a trunk not administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B to a trunk not administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 27 info
431. unk auxiliary field is aligned with the left side of the system cabinet See Figure 2 4 This arrangement allows for growth on the right side of the MDF o Q tort pi 9 1758421b MMR 031496 Figure Notes 1 4 Feet 1 22 m 6 7 8 Inch 2 22 cm 2 Horizontal Line 7 23 Inches 58 4 cm 3 7 68 Inches 19 5 cm 8 8 Feet 2 43 m 4 47 5 Inches 120 6 cm 9 AC Power Strip 5 5 31 Inches 13 5 cm 10 Floor Line Figure 2 4 110P Type Terminal Blocks 900 Pair DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Install Equipment and Cables Page 2 9 T If you are installing 300 pair terminal blocks draw a level horizontal line on the wall 47 5 inches 1 2 m above the floor See Figure 2 3 If you are installing 900 pair terminal blocks draw a level horizontal line on the wall 23 inches 58 4 cm above the floor See Figure 2 4 To mount the first trunk auxiliary field terminal block partially install 2 3 4 inch 12 wood screws 7 11 16 inches 19 5 cm apart on the left side of the horizontal line on the wall Slide the bottom terminal block feet onto the mounting
432. uration 4 12 management terminal introduction 3 10 refresh spe 4 7 reset system interchange 4 7 set expansion link 4 11 set tone clock 4 10 status system all cabinets 4 7 4 10 4 11 test board 4 8 test inads link 6 4 test shadow link 4 6 test tdm port network 4 9 test tone clock 1a 4 5 Issue 5 May 1998 Page IN 4 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 Index companding mode 3 12 COMSPHERE 3000 1 4 COMSPHERE modem B 2 concrete floor anchor 1 34 1 35 conductor coupled bonding 2 26 connecting administration terminals 2 44 terminals 2 40 oe connections fiber optic A 2 connectors data communications equipment B 8 console attendant test procedure 6 2 selector test procedure 6 2 control carrier outputs cable 5 10 country codes 3 13 country options setting 3 12 coupled bonding conductor 2 26 description 2 26 craft password changing 3 14 critical reliability ea testing systems 4 6 4 7 4 10 4 11 Czechoslovakia country code 3 13 Issue 5 May 1998 Page IN 5 D data communications equipment connector B 8 date set procedure 3 15 E day of the week table of English names 3 15 DB9 on back of PC 3 6 DC power ground wiring DC 1 19 signaling leads
433. uration all to determine if the new circuit pack appears in the correct slot and that there are no circuit pack conflicts DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add Multiple Announcement Page 5 106 Add Multiple Announcement TN750C Multiple Announcement circuit packs are required if the system has multiple announcement circuit packs At least 1 TN750C circuit pack is required A maximum of 10 TN750C Announcement circuit packs are allowed in a system No more than 1 TN750 or TN750B can reside in the system The TN750C can install in any port or service TDM slot and need not reside in a control carrier for extra power holdovers The announcements from a TN750 or TN750B can be saved and then restored to a TN750C gt NOTE Do not copy or restore announcements from a TN750C to a TN750 or TN750B circuit pack as this process may corrupt the announcement data TN750C Announcement Circuit Pack The TN750C circuit pack contains on board flash memory which provides internal backup of announcements on the circuit packs Thus the TN750C circuit pack does not need the save and restore processes However you can use the save and restore processes to copy announcements from the TN750 or TN750B to a TN750C circuit pack The TN750C circuit pack can replace a TN750 or TN750B circuit pack The difference in
434. utlets Four pair station cables can be run directly from a satellite location to the information outlets as previously described AKKKK KX r758533a CJL 031196 Figure Notes 1 Part of Main Distribution Frame MDF 7 B25A Cable 2 3 Pair Connecting Blocks 8 3 Pair Circuits 3 Purple Field 9 356A Adapter 4 Blue Field 10 Information Outlet 5 Patch Cord or Cross Connect Jumpers 11 3 Pair Circuit in 4 Pair Wire 6 To System Cabinet 3 Pair Modularity 12 DIW Station Cable D Inside Wire Figure 2 23 3 Pair to 4 Pair Circuit Distribution and Connectivity gt NOTE Bridged taps are not allowed on any part of the station wiring DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Layout Page 2 39 Layout Locate Information Outlets The customer or marketing representative must provide floor plans showing the information outlet locations and types flush or surface mounted required The floor plans must also show a complete overview of all conduit and cabling facilities in the building Locate Satellites and Sites Use the following information when determining site satellite or adapter locations a Keep the number of locations to a minimum b To minimize the station wiring distances centrally locate the sites satellites or adapters among the information outlets c Site satelli
435. ve blank If the CO wants KP11ST then delete one digit Administer No Del Digits field if needed and press Enter At the prompt type change cama numbering and press Enter DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment CAMA E911 Installation Page 5 141 a System CESID Default 5241100 Ext Ext Total Ext Ext Total Len Code CESID Length Len Code CESID Length 4_ 101 5381234 ga 4 559 F Page 1 of B CAMA NUMBERING E911 FORMAT X P Screen 5 8 CAMA Numbering Format form 33 34 35 In the CAMA Numbering E911 Format screen page 1 in System CESID Default field enter your own system default and press Enter This is the number outpulsed when the extension code is not found in the CAMA Numbering table See Screen 5 8 Inthe Ext Len Ext Code CESID and Total Length fields fill out to your own CAMA numbering plan and press Enter Be sure to cover all extensions At the prompt type change cor lt numbers the class of restriction COR to be changed and press Enter Change all CORs that are defined for stations in order to remove any calling party restrictions for 911 calls DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555
436. ve time enter enough letters for each part of the command to make it unique For example if you want to enter the command change system parameters country options typing cha sys coun is acceptable However typing the entire command is always best gt NOTE The craft login may not be allowed to perform some of the steps needed to initialize the system If access is denied to some of these procedures contact your Lucent Technologies representative for assistance Getting Help Use the Help key for a list of options and the Cancel key to back out of any command Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description for detailed procedures DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System System Administration Page 3 11 System Administration gt NOTE An init login is required to perform the following Contact the regional CSA Customer Software Associate to assign the Offer Category option Maintenance capabilities to initialize the system and access to either an internal or external modem are the only command options available until the Offer Category option is set Log in to the System gt A O N 6 Ta Verify the screen displays Login Type craft and press Enter Verify the screen displays password Type crftpw and press E
437. ver PACCON Options 1 If ISDN PRI is being assigned as a new feature on the system get the DOSS order number of the ISDN PRI addition 2 Call the regional CSA to request an init login The CSA should enter change system parameters customer options and press Enter to enable the ISDN PRI if necessary and the PRI Over PACCON option For details on enabling this option see DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description Assign or Reassign ISDN PRI Feature 1 Assign or reassign ISDN PRI using the forms listed under Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Administration and Feature Description DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment Add PRI Over PACCON to R6si Page 5 128 Resolve Alarms 1 Examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Maintenance for R6r Contact INADS to Enable Customer Options and Verify Alarm Origination 1 Be sure the system is part of the existing INADS database by calling the INADS Database Administrator at the Technical Service Center TSC Verify that INADS can dial into the system and that the system can dial out to INADS As part of the system registrat
438. wer Distribution Unit comcode 107250995 One T Cable comcode 847529872 Two 8 32 x 1 2 inch Shoulder Screws One 8 32 x 1 inch Screw One Spacer Bracket comcode 847554441 Refer to Figure 5 21 while installing the power distribution unit 1 Set the spacer bracket onto the mounting plate and secure with the 8 32 x 1 2 inch shoulder screws The spacer bracket is not shown in Figure 5 21 but is installed behind the top power distribution unit Slide the keyhole slots in the power distribution unit over the shoulder screws Insert the 8 32 x 1 inch screw through the distribution unit through the spacer bracket and into the plate The mounting hole is located just above the wire clip Tighten the screw securely Set the battery back up switch to the 1 32 down position Power down the 1145B unit as described on the label on the side of the unit Remove the output power cable between the 1145B and the 1146B units The cable will not be reused Connect the P1 connector end of the T cable to the bottom power distribution unit Connect the P2 connector to the top distribution unit Connect the P3 connector to the 1145B Power up the 1145B as described on the label on the side of the unit DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 5 Install and Wire Telephones and Other Equipment 1145B Power Supply
439. wide and horizontal patch cord troughs are 23 inches 58 4 cm wide Each 110A type terminal block is 10 81 inches 27 4 cm wide however no horizontal patch cord troughs are used and the blocks are shorter than 110P type terminal blocks This allows the 110A type terminal blocks to be stacked Therefore the 110A type hardware requires less space than the 110P type hardware on a per station basis Cable Slack Manager A Cable Slack Manager is 32 inches 81 3 cm wide The quantity of which is determined by dividing the total length of the MDF in inches cm by 32 81 3 A partial number of 0 4 or less should be rounded down and a partial number of 0 5 or more should be rounded up for example 2 4 2 cable slack managers and 2 5 3 cable slack managers gt NOTE Cable clamps are required in installations with cable slack managers At the rear of the cabinets on each rear ground plate install 2 cable clamps using the screws provided These clamps hold the 25 pair input output or MDF cables in place DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 2 Install Telecommunications Cabling Install Equipment and Cables Page 2 6 Install Equipment and Cables Hardware Installation The following procedures assume 1 system technician is performing the installation Procedures are provided for installing the following a Main Distribution Frame MDF a Ca
440. y 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Administer System Configurations Release 6r Page 3 22 Add Cabinet 2 through N Release 6r 1 Enter add cabinet lt 2 44 gt See Screen 3 8 2 Fill in the blanks as required by the location and nature of the cabinet add cabinet 5 Page 1 of 1 SPE Bi CABINET CABINET DESCRIPTION Cabinet 5 Cabinet Layout Cabinet Type expansion portnetwork Number of Portnetworks 1 Room Floor Building CARRIER DESCRIPTION Carrier Carrier Type Number Screen 3 8 Typical Add Cabinet Form DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 6 Issue 5 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 230 112 May 1998 3 Install Management Terminal and Activate System Administer Fiber Links Release 6r Only Page 3 23 Administer Fiber Links Release 6r Only Administer system fiber link configurations to match the hardware installed and according to the Fiber Optic Cable Running List gt NOTE Fiber link administration interacts with or depends upon other system features that must be administered before it Fiber link administration creates translation data by identifying the endpoint pairs for each link Endpoints can be a An Expansion Interface El circuit pack A Switch Node Interface SNI circuit pack Circuit Pack Form After installing the equipment including circuit packs the circuit packs must be administered before the fiber link is administered Re
441. y 1998 Glossary and Abbreviations Page GL 33 MISCID Miscellaneous identification MMCS Multimedia Call Server MMCH Multimedia call handling MMI Multimedia interface MMS Material Management Services MO Maintenance object modem A device that converts digital data signals to analog signals for transmission over telephone circuits The analog signals are converted back to the original digital data signals by another modem at the other end of the circuit modem pooling A capability that provides shared conversion resources modems and data modules for cost effective access to analog facilities by data terminals When needed modem pooling inserts a conversion resource into the path of a data call Modem pooling serves both outgoing and incoming calls modular processor data module MPDM A processor data module PDM that can be configured to provide several kinds of interfaces RS 232C RS 449 and V 35 to customer provided data terminal equipment DTE See also modular trunk data module MTDM A trunk data module that can be configured to provide several kinds of interfaces RS 232 RS 449 and V 35 to customer provided data terminal equipment modulator demodulator See modem monitored call Seelactive notification call MOS Message oriented signaling MPDM Modular processor data module MS Message server ms Millisecond MS T Main satellite tributary DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Relea

Lucent Technologies Release 6 Security Camera User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents